The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutB09-0321 project manual (Intro thru Division 06 Wood and Plastics) volume 1 of 2 ,°' P ROJ ECT MAN UAL �°��t VOLUME 1 OF2 � � �� D MAR U 8 �O�a TOWN OF VAIL First Chair Vail, Colorado Town af Vaii 0�� 1�E �OPY Permit Se -��'a October 3 ,,� ��0.� � ��''��D � ; �j '%� �O�'�';i;';Unli � �(�l�e��ti' � r,',``.I,',.✓ �uildin 'Y C�velopment De �.. 9 Safety and Inspection Serve��s Permit Set Sy, .rti1� _ _,.... �:�-� � ��I � Addendum #1- ,`r�t��;�,Q�D3��slThe i�ua�ode/(nterna.f��i�,�:.a__.,^ . ��t� � � cr�•., . � an l c�(; r . b.,�p��mit for, cr e�.,�' Gr,��r,��f�ry , � _ J � .� . V�SI�iIS Cf tf11S �� `rr-rT�L J < , �Addendum #2-��`t`��'��Id�su.�1n dQ °f`�y°'^=,�� `,. ' 2 �, ��1'�code or 9 to give�� ., Vali�. f;�.,�v:;u:.ncV Gf other ordinancs.;cf t`.� � ' _ � �� Other c,;, ,.,, a AEr�'�ii b ��_� . _ Corre ��. � � �'�t prevent P;;�b� _�,��c ;- :�c,, c.;cr.:,ir�rh,� ��c: building c;f;c;al i, � ce��:,��. .;�;';, "-. : _ ♦ ♦ J 4 VO' : .... ��. ._ . sl� e�`��.f� 4uirQ,';`�'J iJy �.�....... . uc�ur „ ,,in vi�la;icn � . ��:�,�:�.:�_,:_- this jurisdiciian. c, f;,;s c��';,7 cr�;`,-;.,: . , p�s EXAMINEI3; �, � OZ ArCI11t@CtUre nATE: �� v 1805 29th Street, Suite 2054 Boulder, Colorado 80301 OZ Project No. 17030.00 ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 DOCUMENT 00001 -TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 GENERAL INFORMATION 00001 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00002 PROJECT DIRECTORY SERIES 00 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS 00330 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND REPORTING DIVISION 01 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 SUMMARY 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01420 REFERENCES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES - 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 -1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � �: � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � � � R .� DIVISION 02—SITEWORK � 02220 SITE DEMOUTION � 02300 EARTHWORK � 02370 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL � 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION ; 02518 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS � 02530 SANITARY SEWERAGE � S" ° 02580 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION, CONDUITS AND GAS SYSTEMS � ' 02630 STORM DRAINAGE � 02720 UNBOUND BASE COURSE F' � 02740 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT � 02750 RIGID PAVEMENT � 02751 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS � ' 02752 CONCRETE PAVING CURING � � 02810 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM � � 02840 PARKING ACCESSORIES � � 02920 SOIL PREPARATION � 02950 PLANTINGS � � 02960 SEEDING AND SODDING � Y DIVISION 03—CONCRETE � � 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE € 03541 GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT � � � s � DIVISION 04—MASONRY � k k ' i. 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES . � 04860 STONE MASONRY � t � DIVISION 05—METALS � 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL � 05310 STEEL DECK � 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING � 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS � 05511 METAL STAIRS � ; 05532 ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS � 05721 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS � � � :� .3 :� � TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 -2 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � b � ;� � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 DIVISION 06 -WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06130 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06150 WOOD DECKING 06160 SHEATHING 06176 METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06185 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06201 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06640 PLASTIC PANELING DIVISION 07 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07141 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07180 CONCRETE SEALERS 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07260 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDERS 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS �� 07460 SIDING 07552 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07725 ROOF ICE MELT SYSTEMS 07811 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07841 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07842 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07920 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08- DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08141 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08215 HOLLOW CORE WOOD DOORS 08263 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08550 WOOD WINDOWS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO q � � �: � x FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � x � � DIVISION 09—FINISHES � � � 09111 NON—LOAD—BEARING STEEL FRAMING £ 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER � 09250 GYPSUM BOARD ; 09310 CERAMIC TILE � t 09651 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE � 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES � 09680 CARPET = 09681 CARPET TILE �� ; 09911 EXTERIOR PAINTING ` 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING � � 09920 PAVEMENT MARKING r 09960 HIGH—PERFORMANCE COATINGS � � � � � DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES � f ` 10201 LOUVERS AND VENTS � 10310 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES � 10431 SIGNAGE � 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER GABINETS � 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS g p 10605 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS �' � 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES � }' ; � �DIVISION 11 —EQUIPMENT fi' ¢ � 11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT E ' 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES � e � z � DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS � � 12356 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK � � 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS � ? � � DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION � ; � � 13852 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE—ALARM SYSTEM � � 13865 RADIO AMPLIFICATION SYSTEM ; � � ' �! 9 t 9 x TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 -4 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � :; � � k � ; : � , � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 DIVISION 14- CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � , �: � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 �� .t, � VOLUME 2 � �: , DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL x g ;: 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS i 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS � � � 15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION ' r 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING � 15145 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES � F ' 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING � 15155 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES �! 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING =' s 15165 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES � � 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING � 15195 FACILITY NATURALGAS PIPING � 15300 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS � 15446 SUMP PUMPS § 15450 POTABLEWATER STORAGE TANKS ; 15513 CONDENSING BOILERS � ;; 15515 WATERTUBE BOILERS � ; 15550 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS,AND STACKS � 15555 DRAFT CONTROL DEVICES .. � 15762 UNIT HEATERS � � 15763 FANCOIL UNITS j 15764 CONVECTION HEATING UNITS � � 15815 METAL DUCTS � � 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES � ' 15838 POWER VENTILATORS � � � 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING • � � € i �: x � ; � � � � � ; � � 5 �5 's 7- ' fiCY :R ? � � Z � j � TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 -6 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO "'� � � � � z � � � � :' � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16231 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16441 SWITCHBOARDS 16442 PANELBOARDS 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16714 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 16716 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 16717 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING END OF DOCUMENT 00001 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 -7 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO �- - � �. � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � _� , � � � �: � � � }� � �' �` € � u ; � � � � �: 3 � } i t � f 6 s � k � 3 � �' k �> � � � � � � ; � @ �y t. �. i " ` k k- � �. S � a= 'a � i & 2 � � � '� j 5 � � ° � � f � ,£ � a TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 -8 � ? OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � _ � � � � � � , � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � DOCUMENT 00002 - PROJECT DIRECTORY Owner Vail Resorts Development Company 137 W. Benchmark Road Avon, CO 81620 (303 754-2371 �� C�LQ� Fax(303)754-2792 � Architect /�� E�VARpRp O� OZ Architecture of Boulder, Inc. � A�E'�AN S * 1805 29th Street, Suite 2054 * �L�6� V Boulder, CO 80301 � � (303)449-8900 Fax(303)449-3886 �� Civil Engineer Alpine Engineering 34520 Highway 6 Unit A-9 Edwards, CO 81632 (970)926-3373 Fax(970)926-3390 Structural Engineer Monroe 8� Newell Engineers, Inc. 70 Benchmark Road Suite 204 Avon, CO 81620 (970)949-7768 Fax(970)949-4054 ' Mechanical/Electrical Engineer � Beaudin Ganze Consulting Engineers, Inc. 110 East Beaver Creek Boulevard Suite 202 Avon, CO 81620 (970)949-6108 Fax(970)949-6159 Landscape Architect MAC Design P.O. Box 6446 Avon, CO 81620 (970)977-0016 PROJECT DIRECTORY 00002-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � DOCUMENT 00002 - PROJECT DIRECTORY Owner Vail Resorts Development Company 137 W. Benchmark Road Avon, CO 81620 (303 754-2371 Fax (303) 754-2792 Architect OZ Architecture of Boulder, Inc. 1805 29th Street, Suite 2054 Boulder, CO 80301 (303) 449-8900 Fax (303) 449-3886 ,� A. � Civil Engineer '}�%`a�'�� • �' Alpine Engineering � ; 34510 Highway 6 1 : Unit A-9 � Edwards, CO 81632 � (970) 926-3373 ��v.�� .�.� Fax (970) 926-3390 3� �� Structural Engineer Monroe & Newell Engineers, Inc. 70 Benchmark Road Suite 204 Avon, CO 81620 (970) 949-7768 Fax (970) 949-4054 Mechanical/Electrical Engineer Beaudin Ganze Consulting Engineers, Inc. 110 East Beaver Creek Boulevard Suite 202 Avon, CO 81620 (970) 949-6108 Fax (970) 949-6159 Landscape Architect MAC Design Group, LLC P.O. Box 6446 Avon, CO 81620 (970) 977-0016 PROJECT DIRECTORY 00002- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � �' � � �ia � = , � � � � � � � '; � i � � � � � � � � � € � � ,� 3 a :x ; � � g a � � �� a � :s - � , ;� � � � ' � .� -� � � € „� :� � ,� ,s � _� � � � s .� =� � '� � s � 9 S � .'f 3 � � 'a i � � i ,� � .� S� � � � � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � DOCUMENT 00002 - PROJECT DIRECTORY Owner Vail Resorts Development Company 137 W. Benchmark Road Avon, CO 81620 (303 754-2371 Fax (303) 754-2792 Architect OZ Architecture of Boulder, Inc. 1805 29th Street, Suite 2054 Boulder, CO 80301 (303) 449-8900 Fax (303) 449-3886 Civil Engineer Alpine Engineering 34520 Highway 6 Unit A-9 Edwards, CO 81632 (970) 926-3373 Fax (970) 926-3390 .�°=��,. ��`�1� � Structural Engineer � . . a .a.;�?�� Monroe 8� Newell Engineers, Inc. 4``'e• �Sa F�.�"..*•, 70 Benchmark Road �� • ,r Suite 204 Avon, CO 81620 ��r:• (970) 949-7768 ,,,� �.��=°c� Fax 970 949-4054 '4�,�Q S��NALE;'.• �� C��e��d�t Mechanical/ Electrical Engineer "�� Beaudin Ganze Consulting Engineers, Inc. 110 East Beaver Creek Boulevard Suite 202 Avon, CO 81620 (970) 949-6108 Fax (970) 949-6159 Landscape Architect MAC Design Group, LLC P.O. Box 6446 Avon, CO 81620 (970) 977-0016 � PROJECT DIRECTORY 00002 - 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � DOCUMENT 00002- PROJECT DIRECTORY Owner Vail Resorts Development Company 137 W. Benchmark Road Avon, CO 81620 (303 754-2371 0� �� Fax (303) 754-2792 0�.�•••�••••�FNS O�►o°p p. SqC•••.�E` Architect �' `� : : ..: OZ Architecture of Boulder, Inc. 15 1805 29th Street, Suite 2054 • � Boulder, CO 80301 'O��°:ti"3--�'��,r��,�� (303) 449-8900 �SS/��A4��v�'' Fax (303) 449-3886 Civil Engineer Alpine Engineering 34520 Highway 6 Unit A-9 \\ ��nsnmtn��,� Edwards, CO 81632 �`' t�,�3 `'`�'° ''' (970) 926-3373 ,��,• ` �°p6.�-'' ''�,, ` .�<y �. o`<< :,,-. Fax (970) 926-3390 =o �.= =�. - -�'- - . - Structural Engineer =-�: „�2 3 ��. � Monroe & Newell Engineers, Inc. ?o�.. �,��CV �»°p,,�� 70 Benchmark Road �, F� ., "�;;=�,��' Suite 204 ��'''�..�s��NA�.��\\ Avon, CO 81620 �q�uU,uui�� (970) 949-7768 Fax (970) 949-4054 Mechanical/Electrical Engineer Beaudin Ganze Consulting Engineers, Inc. 110 East Beaver Creek Boulevard Suite 202 Avon, CO 81620 (970) 949-6108 Fax (970) 949-6159 Landscape Architect � MAC Design Group, LLC P.O. Box 6446 Avon, CO 81620 (970) 977-0016 � PROJECT DIRECTORY 00002- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � { € � r t � � �. f' i � t � � �,.. f f ` ti'��,j��r�� h. Y• :��: � `'�., �; . '� .:.i�- 's.. 1� �� C�, � `+� ,��' r . • ��a � i�'� ��i�� 3'� � � � � � $' B� � f § 'yyyy` � � :� gg[ i' � I' � � I � � � � t � � � � 3 � � :1 � � E � r, � � � � � � e @ _ o 9 '� � � � :Y � � �£ ��5, � � � '� }: $ � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � DOCUMENT 00002 - PROJECT DIRECTORY Owner Vail Resorts Development Company 137 W. Benchmark Road Avon, CO 81620 (303 754-2371 Fax (303) 754-2792 Architect OZ Architecture of Boulder, inc. 1805 29th Street, Suite 2054 Boulder, CO 80301 (303) 449-8900 Fax(303) 449-3886 Civil Engineer Alpine Engineering 34520 Highway 6 Unit A-9 Edwards, CO 81632 (970) 926-3373 Fax (970) 926-3390 � Structural Engineer Monrae 8� Newell Engineers, Inc. 70 Benchmark Road Suite 204 Avon, CO 81620 (970) 949-7768 Fax(970) 949-4054 Mechanical/ Electrical Engineer Beaudin Ganze Consulting Engineers, Inc. 110 East Beaver Creek Boulevard Suite 202 Avon, CO 81620 (970) 949-6108 Fax (970) 949-6159 OpVG 3S �C Landscape Architect ;"� � Mac Design, Inc. m P.O. Box 6446 o�ro�nooe Avon, CO 81620 r��Date of�icer�M (970) 977-0016 � p �i �� SCA� � PROJECT DIRECTORY 00002- 1 OZ Architecture Boutder, CO � � i d: t P_ t � � g � � 3 � :q t { �'. � � � ',� � i � � � � ;d � �t N � , �. s � � � s � � � E � � s � � � � � � � � � s ,# 3 € �{ 7 3 9 ` �' ,f � za�a�o ;: � �� Ez� °�� N, , � , � ` �' ' � � � m �L�r�u� � -' stut�9:s�-tr 91sG'tBn��-� _ � � n � � � D'9�'JC��p� � A��4�Z�� : � °� � ; �� .y � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � DOCUMENT 00330 -SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND REPORTING 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Document references information, not a part of the Contract Documents, relevant to the construction of this Project, and available for review and purchase. 1.2 DISCLAIMER AND RESPONSIBILITY A. No representation or warranty, express or implied, is made by the Architect, Engineer, Owner, or any other Party regarding the accuracy, completeness, adequacy, or content of the information referenced in this Document. B. The use and interpretation of information referenced in this Document is at the sole discretion of the User. 1.3 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT A. The Owner's Geotechnical Consultant has conducted subsurface investigations at the Project site and has prepared a report of the investigation. �� 1. Owner's Geotechnical Consultant: Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. 2. Geotechnical ConsultanYs Report or Project Number: 08-6003. 3. Date of Geotechnical Report:April 23, 2008. B. Copies of the Geotechnical Report are on file and may be reviewed at the following location(s): 1. Office of the Geotechnical Consultant(see above for additional information). 2. OZ Architecture; 1805 29th Street, Suite 2054, Boulder, CO 80301; contact: Heike Kerbs. C. Copies of the Geotechnical Report may be obtained, at cost of reproduction, from the Owner upon written request. END OF DOCUMENT 00330 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND REPORTING 00330- 1 OOZ Architecture Boulder, CO _ � ;. t � , FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � �: � � �. � � i f � ° t � � [ x � F � E � � � �. z e ' € k k i g C L G � �. � � � k Sq 3 �} ry � S � � �_ k & � , � � � � i 1 � i �' -s gQ: � [ '� � :S t � � � f. B s � � � t' � d � � � { Y v � � E { f �{ k fr ` SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND REPORTING 00330-2 � OOZ Architecture Boulder, CO �� Subsurface Exploration Program and Geotechnical Recomrnendation� for Proposed Residential Structures North Day Lo# Vail, Colorado � ,�� _ ..� � ��:�� s ...:� � �� .< r - �� :` �i +,.t�, '�_ _ � - s` Prepared for: Mr. Biil Kennedy Vail Reso�ts Development Company 137 Benchmark Road P.O. Box 959 Avon, Colorado 81620 Job Number: 08-6003 Apri123, 2008 �� rv � r�� rs � � � r� � u ��rur-�� r�c 41 eiiV$F£I�SS D�iVB ESSY, Erkc�iew�gd,�t�, 801i2-5�13 �Eic�rae t,3tI3}28S•�i�89 Fax (.��13j 283-iG86 �:w.grouridef7g.cc�rs� Office Locations: �ngEew�c,d • Commerce G�2y • Loaef�nd - �ranbY ' GYpsum 7ABLE OF CONTCNTS Page Purpaseand Scope o�Stu�y ...................................................................................... 1 Proposed Construction ................................................................................................ 2 SiteCondition� ............................................................................................................ 3 Subsurface Exploratior ................................................................................................ 4 LabaratoryTesting ....................................................................................................... 5 Subsurface Conditions ............................._......................................................._.,......... 6 Geotechnical Cansiderations for Design ........................................................................9 SeismicClassification ...................................................................................................10 Building Foundation Systems ....................................................................................... 11 FloorSystems .............................................................................................................13 FoundationWalls ........................................................................................................ 15 Solubie Sulfates and Corrosivity .................................................................................. 17 ,,.> Radon....:......................................................................................................................19 SurfaceDrainage .........................................................................................................20 SubsurfaceOrainage........................................................................................ .......... 23 Praiec� Eartrwc�'�cs .......................................................................................................25 Excavation C�nsiderations ..............:...........................................................................31 Uti�ity Instaliatian ........................................................................... ......34 ........................ PavementSections.......................................................................................................36 ExteriorFlatwork ................................................................................................. .......42 Closure ............................................... .......45 ................................................................. Site Pian with Test Loca#ian5 ............................................................................. F'sgure 1 Logs of Test Hoies ................................................................................. Figures 2 and 3 Legendar�d Notes ............................................................................................. Figure 4 lnterpreted Elevation of Denser Aliuvium.............................................................Figure 5 Interpreted Shallow Groundwater Surface Elevation............................................Figure 6 Swell/Consolida#ion Results.................................................................................Figure 7 � � � §, � E f k P f L F I � � i �" €,. i TABLE OF i.ONTENfS, �ant. : ; � ; � i � i Gradation Test Results ........................................................................................Figure 8 � � ¢ x Summary of Laboratory Test Resuits .............................. .. ..................... Tabies 1 and 2 � . . � � G�aphysica� lnvestigations Report, by ZanCe Geasciences, Irc. ....................A�pendix A � � � ; Pavement Des�gn Calculatians ........................................._...._......................Ap�endix B � 3 � ' � 1 ¢ �q 4 S{ & i: yg � S �' i r � � 1 � � � e ;: � �. � f � � � � ti � y �E � € � • �. i w � i� � i � � y 't �. � 3 ;t i s �q� 1 € � � t q k � � t � � � P ;i f � � - S � 4 � :3 North Day Lot Yaii,Colorado PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF STUDY This report presents ihe resul#s of a subsurface exploration program performed by GROUND Engineering Consultants, inc., (GROUND} io devefop geo#echnical reco�mendatio�►s for �+esign and canstruction of the prapo�ed ir,frastr�ct�re improvements associated wi#h the North Day Lot development ta be constructed generaliy sautheast of the intersection of South Frontage Raad % U.S. Highway 6 and West Lionshead CircEe (eastern most int�rsectionj in Vaii, Coforacio. Our study �vas conducted in genera! accordance w;th GROUND's Proposal No. 08fl2-0?77, dated February 5, 2008. A field exploration program was conducted to obtain information on subsurface conditions. Material samples obtained during the subsurface exploration were tested in the laboratory to provide data on the classification and engineering characteristics of the on-site soils. The results of the field exploration and laboratory testing are presented herein. This report has been prepared to summarize the data obtained and to present our conclusians and recommendations based on the proposed construction a�d the subsurface conditions encountered. Geetechrical design parameters and a discussion ef geotechr�ca! engine�ring considerations related to the cons►.ructian af tne pr��sed bui;�ings and related improvements are in�luued. JoG!+to.G8•fi��3 GROUND Engineering Consultants,Inc. Page 1 �' �; i S � t North Day Lot �� Vail,Colorado �. � � � PROPOSED CONSTRUCTIC3N "' � i v � Present pians cal{ for construc#ion af a r�s�dentiai muiti story strucfure. This structure � � will inciu�e approximately 4 stflries of condominium-type residential space above-grade � € and 3 ievels of below-grade parking. Finaf �uilding €ayouts and structurai Eoads have not � > ! yet been develop�d. b'Ve unde�siand, however, tt�at none of the below-grade levels wiil � gbe designed as habitabie space. Additionaily a new entrance is pro�osed ai�ng South � ? Frantage Road i U.S. Highway 6 with associated improvements. GROUND will be � � availa�le to review pro�ect plans as they are deveioped. � € � � Ths existing retaining walls, sideuvalks and parki�g Icls will be demoEished. New � � �: � driveways and sidewalks wiN be constructed around the buildings. Both wet and dry � e � A � underground utilities will be installed to service the facility. � � i � � If the proposed construction differs signi#icantly from that described above, GROUND � ` should be notified to re-evaluate the recorr�mendations contained herein. � � � � .. � � � � � � � � � � � � • � a � , � � > � � � � � � � ; � :� � � � � � s s � � � -' � � � � � ; Job No.vc�-6G03 GROUND Engineering Consulta�ts,Mc. ?aoe 2 � 4 � 4 ti ` � x i � 8 � .� �: "i � North Day Lot Vail,Coiorado SiTE CtJNDiTfONS The subject property occupies a po�tian of a tapog�aphic ter�ace ovErloaking Gore Creek (Vai1 Cr�ek} from the northern side. The gro�nd has been graded �reviousiy for its pr�sent use as a parking tat and si�pes overal! to ihe south at rela�iveiy Eow gradients, on the or�er of 2 percent. The site is bounded by l3S Hightivay 6 fSouth Frontage Road) and the associated right- of-way fa #he narth, the Landmark Condominiums to the sauth, '�Vest Lienshead Circle to the west and a walking trail to the eas�. At the time of our evaluation, the site was occupied with a functional parking lot with gabion walls and a sidewalk/trail along the north side of the site. The gabions wafls are muiti-tiered and are approximately 10 to 15 feet in height. A pedestrian bridge crossing I-7Q and the Sauth Frontage Road ! U.S. Highway 6 is located near the northwest portion of the site. � Jab Na.�8-60�3 GROUND Engineedng Consutta�ts,Inc. Page 3 i � � � � �� North Day Lot Vail,Colorado � » � � -0 SUBSURFACE EXPLO�ATI�N � � i he subsurface explarat�on for the projec# was conducted in fviarch 2008. Data ��ere � � obtained from a program of c�riiling and sampiing suppiemented by geophysical (seismic � � refraction}surveys. : � � � � Test Holes A total of 9 test hoies were driH�d throughout the site ta evaluate � � subsurface conditions, including �epths !o grounduwater and �edrock, as wel! as to � `� retrieve samples for laboratory tesiing and analysis. The founuaiion test hai2s vr2re � � advanced to depths af approximateiy 25 to 60 feet and the pavement test hole was ; drilied to approximately 10 feet with a truck-mounted, continuous ffight, pavuer auger rig. ; � A GROUND engineer directed subsurface exploration, logged the test holes in the field, ` and prepared the sampies fot transport to our laboratory. � ., � Relatively undisturbed samples of the subsurface materials were taken with a 2anch I.D. � ` °California" -type liner sampler. The sampler was driven into the subst�ata with blows � � from a 14Q-pound hammer falling 30 inches. This procedure is similar to the Standard � .. � ;� Penetration Test described by ASTM Method D1586. Disturbed samples of the � ` subgrade materials were obtained using a Standard Penetration Test sampler in ger�erai � � ; accordance with ASTM D?586. Penetration resistance values (blows per distance { driven, typically 12 ir�ches), when properEy s�taluateo, ir:�icate the relative density ur :� cens�stency of soils ard �eclre�k. Depths at vrhich the sam�!es +r�ere #aken an� � � associated �enetration resistance values are shown �n t{�e test h�fe logs. � � ; � � � Three of the test ho;es were c�mpleted as temporary pie2ometers allcwing on-r�oing re- � � � checks of the groundwater levels at those locaiions. Slug tests were Ferformed in a �' :� sing(e piezometer to allow field evaluations of local hydraulic conductivity. � � � � � � Tre approximate loca;ions of the test holes are shawn in Figure 1_ Logs of �he test � � holes are presented on Figures 2 through 3. Explanatory notes and a legen� are � � $ provided on Figure 4. � � % � � Geophysical Survey A multi-chann�i refraction seismic survey was performed by �' } � ± Zange Geosciences, Inc. (Zonge} to provide additional data between test holes � j regarding the depths and distribution af earth materials. Data tivere co!{ected by means �, � s :� of mu{ti-channel refraction microtremor methodology#hat makes use af ambient seismic � � ` energy. 7he Zonge report, dated Aprit 1, 2008 is presented in Appendix A. � � � L � � � � � � ';X Jo�ho.08-C,GC�3 GROUND Engineering Consuftants,3nc. ?ag�� l � � 'F � � � No:fh Day Lot V�iL Colarado � LABORATORY TESTiNG Sampfes retrieved from our test hoies were examined and visu�iiy classified in the labora#ory by the project engineer. Laboratory testing of soil sampfes o�taine� from the subjeci site inciuded standard property tests; such as natur�i ma'ssture contents, dry unit r,veights, grain size analyses, organic conten#, sweif ! cansoiidation, and Atterberg Gtnits. Water-solubie sulfate content, pH and resistivity tests were perforrr:ed on selected sampies as weli. Labaratory tests were performed �n general accordance with applicable ASTM �rotocols as tabuiated below. Data from the laboratory testing program are summarized in Tabies 1 and 2. � ---TEST � STANDARD ---°--= i � Moisture Content i ASl'M D22�6 : Percent Passing the#200 Sieve ASTM D1140 i Gradation ASTM D422 -----—----- ---------__------------; : Atterber�l.imits ' ASTP�1 D43�8 ` F----.----- ---�------_---._._.-.-------.._.__._.�_.._.._.._._..___._.__.._....__f :,� : � `' ! Water-Solub(e Sulfates ' CPL 2103 i -------_ _-------------------------------------- -------� � ;�H-----.._...---------...--.__.._ : ASTM G51 � ' Elec±ricaf Resistivi � ASTl41 G1$7 : ..- .-----------_�_�`1-------------_�._._____._._..---------_.._._._...................._._.....__..._.....---.._...: = Svrelt!Consoiidati�n ASTM Q4546't72435 ; � t-------------------�------_..._._._..._._._._._..--r------------ ------------� ` Jrganic_Content___ ASTM D297�-87 � �t,b No.C8-6CO3 GROUNO Engineering Consultants,Inc. Paye 5 _ � # � North Day Lot � Vail,Colorado � � ' � ": i � i � � � f SUBSURFACE CONDtTtONS � � �: ` The subsurface conditions encountered in the test hoies r�enerally consisted of sands, � �;' ! grave(s, cobbles and bouiCers interpreted to be relatively recent to oider (Ho�ocene- ta � � tJpper pleistocene} a{luvial (stream-lai�} deposi#s associated with Gare Creek. These � � ; materials inciuded fill soils that were encountered from below the zxisting paved surface � f € ta approximately 4 to 6 feet below grade. Some fHl soils may not be den�ted as such on � � the test hale logs due to similarity to the native materials. Delineating the complete � � vertical and fateral extents of any fills �vas beyond our present scoFe of services, ; i however, fiil soils may be present at Iocations not depicted on our test hole iogs. � ; Therefore, sncountering existing fi11 soils at any location ai the North Day Lot should not � 4 � �e conside�e�+ a "changed condition." � � � ` A genera{ distinction was noted in the native deposits underlying the fill soils between � i f tess dense alluvial deposits {Penetration Resistance Values (N) generally from about � # N=10 to N=46} at shallower depths and the underlying denser alluvium (N > 50). It � ; shauld be noted that refusa( was encountered by ihe drilling equipment af various � # depths and locations across the site. The interpreted depth to this transition from � � moderately dense fo very dense alluvium is depicted on Figure 5, based on interpolation � �; � between and extrapolatior. beyond �hs conditions encountered in the individual test � a f holes. � $ � � � � lrspection. of Figure 5 irdicates tha� the top of the very �ense materiais ap�eared io � x � � Cescend so�theastward, similarly tQ the grQUr,d surface. The �epth ta this transitian is � � 1U to 3a feet across the site, but again is markedly greater near the northwest portion of � � � s the site. This likely refilects a former location of the channef of Gore Creek or a tributary, a � ; in-filled by past grading or a natural shift in the channel alignment. � � 4 � The transition from the upper alluvial deposits ta the lower, denser alluvium appears ta � � carrespond generaily to P-wave velocities in the range of 2,000 to 3,500 ftlsec. Higher � jveiocities are shown at shallower depths, approximately 30 feet beiow exisfing grade, at � ` STA 40 along the seismic line as depicted on Figure 3 of the Zonge report of April 1, � � $ 20Q8. 7his area is likely a zone of more dense sands and gravels. We do not anticipa#e � cuts to extend much deeper than 30 feet, however the Contractor should be prepared #o � � � encounter more resistant material in this area. � � � � The alluvial deposits were not fully penetrated by GROUND's test ho{es that extended to � :� depths as great as 6Q feet. The geophysical survey performed for this evaluation, � � � � � � ,� � % J�b".o.�8-60G�3 GROUND Engineerirsg Consultants,lrsc. Page 6 � � i � � �, a � North Day Lot Vaii,Coforado however, indicated that materiafs avere present at depth exhibiting campressive ��-j wave velocities of 3,500 feet per second (ftlsec}and higher. These velocities most Iikely represen# the tlflaroon Formation mat?r�als that are de�ic#ed �n pubfiwhed geologic maps as underiying the genera! projec# area. The depths at ��vhich the geo�hysica( surv�ys indicated this (iike(y) Maroon Formation was present ranged from approximateiy 65 to 80 feet below existing grades. The Maroon Formation cansists, in generat, of sandstones, siltstones and conglomerates with locai limestone beds. Additionaiiy, the inferred tt�p-of-bedrock is irregular which likely represents the effects of prior stream erosion of that surface. Groundwater was observed commonly in the kest holes at relatively moderate depths, typically betvti,�een 23 to 27 feet. In the project area, groundwater levels are related to the stage of Gore Creek. Figure 6 depicts the interpre#ed elevation of the groundwater table, again based on interpolation between and extrapolation beyond the water levels measured in the test hoies. The water level contours suggest that shailow groundwater is f;owing southeastward across the site, toward Gore Creek. Graundwater levels should be anticipated to fluctuate, however, in response to annual and longer-term cycles of precipitation — particularly spring snow melts, applied irrigation, and surface drainage. Fill ranged from clayey si{ty sands with grave{ to silty clay with sand. They ;nrere moist to very moisf, fcw to mo�+erately Ylastic, io�se t�dense, and brown to pa'se �ray in calar. Although not identified in the tesf ho{es, �ased passed experience in the adjacent areas, construction debris I�kely is present in the fill soils locally. Native Sands and Gravels were generaily silty to clayey sands with gravel. Cobbles and boulders were common throughout the ailuvial section, but pa�ticularly in the lower materiais. They were fine to caarse grained, dry to wet, low ko moderately plastic, moderately dense to very dense, an� pale gray to brown-gra�in co{or. Bedrock Materials were not encountered in tF�e test holes. Based an their geophysical data, however, bedrock materials likely include very hard, resistant sandstones, siltstones and conglomerates of the Maroon Formation. Hydrau/ic Conductivity The resul!s of GROUND's hyclraulic conductivity testing are listed below. Slug testing was per#ormed to determine hydraulic conductivity {Kh) in Test Hole 8 at depth of 35 to 45 feet below existing grade. The result indicated a K,; _ 6.2 x 10�cm/s. Job{va.Q8-60�3 GROUNb Engineering Consultants,Inc. Page 7 � �: � 5' North Day Lot �" ' Vail,Colorado � � ? � ; �' � This value is typicai of silty to clean sands. Based on the perceniage afi fines typicalty � , � encountered in the site sails, these values fikely are generaliy representative of the site � , j soi}s. !t shouid be noted, however, that hydr�ulic conductivity �lalues �lary over many ; � k orders a( magniiude �n �atural sedsrr�ents, and that significar�t changes in hydrau{ic tt ; conductivity can occur abruptiy, both iateraily and verticaliy. � 4 � � � �ggg. ( � L � § � < a � ! i � � 's i � � � � � � � � k � E � � � S $ .' � ! �� . R. & � � �. � � �: � � � � ti d-' '7 § i � � �: E � 4 � � � k � � � � i �° Job No.�8-6GC3 GROUND Engineering Consultants,inc. Page S �� ? �: � � � � �- '� � North Day Lot Vaii,Calorado GEOTECHNi�AL CONSfDERATlOivS FOR DESiGN in general, the Narth Day Lot �s urderiain by mo�erately dense ta very dense, c,ra�Glar soils. These materiais wili provide good fou�dati�n support; no data were de•reloped that suggests significant potentia{s for soils hea•re or collapse. The proposed bui�dings can be supparted on spread foot�ng foundation systems, althaugh other foundation types, such as mat or driven aile foundations could �e used, as weil. Where driven pile foundaiions are seiected, systematic air-percussion pre-drilling wili be needed io advance fhe piles. Recommendation for a deep foundatio� system can be provided upon request. Because of the density of the coarse granular soils, difficult excavation conditions will be encountered throughout the site, except where structures are founded at very shallow depths. tn addition, groundwater is moderately shaltow, and should be anticipated in farge volumes in deep excavations. Buildings with below-grade levels will need to be protected by permanent de-watering systems. These systems should be designed to remove large volumes of water throughout the design-lives of the structures. J�b tvo.08-Su03 GROUND Enginee�ing Consultants,fnc. Page 9 � � ; �: � ;; � � � North Day Lot � Vail,Colorado P y � ; � � f SEISMiC CLA�Sf�iCATlON � � � � The p�o}ee# area aalls �v�t�iin Se�s�ric Pe�armance Category A based an AASHTC3 ; � � guidelines, and is cansidered to have a low probability for large, uamaging earthquakes. � � 8ased on the conditions e�countered ir tt;e test holes, extrapola#irg available data ta � ' depth, the si±e fails within fhe parameters of a Seismic Site C►ass C s�te, in accordarce � � with 20G3;2406 IBC. Fiowever: if a quantitative assessment af the ciassificati�n is � � needed. wave velocity testing wi(1 be required. A proposai for this work can be provided � � upon request. Gompared with othe� regions ofi Colorado, recorded �arthquake � � frequency in the project area is relatively low. �� ; � � � �. � x � ; � 4 � ;; � - � R � �: � � � � � � � • � 8 �3, �. � � ,1 �. § $ � jf � � � � �: � � } � � > `� :� � � � J�b IVn."u8-6G�'s GROUND Engineering Cansultants,tnc. P�ge t� ;� � � 3 � � . � North Day Lot Vail,Cotarado � BUILDiNG FODU�ATif3N SYSTEMS The principa; bui�ding structures �avill bear at depths of more than 2u feet below existing grades. Therefore, ai!of these facilities shauld �e supported on contiruous and isolated spread footings bearing ir fhe dense, rati�,re sands and gravels. The �eatechnica! criteria pres�nted �efaw may be abserved for spread #ooting foundatian systems. The construction detai{s should be considered when preparing project documgnts. i) Footings shoufd bear a� �ense, in-place rative, granular soils_ 2) Footings bearing on a properly prepared surface in dense, in-place native, granular soifs may be designed for an aflowabie soii bearing pressure (Q) of 5,000 psf. This value may be increased by '/3 for transient loads such as wind or seismic loading. Based on this bearing capacity, we anticipate direct campressian of the foundation soils upon loading to be on the order of 1 inch. 3} In order to achieve the above-recommended capacity, footing excavation operatr�ns and ,he prepared bearing su�face must be observed by the Geotechnical Engireer. Firm native soiis rr�aterial� n�ay be disturbee� by the excavatian pro�e5s or de-watering. Loca! areas of fess derse rnateriais rnay be �xposed at foundation bearing elevations. Aif such unsuitable maferials should be excauated and replaced w'sth "dental" conc.ete fhat exh�bits a minimum compressive strength of at least 2,000 psi. 4) In order to reduce differential settlemen#s between footings or along continuous footings; footing foads should be as uniform as possible. Differentially loaded footings will settle differentiaiiy. 5} Spread footings shouid have a minimum lateral dimensian of 16 or more inches for iinear strip footings. isolated pad footings shouEd have a minimum, hor':zontaf footing dimension of at least 24 inches. Actual footing dimensions, however, should be determined by the Structural Engineer, based on the design loads. 6} Cc3ntinuous foundation walls shauld be reinfGrced top and bottorn to span an unsupported length of at least �Q feet. � Joh No.Go-i�t"if3 GR4i1NQ Engineering Consultants,Inc. Fage 11 � �: % � a C; �. North Day Lot � � Vail,Colorado „ � � � 7j The iaterai resistance of spread footings wiii be developed as siiding resi�tance � � of fhe footing bot#oms on the foundation materials, and by passive soil pressure � � against the sides of the footings. 5{iding friction at the battom af footings ; bearing dense nat�ve soils ar dental cor;cr2#e may be ta�cen as �.�0 tirnes the � � � vertical dead ioad. A passive earth pr�ssure of 450 psf per fact of embedment �' � may be used, to a maximum o# 4,500 psf. The upper 1 €oot of embedment � � should not be relied upon for passive resistance, however. � � � ; S} Compacted filE placed against the sides of the footings should be compacted to � � at least 96 percent reiative compaction in accordance with the recommendations � � � � in the Projecf Earthworks section of this report. � � � ; 9) Care shauld be taken when excavating the foundation to avoid disturbing the � > supporting materials. Hand excavation or carefu! backhoe soil removal may be � � required in excavating the last few inches. � � } 10) Foundation soils may be disturbed or deform excessively under the wheel loacls � � of heavy construction vehicles as the excavations approach footing levels. ; Construction equipment should be as light as possible to limit development of � � this condition. The use of track-mounted vehicles is suggested because they � � exert iav�jer contact pressures. The movement af vehic�es over propased j faundatio� areas shculd be restricted. ' s � ` 11 j Anticipated foofirg bearing elevations are at cr be►ow the focal water levels � � . � encourtered in the test t�cfes. Therefcre, it wiA necessary to de�tivater the footing � � excavations during construction. De-watering should not be conducted by � � � � pumping fram insicle foating excavations. This may decrease the supporting , � capacity of the materials. � � � A Geotechnicaf Engineer should be retained to observe and iest alf footing excavations � � prior to placement of reinforcing steel o�concrete. � � � � � � � � � � � � � > � � � ,x � .;ob�Jo.�8-EG03 GROUNt7 Engineering Consuitants,Inc. Faye i2 , ,t � � ; s � � � North Day Lot Vait,Colorado � �l�O�#Z �YST�MS As discussed in the Geotechrical Consrtl�ra�ions for Desrgn sec#;an af th;s report, a concrete sla�-an-grade floor, bearing an a properiy �repared subc�rade may �e used for the iat�rest !evels (parking le�e4s}af the proposec! structures. The fo(iowing criteria shoufd be observed for design and cansiruction o� �lat-on-�rade concrets floors: i} A slab-�n-grade ffoor system should p3aced on pra�erly prepare� subgrad� consisting of dense native, granular soils. 2) An allawabie vertical s�ii modulus (Kv) of 175 pci may be used for �esign of concrete siabs bearing on a properiy prepared subgrade. 3) A Geotechnical Engineer should be retained to observe the prepared surfaces on which the floor slabs will be cast prior to placement of reinforcement. Loose, soft or otherwise unsuitable materials should be excavated and replaced with properly compacted granular fill. 4} Concrete slabs-on-grade should be constructed and cured in accordance with ap�licable in�ustry standards and provided with properly designed and constructed c�rtro! jainis. ACi, AASHTO and ather industy groups provide c�ui�efines for proper desigr and construction �f concrete slabs-on-grad�, and . associated joii�ting. The design and construct�on of such }oints should account for cracicing resultirg from concrete shrinkage, curfing, tension and appiied loads, as well as other factors related to the proposed sfab use. Joint iayout based on sfab design may require more frequent, additional or deeper join#s than typical industry minimums, and should reflect the configuration and proposed use of the slab. Farticu(ar at#entian in slab joint design shouid be given to areas where slabs exhibit inferior corne�s or curves, e.g., at column block-outs or reentrant corners, and slabs with high iength fo width ratios, significant slopes, thickness transitions, high traffic iaads, or �ther unique features. The impro�er placement or constructior of controf join#s wilt increase the potential for slab cracking. .iob�:o_3&C(lU3 GROUND Engineering Consulfants,tnc. Page 13 � �. ; �' , ; � � � North Day Lot § „ Vaii,Colorado � a � � � 5 j Floor slabs shcui� be adequately reinforced. Recommerdations based on � ; structural considerations for slab thickness, }oiniing, and steel re►nfarcement in � � fioor slabs should be developed by the Structurai Engineer. :f � � ; 6} As pa�t o# the bui!dinr� urderdrain system �iscussed in the Subsurface Drainage � a � section of this repo�f, GROUND recammends piacement of a properly � compacted layer of frez-draining gravel, 12 or more inches in thickness, beneath d each slab. This layer will heip distribute floor slab ioadings, ease construction, � � � `= red�ce cap�llary moisture rise, and aid in drainage. The free-drainin� gravel � � � should conta�n less than 3 percent material passing the No. 200 Sieve, more � M than 50 percent retained on the No. 4 Sieve, and a maximum particle size of 2 �' � inches. � � �� '� � ; �4 � � d ! � � � y 3 * �� { �i � S �i � � � � . � Y t � :Y P � � � � � ,� � q � i } tq � ° 4 k � T � t Y `T; � 4g { � '. t � � ti �. � � � a : 3 S � � � � .iob�a.�8-6Ci;3 GROUND Er.gineerin9 Consuttanfs.inc. r�aye 13 t ' � � � � � � � � � North Day Lot Vail.Colorado � �OUNDA7'ION WALlS We understand that th� �roposed beiow-grade parking leveis �avill entai� rEEativeEy iali below-grade foundation u�alls. These tival�s wiil be �ateral�y supported ar,d can 5e expected ,a undergo only a limit�d amQar;t of �eflection compris;rc� an "at-rest" condition. V`Je alsa understand ihat they wifi be internafiy braced by the flaor ie�✓eis above the lowest levei. V`Je understand that the excavati�n� for the prapcsed be��w-�rade �arkir�g ieve�s w�ii �e on the order of 2� 10 3� feet in depth. A sharing system to be designed by the Contractor wilf support these near-vertical excavation slopes permanently and largely preserve the exposed soils in their native condition. These cuts will be made close to the proposed faun�ation walls, i.e., 3 to 5 feet. We recommend that this narrow void between the shored cut siope and the foundation wall be backfilled with a coarse, clean, open-qraded qranular material such as 2-inch crushed rock. Based on these conditions; GROUND recommends that the foundation walls be designed to resist a rectangular distribution of lateral earth pressure, taking an (`at-rest') value of 25 pcf to be characteristic af the site soils. Assuming that the foundation wall drainage systems are effective, hydrosta#ic loac�ing need not �e acided to the laterai ioading on the foundati�n wa(Is. �t stioUid be nated that the abcve-recemmended latsral loadiry is basQd cn !he assum�tio� of effective shoring of the native soiis ±ha# preserves them largely in the native condition. W"ere the scils are allowed fo become loosened or disturbed, an 'at- � rest' equivaient fluid pressure of 62 pcf sheuld b� taken to be characteristic af the site soiis. The above `at resY loadings are recommended for well-drained conditions +Nith a horizantal upper backfill surface. The additional loading of an upward sloping backfil(, as weil as foads from traffic, stockpiied materiafs, etc., should �ae inciuded ir foundation wail design. Because of the potential (theoretically) for distress to nearby structures, inciuding buildings, due to movements resulting from the proposed excavation, GROUND recommends that the Contractor perform a pre-excavation survey of the condition of the surrounding improvements and, as appropriate, deploy movement moniiors, crack gauges, etc., so that any construction-related movements {or the lack thereof} can be �rb No.0&6�G3 GROUND Engineering Cor.suitants,tnc. Page?5 � � k � u 8 � � � A North Day Lot � � Vait,Cotorado � � � � � � documented and quantified. The existing structures shoufd be observed regularfy by t�e � � Contractor untif all excavatians are backfilied. � � � � � � F Yp � �. t � � � � y � � E :� � ¢ t �� i � � S � E � � ' d t � � � � �- k � a �, s { � ? � � � i � � � `i � ;� s � �, � �, � � '9� � � t .; � � � � � ,� s � i :t � .� Jcb C�G-�'6-ELD3 GRQUND Engineering Gonsvitants,Inc. Fage i6 s $ � ti �' � � � � � North Day Lot Vai�,Colorado SOtUB�E SUL��TES AND St7iL CORROStVITf Water-Soluble Sulfates Ttie concentrations of },�ater-soluble sulfatss measured i� selected samp{es retrieved from the test hales was less than O.Q1 perceni by weight (See Table 2). Such concentrations o# water-soluble sulfates represent a r,sg�igible environmeni for suCfate attack on concrete exposed io these materiais. Qegrees of at#ack are based on the scale of `negligibie,` `moderate,' `severe` and �very severe' as described in the "Design and Contro( of Concrete Mixtures," pubiished by the Portland Cement Association {PCA). Based on these data and PCA guidelines, GROUND makes no recommendation for use of sulfate-resistant cement in concrete exposed tQ site soil and bedrock. Soif Corrosivity Measurements of soil acidity (pH} and electrical resistiv�ty were made to pravide a general assessment af the potential for corrosion of ferrous metals installed in contact with earth materials, based on the conditions existing at the time of GROUND's evaluation. Test results are summarized in Tabte 2. Values of pH be{ow 7 (neutral) indicate acidic conditions; va�ues greater that 7 indicate basic conditions, on a logarithmic scale. Testing indicated pH vaiues of 7.4 to 8.5, which irdicating that the tested materials are somewhat basic. This wiii nat contribute greatly to corros+cn. Electricat resisfivity is related both to a material's moisture content ar.d to the concenirations of dissolved salts and other conductive constituents in the scil pore water. Measurement of eiectricaE resistivity indicated values of 5,893 and a,121 ohm- centir�eters in selected samples of the site soils. Resistivities between 4,500 and 6,000 ohm-centimetars are classified as `fair,' and grea#er than 6,Q00 ohm-centimeters as 'excellent.' carrasive environment for ferraus metals in contact with site soils, on a scale of `bad,` `fair,' 'good' and `exceilent' as presented in the `Handbaok of Steel Drainage and Highway Construction Prod:,cts" published by tfi�e American 4ron and Stee! Insti#ute. Therefore, the overburrlen s�ils appear to comprise an overali moderately to mildly corrosive environment for rr►etals. Additional tesiing may be ap�rapriate to facilitaie corrosion-resistant design of individual structures or eiernents. Jcb No.Q8-�CO3 Gt20UND Engineering Consultants,inc. Page?7 � � � � ? ; s r � � North Day Lot � � Yail,Colo�ado # 3 � � ° � � � Corrosive conditions can be mitiga#ed i�y use of materia€s nat wlnerabie ta corrosion, � � heavier gauge materiais with longer design lives, ar cathodic protection sys#ems. if � � additianai informa+.�on or recommendations are needed regarding soii ccrrosivity, � � F GROUND recommsnds cantacting a Corrosion ErCineer. I; s"ou(d be nated, ho;�ever, � that changes to the site conditions during construction, such as the import af other sosis, _ � � ar the intended or unintended introduction of off-site water, may alter the cor�osion � potentials significantly. � � � � a � � ; � � � � � t � � � � � � `t" � .. � � � � � � � � � � i f � � a q .$ f � a � m 3^' � t � � � � � � r � � � 'S � 3 � 1 � � :� � i �i f g �. ; P � � � Job�JO.C8-6�J�3 GROUND Engineering Consultants,inc. �'age?8 � � � � � ; � North Day Lof Vait,Colorado � �� Radon is a nafuraEiy occUrr;ng, colorless, odorless, radiaact�ve gas that can cause 4�rg cancer, according to the U.S. Enviranmentaf Pratecfion Ageney (EPA). The occurrence af r�don is difficult ta predict, and structures tivsih a�l types of founda#ions can he axfecte� by radon buiid up. Where radon is ailcu�ed to cor,centr�te in an er�cfosed structare represents a potentiai hazard. It is no� a hazard that can be mitigated by geotechnica! measures, however. Testing for the possible presence of radon gas prior ta projeet development does not yie{d usefui resuits regarding the potential accumulation o# radon in completed structures. Radon accumulations most typically are found in basements, crawi spaces or other enclosed portions of buildings bu+lt in areas �nderlain �t relatively shailow depths by granitic crysta(line rock. The likelihood of encountering radon in concentrations exceeding applicable health standards an the subject site, underlain by relatively deep alluvial soils is somewhat lower, but cannot be excluded. Additional information regarding radon and radon-resistant building design can be obtained fram the EPA (e.g., .�n��.A�.°�a.qOV%�8�bi�) as welf as from many local building andior nealth � departments. GROE1lvD recommen�s fhat rad�n testing oe perfarmed 'sn each buifding on-site, after construcfion is ccmpleted.� Nc�rr�ver; wre undsrstanu' that incorporating su;fic�ent ventilatian and o�her measures into � strGCture to address radon accumu{ation d�ring construction is significantly tess costly than installing them after cons!ructian has been compieted. We recommend that the Architect consider radan mitigative measures for the proposed structure and incorporate appropriate systems into the design. Job h1o.03-6CO3 GROUND Enginesring Consultants,ina ?age 19 � � � ? � < � North Day Lot Vaii,Calorado � g � � i � �� A�a� � � � � The following drainage precautians should �e observed during con�truction a�� maintained at ali times after the facility has been completed. If the drainage measures � i belaw are r�ot implemer;ied a�td maintained effeetively, the mover�ent estimates � � provided in this report cou(d be excesded. Systematic maintznarce is particular;y � # important at this site due ta the neavily irrigation adjacent siopes. �' � � 1� Excessive �etting or dry;ng of the fourdation excavations and under-slab area � 4 should be avoided dufing construction. � ; � � � 2) Positive surface drainage measures should be provided and maintained to � � � � reduce water infiltration into foundation soils. The ground surface surrounding � � the exterior of the building should be sloped to drain away from the foundation in � � ? all directions. We recommend a minimum slope of 12 inches in the first 10 feet � � ; in landscaped areas and 3 inches in the first 10 feet in areas where hardscaping � � covers the ground adjacent to the addition. (It may be necessary to inccrporate �, � ramps or other measures into project design to implement this recommendation � � while complying with access requ+rements.) In no case shoufd water be allowed � � to pond near or adjacent to foundation elements. Ponding will lead to increased � � � infiliratian anC post-constr�ction building movements. � :� < Drairage measures a,so st;�u(d �e included �n pr�ject desigr t� d;rect �rrater � � � away from sidewalks and other hardscaping as wel! as utility trench afignments � s which are fikely ta be adversely affected by moisture-volume cNanges in the � � underlying soils or fiow of infiltrating water. Routine mairtenance ofi site � ;� drainage should be undertaken throughout the design iife af the project. � t � = In GROUND`s exper;ence, ;t is common during construction !hat ;n areas ef � � partially completed paving or hardscaping, bare soil behind curbs and gutters, � � and utility trenches, water is allowed to pond after rain or snow-mett events. � ` Wetting of the subgrade can result in lass of subgrade sup�ort and increased � � settlements or heave. 8y the time final grading has been completed, significart � � volumes of water can already have entered the subgrade, leading to subsequent � � distress and faiiures. The Contractor should maintain effective site drainage � � throughout construction so that water is directed into appropriate drainage � ° strucfures. � � � � _ � � � � � <� .;ob�ic.Q�-5�J03 GROUND£:igineerirtg Consultants,inc. Fage 2G � � � � �. � �� Nor!h Day Lot Vail,Colorado � 3) The ground surface near foundetion elements shouid be abie to convey water away readily. Ground coverings that direct ti�ater downward rather than away fram the addition should not be used to ca��er the ground surface n�ar the foundations or ot;�er improvements se�sitive ta pos:-corstructi�n s�il movements. Cobbies or other materiais that tend ta act as baffies and restrict surface flotiv should not be used. Correspondingfy, near other project improvements such as hardscaping, where the grcund surface does not convey water away readily additionai post- construction movements and distress shouid be anticipated. 4} Roof downspouts and drains should discharge well beyond the perimeters of the structure foundations, ar be pravided with positive conveyance off-site for coltected waters. Downspouts should not discharge into a building underdrain system. 5) Landscaping which requires watering should be located 10 or more feet from the �� building perimeter. Irrigation sprinkler heads shoufd be deployed so that a�plied water is not introduced into foundation soils. Landscape irrigation should be f:mited to the minimum quantit�es necessary to sustain heafthy plant growth. Use �T drip �rrigation systems can be beneficiaf for r�ducinc� over-sps-ay beyor�d . planters. Drip irrigation also can be beneficiai for re�ucing the amounfs of water introduced to building foundation soifs, but only if the total volumes of appiied �vater are controlied �rvith regard to limiting that introduction. Cortref�ing rafes of moisture increase beneath the fo�ndations and floors sho�ld take hic�her �riority Ehan minimizing landscape plant lasses. Where plantings are desired within 1� feet af the building, GROUND recommends that the plants be placed in water-tight planters, constructed either in-ground or above-graue, to reuuce moisture infiltration in the surrounding subgrac�e soils. Pfan#ers shouid be provided with positive canveyance weti away fram the foundation soiis or off-site for coliected waters. 6} 'JVe do not recommend the use of plastic membranes to cover the ground surface near the buitding without careful consideration of other camponents of proj�cf drainage. Ptastic memb;anes can be beneficial to directing surface Jeb Nc.u8-E003 GROUND Engineering Consultants,Inc. Pa�e 23 � North Day Lot Vail,Cotorado `� waters a4vay from the bui{ding and toward drainage structures. However, they effectively preclude evaporation or transpiration of shailow soif moi�ture. Therefore, soi! moisture terds to increase beneath a continuous membrane. 5 Where p(astic r�embranes are used, adai#iona{ shaifow, subsurface drai;�s shouid be instalied. Perforated "weed barrier" membrancs, whieh allow ready evanorat'ton from the underiying soils may be used. � i � � � � f � � . � . s "sf s � � i � t � � f t t � C s �: � € � i C" t E k � � � �f i � � � � } ,io��vo.�8-fiCiG3 GROUNO Engineering Consakants,If1t. P3ye 22 � e � � € z _ � North Day Lot Vail,Colorado SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE Bui/ding Underdrains Because of the presence of a sl��allow water ►abie, �ikely a�ove the elevatians at which the lower I�vels of the principle buildings tivill be constructed, and because of the potenTial for saturation of the near-surface seils durFng anr�ual snovr- melt, the proposed buiidings shoutd be protect�c by underdrain systems �:�less other, permanent, de-watering systems such as weNs are instalied. The underdrain systems wilt be, in effect, permanent u�e-wa#ering systems. The underdrain systems should consis# of perforated PVC coilection p�pe at !east 6 inches in diameter, non-perforated PVC discharge pipe a# least 6 inches in diameter, free-draining gravel, and filter fabric. (Actual pipe sizing shauld be based on water volumes realized in deep project excavations during canstruction.) The free-draining gravel should contain less than 3 percent passing the No. 20Q Sieve and more than 50 percent retained on the No. 4 Sieve, and have a maximum particle size of 2 inches. Each collection pipe should be surrounded on the sides and top only with 6 or more inches of free-draining gravel. The gravei surrounding the collection pipe should be wrapped with filter #abric to reduce the migration of fines into the drain system. 'Clean out' access points should be provided at intervals alang the system to facilifate maintenance_ A ty�icai, cross-section detail an underdrain the described above is presented on �igure 13. The actual layout, outfets, etc., should be des6gned by .he Civil ��;g;neer. Each �uilding shouid have an exterior perimeter �n�er�rain. The bc�iidings also si�aulci have lateral underdrains spaced no more than 30 fee# apart beneath the buifding. The high point(s) for the pipe f(ow line{s) should be at least 12 inches below the bottoms of the floor siabs. The pipe for the interceptor drain system should be graded to drain effectively to one or more sumps from which water can be removed by pumping, or; in the case of small structures witFout below-grade levels, to autlet(s}for gravity d��charge. Along the below-grade bui(ding foundation waiis, the perimeter underdr�in gravel shou{d extend upward to within 12 i�ches of the backfill surface behind the walf or the wall should be backed with a layer of synthetic drainage medium, e.g., an appropriate MiraDrain�' product or equivalent. The gravef or drainage product backing the wal! should be in hydraulic connection with the wall heef drain. ff gravel is selected, it should be separated from the enclosing soils by a iayer of fifter fabric#o reduce the migration of J�b No.i7$-6(}03 GROUND Engineering Consultanis,lnc. ?age 23 �; � North Day Lot Vail,Colarado '` � � fines into the drainage system. �amp-proo#inc� shauld be applisd to the back (exterior) F side of foundafion�vafis. ' � For the larger buildings, vrhere high water volumes are antici�ated due to the extent of the bei�w-grade levels, va{umes for preliminar,r syst�m sizir�n may be based on the = s: estimated water tio�vs provided in the Excavation Consiaerations seciion of ihis report. The fina( sYS�em desiqn shoufd be based on the water voiumes realized durirq �roiect ; construction. The underdrain system pumps shouid �e redundant anci suppiied wi,h auxi{iary power systems ir case af power loss. The perimeter underdrain system shouid be tested by the Contractor after instailation z' and after placement and compactian of the overlying backfill to verify that the system �! fi functions properly. � Orainage Beiween Shored S/opes and Buildings A void will be crea#ed between the 6> shored excavation slopes and the building foundation walls. GROUNL7 recommends k that this narrow void between the shored cut slope and the foundation wall be backfilled � with a caarse, clean, open-graded granular material such as 2-inch crushed rock. This ; crushed rock fill should be in hydrau6c continuity with the perimeter ;;nderdrain system. � A layer of filter fabric should be pfaced over this material at the top to reduce �nfiltration � � � af�ines i�to it. z � � � � € * k � � e � S � � r t � e € � � i .IOb NO.�'H-OGOS GROUND Engineering Consultants,Inc. �age 2h �. � Y: � s � North Oay Lot � Vail,Colorado PROJECT EARTHWORK Because the siie F�as been gradeci previousiy, we antici�a#e c.uts and f:{Is cf limited nominal depth wili be required to construct the �auiiding pads and hardscape areas, etc. t3eeper excava#ians wili be neec3ed to insta�l ut�lities an� excavations at �east 30 feet ir, dep#h are planned to instal( the belotN-grade parking ieve3s for the facility on the eastern hatf of the site. Generai Cansiderations Site grading shouid be p{anned carefui�y to provide positive surface drainage away from the buildings, and a!1 pavements, utility alignments, and flatwork. Surtace diversion features should be provided around paved areas to prevent sutface runoff from flowing across the paved surfaces. Site grading should be perfarmed as early as possible in the construction sequsnce te allo�v settlemenf of fills and surcharged ground to be realized to the greatest extent prior to building canstruction. Prior to earthwork construction, existing structures, vegetation and other deleferiaus materials should 6e removed and disposed of off-site. Relic underground utilities should be abandoned in accordance with applicable regulations, removed as necessary, and capped at the margins of the property. Any topsoils ►�resent on fhe site should r►ot �e incarporated into ordinary fill5. Instead, topsoils shou{� be stockNiled dur�n� snitial g�adin� operations for place:�en± i:� areas to �e fandscaped ar for other approved uses. � Ffll Material Definitions Crushed Rock Fill Materials used as crushed rock fill should be free of deieterious materials and consist of 2-inch nominal, angular, open graded, crushed rock. Setect. Granular Fill Materials used as select, granuiar fifl shouid be free of deleterious materials and meet the criteria for CDO`T Class 1 Structure Backfill as tabu(ated below. � Job Nc.�8-6GG3 GFtOUND E�egineering Consullants,Inc. !'age 25 � � � North Day Lot Vaii,Colorado � CDOT CLASS 1 STRjJCTURE BACiCFlLL{703.0$) ; , . r---------------------------�---------------------------- '. € Sieve Size or Acceptable Range Parameter ' ------------------------------- --- : 2-inch 1L0°le pass;r.g : --------_.._._....--------._....-------�------ -------� : �vc.4 : 3�J°�f� 1G`J%Fsssir,g � -�-- No.50 � 10°,��to 60��ass�r.g No.2J0 5°,•n to 2d°r�passing Liq�id Limit <35 ' Plasticity Index < 6 � Common Fi11 refers to fiEl materials free of deleterious materia(s, and approved by the ` Geatechnical Enginesr, but not meeting the requrrements of select, granular fill, Grushed rock or similar, open-graded materials should not be used as common fill. ; S- Use of On-Site Materials as Fill Site soils, including both fill and native maierials, free of construcfion debris, organic debris and other deleterious materais are suitable> in �� _ general, for placement as compacted fill. Excavated materials will include boulders and coarse cobbles that likely wilf require additional processing to be included in project filis. Non-expansive rock fragments and fragments of inert consfruction debris larger than 6 � ;nches in maximunl d�mension wiH require speciai han�fing and/or placement to be ' inco�porated snto prcject fills. !n general, such materials should be olaced as deeply as � possibie in the propo�ed fills. !n no case should these fragments bs p(ace� �Nithin 2 feet � of finished grade. The Geatechnical Engineer should be consuited re�arding appropriate recommendat�or�s for usage of such materials on a case-by,case wasis when such materiafs have been identified during earthworks. Standard � recommendations that iikefy wiif be generally applicable can be found in Section 203 ofi � the COOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (2�05). k S Areas of previously placed fill soifs were encou�tered in the test hales and ofher fiils may be present across the site. These fi!I soils should be tested, and as necessary, < t: � excavated and rep{aced with praperly moisture -conditioned and campacted filE_ � � A significant proportion of coarse site soils when excavated likely can be crushed for aggregate for use on sit� to reduce the voiumes of imposted materials. Materials that ,' � ' likely can be generated include CDOT Class 1 Structur2 BackfilL CDOT Class 6 � Aggregate Base, drainage rock and/or pipe bedciing. � € � r � .f�b Nc.CE-6�C3 GROUNO Engineering Consultants,lnc_ Page 26 � i € � t € North Day Lot Vaii.Colo�aclo Jm�aorted FiH Materiais Ifi it is necessary to import materiai t� the site, ihe impo�ted soils shouid be granular and free of ciaystone, and organic or othe�v+se deleterious materials. Im�orted material should have less #han 40 percent passing the No. 20t} Sieve and shouid have a �lasficity i�dex o; less than 20. 7he criteria far materials ta be imported as select granuiar fill are given above. Sampies of represeniative mate;ials proposed for import should be tested for approvai prior to transoort to �he site. FiU Piatform Preparation Prior to fiiling, the top 8 to 12 inches of in-place materiais on which fili soils wili be pf2ced should be scarifed, moisture canditioned and proper�y compacted in accordance with the recommendations below to provide a uniform base for fill placement. {f surfaces to receive fill expose loase, wet, soft or otherwise delete�iaus material, additional materia{ should be excavated, or other measures taken, to establish a firm pEatform for filling. The surfaces to receive fill must be effectivefy stable prior to placement of fill. In project excavations, sioughing or removal of (arge clasts may result in local voids that require filling. In such cases; dental concrete or properly densi#ied crushed rock fill or granular fill, depending on location, should be used to restore lines and grades. Fill Placement Fiil materials st�ould be thoroughly mixe�' ta achieve a unifa;� moisture content; �laced in uni`orm l;fts not excesdinr S inches in loose t!-�ick!�zess, and propsrly campacted. Soils that classify as GP; GW: GM, GC, SP, SW, SM, or SG :n a�cordance with the USCS classificat�on system (granular materials; should be compacted #0 95 or more percent of the maximum dry density ai moisture contents within 2 percent af optimum moisture content as �etermined by ASTM G1557, the `modified Procior." Soils thai classify as ML, MH, CL ar CH should be campacted to 95 percent of the maximum density at moisture contents from 1 percent to 3 percent above the optimum moisture content as deterrnined by ASTM D698, the "standard Proctor.R Fill place�i directiv under a structure at anv depth shou(d be compacted to at least 95 �ercent �f the maximum drv densitv at moisture contents within 2 percent of the optimum based on ASTM D1557 if Qranular or to at least 100 Qercent of the maximum densitv at moisture contents from 1 percent to 3 percent above the optimum moisture content based on ASTM D698, if finer qrained. No fill materials should be placed, worked, rolied while they are frozen, thawing, or during poorlinclement weather conditions. Where soils supporting foundations or on .icb No.GS-600� GRdUND Engineenng ConsuiYants,tnc. Faye 27 _. North Day Lot Vail,Colorado i � z e which foundation�,vili be placed are exposed to freezing temperatures or repeate� freeze - thaw cycling during construction - commonly due to water panding in faundatian = excava#icns - bear6ng capacity typically is reduced anclor settlements increased due to � the Iess af density �n the su�poctir,g soiis. After ��rioc�s of #reezing candiiions, the Contractor should re-work areas affected by the formation of ice to re-establish ± F adequate bearing su�port. � Care should be taken with regard to achieving and maintaining proper moisture con#ents during placement and compaction. We anticipate tha; some on-site soils may exhibit F significant pumping, rutting, and deflection at moisture contents near optimum and r above. Some site materials classify as non-plastic to slightly plastic silty sands. In our i experience, achieving and maintaining compaction in such soils can be very difficult, € ; particuiar!y if water contents are not monitored closely. The Contractor should be prepared to handle soils of this type, including the use of chemical stabilization, if necessary. Compaction areas should be kept separate, and no lift should be covered by another until relative compaction and mois#ure content within the recommended ranges are obtaine�. � � � x To achieve ao�Guate c�mpaction near the outer faces of fiii slopes, it may be beneficial � � to over-b�il� ttie s�opes and trim them �ack. `r � Use of Squeegee Relatively uniformly graded fine gravel or coarse sand, i.e., � "squeegee," �r simi!ar materials commonly are �ropased for backfi(ling faundation k excavations, portions of utifity trenches and other areas where employing compaction equipment is difficult. In general, GROUND does not recommend this procedure for the } following reasons: t � Although commonly considered "self compacting,' uniformly grade� granular ; materials require densification after placement, typically by vibration. The equipment � � fo densify tnese materials is not avaiiabfe on many job-sites. Even when properly densifed, uriformly graded granular materiafs are perrrieable � ; and allow water to reach and coilect in the lower portions of the �xcavations , � s backfilled with those materiais. This leads to wetting af the underlying soiis and � � resultant potent;a) loss of bearing support as wei! as increased local heave or ; � settlemer�t. � � � � ' F' .1ob No.u8-6G03 GROUND Enginee�ing�onsultants,inc. Page 28 ` � � � � i: a r � c Morth Day Lot Vaif,Cotorada � GRflUNQ recommends that wherever possible, excavai:ons be bsckfiiled with appraved, on-site soils piaced as properly compacted fiil. YVhere this is nat feasi�te. use of"Controf{ed Low St.*ength Material" {C�S�41, i.e., a Iean, sand-cement slurry ("flowab�e fiii"}ar a similar material for backfi#ling shou{d be consicfered. Where `squeegee" or similar materials are propcsed far use by the Gontractor, the design team shauld be notified by mear,s of a Request far Information (RF1}, sa that the proposed use can be considered on a case-by-case basis. lri/here `squeegee" mee�s the �roject requirements for pipe �aedding material, however, it is acceptab!e far that use. Quality Assurance A Geotechnical Engineer shoutd be retained to observe praject excavations prior to placement af fill. The Geotechnicaf Engineer a!so should observe earthwork operations and test the soils. The Geotechnical Engineer should provide a written declaration stating that the project site, including the building pad area, was filled with acceptable materials and was placed in general accordance with the requirements outlined in this report or otherwise specified for the project. It shoutd be noted that in the later stages of projects such as construction of the proposed facility, mulfiple sub-contractors commonly are instalfing or adjustinglreplacing componen#s of �he project simul#ar�eousiy. 3hese can include utility iaterais, e3ectricai �oxES, sidevyaik access ramps, lighting fixtures and other components. !n ords� to facifitate proper ebservation and testirg of the assaciated earthworks, GROUNb reccrrtm�n�s that the Contractor verify t�-:at his sub-contractors mobilize �'r.e necessary equipment a�d personnel to moisture-condition and compact disturbed or excavated soiis effectively. The Contractor also should coardinate with his sub-contractors to ensure that these focal earthwork operations are abserved with sufficient frequency, and the soils tested, by the Geotechnical Engineer. Seftlements Settlements wilf occur in filled ground, typicatiy �n the order of 1 tt� 2 percent af the fili depth. For a 12-foot fill, this correspands to settlement on the order of 2 inehes, without imposition of foundation loads. ff fill placement is performed properiy and is tightly controlled, in GROUtvD's experience the majority of that settlement will take place during earthwork construction. The remaining potential set#lements likely will take several months or longer, to be realized. Cui and Filled Slopes Permanent site slopes supported by on-site soils up #0 5 feet in height may be constructed no steeper than 2Yz:1 (horizontai : verticaf7. Minor raveiing or Job�io.G'8-o�63 GROUND Engineereng Consuttants,Inc. Page ZS _ � North Day Lot ` Vait,Coivrado ; � � y � g surticiai sioughing shaufd be anticipated on slapes cut at this �ng(e unti! vegetation �s � weil re-es#ablished. Surface drainage shauid be designed to direct avater away from � � � slope faces. t � t �. � 2 e F [ e 3 � 0 € € � � i 't 2 � € � _ � i . �: a E s . }: t' i � € t :I # i d f � e [ t; I � P' � � �' .:cb:vo.�&-o0G3 GROI)ND Engineering Consuitar.ts,tnc. Page 30 � f � � � t North Day Lot Vaii,Colorado EXCAVAI`iON CONSiDERATiflNS Excava#ion Difficutty Test holes �or subsu:fiace exploratian :�ere advance� #a #hs depths indicated on the test hole logs by means of truck-mounfe�', fiight auger equiprnent. Drillir,g �Nas difficult and pen�trat�cn resistance values were high in the iower, denser al{uvium. Refusai tivas encountered commoniy (See the fest hoEe iogs.) and auger was broken repeatedly as the test holes �vere advar+ced in the IaYter materiais. !n the shalfower, less dense al{uvium we anticipate no unusuai excavation ctiffrcuities, in general, for the proposed cor,struction in these materials with conventional, heavy-duty excavating equipment in good working condition. However, these materials include caarse cobbles and boulders lacally. The Contractor should be prepared to excavate, handle and process these ma#erials, and/or export them from the site, as necessary. In the lower, denser alluvium, coarse cobbles and boulders appeared to comprise a higher percentage of the alluvium and aN the alluvial materials were rnore densely packed. Excavations into these soils may require very heavy or specialized equipmen#. Breaking equipment may be cost effective to faci(itate project excavations, particulariy in t�enches. The Contractor should anticipate increased wear an his equipment and higher �han typical maintena�►ce costs. Tt�e 5eophysical data obtained for this evafuation indicated P-�Nave veiocities greater ±han 9,OOa ft�'sec, interpreted to indicate very resisiant materials, as shallow as 35 feet bela�N existing grades. (See Appendix A.} Lacally, such corditions may be enccuntered � still more shallowfy. iJeiocities greater than about 3,5Q0 to 4,000 ft/sec appear to indicate tY►e lower, denser aiiuvial deposits as weil as stiii denser materiais below the ailuvium. Simiiar to the test hole data, the seismic data indicates that difficuft excavation condtions wilt be encounfered at relatively shallow depths in many areas. Groundwater Grcundwater was encountered commonly across the site at depths �elaw 20 feet. tt shoulcf be noted that the water ievels represented on that f�gure were based on data abtained during the early spring. Higher water isvels should be anticipated during seasons of higher rainfall or snow melt. The Contractor should anticipate encountering water near or above the approximate elevations depicfed on Figure 6 and be prepared to work in the presence of groundwater. (Shallow excavatians locally may expose wet soils or seepage. Where seepage or groundwater is encountered in shaflow project excavations, a Geotechnical Engineer sho�ld be retained � .r�b:�do.G8-6C:v3 GROUND Engi�eering Consultantis,Inc. Pa�e 3i � North Day Loi Vait,Coiorado � i to evaluate the condit�ons and provice aciditionai recommendations, as appropriate). The alluviai depcsits at the site were moderately to highly permeabie and relative �apid x � wa#er flows and high water volumes likely will be generated by excavations beiow the � loca!�vater tabie. � The d�-v,ratering system(s) should �e designed for the Contractor by a registereci � engineer. The risk of siope instability will be significant{y increased in areas of seepage � along the excavation slopes. Based on data obtained for this study, we estimate a �vater flux on the order of Q.00QS to 0.0025 gaUons per rrtinute (gpm) per exposed face square foot below the local water table. Setting de-watering well points sufficiently belaw the � bottom of a given excavation can significantly reduce the volume of water entering through the excavation floor. Larger excavations likely wiH require at least a limited F , number of interior well points, as well. � � Temporary S/opes and Shoring We recommend that temporary, un-shored � excavation slopes up to 20 feet in height be cut no steeper than 1'/z:1 (horizontal : 4 F ve�tical) in the coarse, granular shalfow alluvial soils and similar fiU soi(s in the absence " of seepage. We have assumed that excavations deeper than 20 feet, as well as some � s shallower ones w�li be shored, as discussed below, rather than shored. Signi€icar�t � sloughing on the slope faces should be anticipated at this angle due to the cohesionless � nature much of sands above the water table. Local conditions encounter�d �urir:g ` � � c�nstructio�, su�h as grourdv�ater seepage, Ccose sand, or seft, wret n�ateri�ls, will � require flatter s(opes. Stcckpiiing of materials should not be permitied closer to the tops ; f af temporary slopes than 5 feet or a distance equal to the depth af the excavat�on, which t ever is greater. ° �: t r Should site constraints prohibit the use of the recommended slope angles f�r slopes , k fhen temporary shoring should be used. Temporary shoring designed to allow the soils j to d�flect sufficiently t� utilize the f�ll active strength of the soils may be designed for � lateral earth pressures computed taking an angle of internal friction of 32 degrees, a � moist unit weight of 130 pcf and a cohesion of 0 to be characteristic af the site soils. � Lateraf earth pressure calculations for shoring design also should include surchar�e loads exerted by equipment, traffic, seepage forces; maieriaf stockpiles, etc. Actual � shoring system{s} should be designed for thQ Contractor by a registered engineer. � We understand tk�at the excavatians for the proposed below-grade parking levels will be � on the order of 25 to 30 feet in depth_ V`le anticipate thaf soil nail and "shotcrete" -type � i � t , � .iob No.CS-6003 GROUND Engineering Consultants,1nc. Page 32 x f € € North Day Lot Vail,Coloradn systems to provi�e temporary support for that excavation that wiii fargeiy preserve the . exposed saiEs in their native condition. Many excavations wil! be in cEose proximity to existing buildi�as, utility lines and oiher installat�ons. The Cantractor should take care during excavatiors not to compro�-ii�e the bearing or lateral support for ihe existing structures or other improve�en#s. Good surface drainage should be provided around temporary excavafion siapes tc� direct surface runoff away from the sfape faces. A properly designed drainage swale should be provided at the top of the excavations. In no case should water be aUowed to pand at the site. Sfopes shauld also be protected against erosion. Erosion along the slapes will result in sioughing and could lead to a slope faifure. Excavations in which personnel will be working must comply with all 05HA Standards and Regulations particuiariy CFR 29 Part 1926, OSHA Standards-Excavations, adopted March 5, 1990. Project excavations and shoring should be observe� regularly by the Geotechnical Engineer thraughout construction operations. The Contractor's "rasponsible person" should evaluate the soil exposed in the excavations as part of the Contractar's safety pr�cedures. GROUND has provided the information above solely as a service to Vail Resorts Development Company, and is not assuming responsibility for construction sits safety or the Cantractor's ¢ctivities. i I .:<-�b Na.�",8-&603 GROUND Engirseering Consuftants,Enc_ Pa,e 33 `s � € € NoRh day Lot ° VaiL Coiorado � s F U7iLIT`Y iNSTAL�ATfON � # E Pipe Support Th� bearing capacity of alignment soii� and bedrock appeared a�equate, � in gensral, tor support of the oroposed water I�ne. The pipe + wa#er are less dense than � the saits which tivill be dispiaced fer instai6afien. Therefere, GR�UND anticipates no j significant pipe settlerrienis in these mate�iais where properly bedded. { t Excavation bottoms may expose soft, loose or ofherwise ceCeterious materiais, inciuding r ; debris_ Firm materiais may be disturbed by the excavation process. All such �:rsuitable � materials shoufd be excavated and repiaced w+th properiy compacted fili. �reas allowed ` � to pond water will require excavation and reFlacement v�l;th property com�acted fill. The � Contractor shouid take particular care to ensure adequate support near pipe joints which ;; are 4ess tolerant of extensianal strains. Where thrust blocks are needed; they may be designed for an allowabie passive soil � pressure of 280 psf per foot of embedment may be used, to a maximum of 2,800 psf. Sliding friction at the bottom of thrust blocks may be taken as 0.35 times the ve�tical dead foad. � � f Pipe !r►stallatiorr Rec�mrrendat=ons regarding utility trench excavation are pr�vided in � the Excavation Considerations section af th'ss report. On-site sai{s excavated from � trersc�es are suitable, in generai, for iase as trench backfil{. BackfilE sci�s should be free y � of vegetation, debris, trash, claystone> and ather deleterious materiais. Cobbles and ` non-expansive rock fragments coarser than 4 inches in maximum dimension should not be incorporated into trench backfilfs. � r ' Pipe bedding materials, placement and compaction should meet the specifications of ; the pipe manufacturer and applicabte municipa! standards. Some excavated, on-site sand and gravel may be suitabl�, with processing, for use where refatively free-draining : ¢ bedding materials are called for. Materials proposed for use as pipe bedding shoufd be ; tested for suitability prior to use. Imported materials should be tested and approved by ' the Geotechnical Engineer prior to transport to the site. Bedding shoufd be brought up � uniformty on both sides of the pipe to reduce differer�tial loadings. 3 � Trench backfill materials above ihe pipe bedding zone should be cvnditioned to a � uniform moisture content, pfaced in uniform lifts not exceeding 8 inches in ioose f; ' %: 3 � 4 � �oh tv�.Cr�-fi�03 GROUND Engineering Consultants,t�c. ?age 34 �, e � i t � � North Day Lot Vait,Colorada ihicicness, and properly cotnpacted. r�ecommendations for fii� p�acement and compaction are presented in the Project Earthworks sectian of this re�ort. The Contractor should take adec�uate measures to achieve adeguate compactian 'sn the uti(iiy trench backfii�s, particutarly ir; the lo+��er ;�ortions �f the excavations. Some se#�lement of trench backfill materials snould be anficipated, even where materials are placed and compacted correct{y. The Contractor aiso shauld take particu3ar care to achieve and maintain adequate compactian af the backfili soils around manholes, vaive risers and other vertical pipeline eiements 1Nhere greater settlements commonly are observed. Use of '�controiled low strength materiai� (CLSM), i.e., a le�n, sand-cement sfurry, "flowable fil(," or similar material should be considered in lieu of compacted soil backfil! for areas with low tolerances for surface settlements. Placement of flowable fil( in the lower portions of the excavations and araund risers, etc., IikeMy wiii yield a superior backfil{, although at an increased cost. We assume that surface drainage wilf direct water away from trench alignments. Nevertheless, �son-woven filter fabric (e.g., Mirafi� 140N, or the equivalent} should be placed around the granular �edding materials to reduce migration of fines info the bedding tk�iat can result in severe, local sett{ements. 'dlfhere this pr�tection is not �rovid�d, settiemer,ts can develop as much as several montt�s �r years after constructien is campieted, even v�rhere backfill soils have be campacte� �r�perly. Develepment of site grading plans should cansitler the subsurface trans�er of water in u:ifity #renches and the pipe bedding. Sandy pipe bedding matErials can funct�on as efficient conduits for re-distribution of natura{ and applie� �,vaters in the si�bsur#ace. Cut- off walis in utility irenches or other water-stopping measures should be impiemented to reduce the rates and volumes of water transmitted along utility alignments and toward buildings, pavements and other structures where excessive wetting of the underlying soils will be damaging. lncorporation of water cut-offs and!Qr outlet mechanisms for saturated bedding materials inta development plans couid be beneficial to the praject. These measures also will reduce the risk of loss of fine-grained backfill soi{s into the bedding material with resulian#surface settlement. .;ab No_�JS-60�3 GROUND Engineering Consuitants,}nc. Page"s5 i ! � � North Day Lot Vait,Colorado E � � `, PA1iEN1ENT SECTIONS �: � A pavemen#sectior is a layered system desi�ned to dsfribute caneenirated traffic ioads � to the subgrad�. Performance of the cavement structure is directly reiated to the physicai prape�ties of the subgrade so�ls and tra€fic foadings. Pavemert sectians far the ; S proposed pubiic street (the South Frontage Road i U.S. High�vay 6) as well as the _ private parking areas and drivetivays were develope� in genera( accardance with the ' design guidelines and procedures of the American Association of State Highway and ; Transportatson Officials (AASHTO), ihe Coforado Qepa�tment of Transpor;ation, and ' local road construction practices. ; � Subgrade Materiais Based on the results of our field and laboratory studies, subgrade materiais in the proposed pavement areas consisted predominantly of clayey siity ` sands. These materiais were classified typicaily as A-1 and A-2-4 soils in accordance with the AASNTO classification system with a group index values of 0. ; Resilient f�ilodulus (M�j testing (AASHTO T-307) was performed on a representative composite sample of the subgrade materials encountered at the site. Typically, the R- S value, �.anconfined compressive strength, Califomia Bearing Ratio {CBR), or other index � ; properties of subgrade materials have been obtained and the resilienf modulus obtained ? onfy by coReiation. �iowever, due to the variabilify in ihe ccrrP{ations, subjectirg �' �Epresertative sampEes of the su�grade to the aciva! resilient mad�.;l1s testing is the most accurate ��vay io determine soil support characteristics for development of . ; pavement sections. • � � A dynamic load test, the resilient modulus measures the elastic rebound stiffness of r flexible pavement mater�als, base courses and subgrades un�Jer repeated loading. The � loading cycles were applied under various confining and deviatoric stresses as specified in AASTHO T-294. The material was compacted to 95 percent of maximum dry density g at optimum moisture confent, and at 2 percent and 4 percent above the optimurn, based � � on AraSHTO T-�9 (the `standard Proctor"} for cohesive saiis, or /�ASHTO T-1S0 (the � "modified Proctor")for granular soils. � _ E The resilient modulus at the optimum moisture content is typically used for fine grained ; soils. Therefore, for the granular subgrade rnaterials, a resifient modulus 8,552 psi {corresponding to a Hveem R-Value of approximately 37) obtained at optimum moisture � cantent was used tp develop the pavement sections. � 2 3 S � � � � B a J�C No.G8-6003 GROUND Engineering�onsuitants,Mc, PaCe"s� � i 4 . � � � North E?ay Lot Vait,Colorada ft is important to note that significant ciecreases in soil suppart as quantifieci by the resilient modulus have been observed as th� moisture content increases above the optimum. Therefore, pavements tha# are not praperly drain�d may experience a loss of the soil suppori and subsequ�nf reductian in pavement�ife. Anficipafed Tra�c A projected, average daify fraffic loading (AC7T) of 25,t�t10 veFsicies was devefoped by Kimiey-Horn and Associates, fnc., for the South Frontage Road 1 U.S. Highway 6 for the EverVail Devefopment to the west and wil! be used #or this design as no traffic data were availaCle on the CDOT �vebsite for this ssction of U.S. Highway 6. We understand that 2-lanes with acceleration and deceleratian lanes will be compieted. A 2-lane configurations using CDOT traffic weighting factors was used in this design. The ADT value was converted to 18-kip equivalent single-axle load {ESAL) vatues of 1,326,045 for flexible pavements and 1,716,413 for rigid {concrete) pavements for a 2- through-lane roadway. These loadings were used to develop the recommended pavement sections for the South Frontage Road. Specific traffic loadings for the private parking areas and driveways were no#available at the time of this report preparation. Therefore, an 18-kip equivalent dai(y load application {EDLA) vafue of 1d was assumed for general parkirg areas and project driveways. An EDLA af 5 4vas assumed for autamobile-only parking stalfs, The EDLA vatues of 5 and 10 were converted to 18-kip equiva;ent sirgle-axle faad tESAI) vsiues of 73,000 and 36,5CO3 res�ectively, for 20-year des'sgn li�Jps. An EULA o� �J, correspondin� t� a;�: ESAL value of 365,G00, was assumed for primary heavy vehicle routes incluciing • shipping and receiving routes, fire truck lanes, trash caltection areas, loading/unloading zan�s, and other areas subject to heavier traffic including large trucks. If desi5n ira�fic loadings for the private pavements differ significantly fram these assumed values, GROUND should be notified to re-evaluate the pavemen± recommendations below. Pavement Sections The soi! resi�ient modulus and the anticipa#ed ESA:. values wEre used to determine the required structural numbers for the project pavements. The required structurai number w+as then used to develop recommended paveme�t sections. Paveme�t sections wsre based on the DARWinT"' computer program that solves the 1993 AASNTO pavement design equation. Pavement section parameters and �alculations are summarized in Anpendix 8. A Refiabiiity Levet of 95 percent was utilized far development of the South Frontage Road / U.S. High4�ay 6 sections; 75 percent was used for the other pavement sections. Structural coefficients of 0.44 and 0.12 were used far hot bituminous asphalt and high guaiity aggregate base course, Jo5 No.u&6CG3 GRdUND Engineering Coresuttants,lnc. Page�7 € � ,c x North Day Lot Vail.Colorado ; { � � 5. � �espectively, for the highway. Structural coefficients of O.�it�and 0.12, respectiveiy, were used for the private pavements. The minimum pavement sections recommended by � GROUND are tabuiated beio�av. x � Recommended Minimum Pavement Sections --------�-------------�-------- -------��-----.---______..._------------�-- ,. ----------------- ; i Fui!Depth Asphelf ; Composite 5ection Rigid Section Locat/on f rinches Asphal[i (inches Asph.aif r inches (;nch.es oorlsnd e�ment Aggregate 8asej concrete) , ; , � : . : � :._..._.--__.._......_....----._......_..._.._...----_-.------_—.---.__._._._�_----------------------------------_.--_._...___._.._._.----._.__..._.._._---_...........___, South Frontage � { ; Road i US Hwy 6 � 5;�z i 11 8 � 8%1 ' 2-IANE � + . : . . ; , , , ; , , ; - — ---------�.__,�_��_. ----___ � �...�_�.._..,—._-----__----------� ---------= - - -- �; � i ; � Private � � " i Driveways and I 5 4 ; 6 6 � � : General Parking : ; ., : , , , , , � � ! : ' � ". --------------•------— ----------*--------- ' --------------�._.._.......i , i Private � ; Automobile-O�ly ; . 4";1 4 % 6 6 � Parking i � + �----------------._......_..----•-•-----.,�.._. . � i . , � � ' ; Private Routes'or Hea�ry Vehic►e Tra�c&High Tuming S�resses � 6 ; � 'a ' j � �:.i �"_'_'_-___.__....._._._...._...._....._.�._..�__.__.___.�___�.............._......�"_____�____.-.��___'__._�."_._, i_....._..._. ............._........,_..."....__.,..._...._"_ Y � We r�commend that primary ►.ruck routes 5er�in� the facility such as the shiNping ! � receiti�ing ;aute, material starag� and distribution arzas, and trash coilection zones, as � wel! as other paverrent areas subjected to high turning stresses or heavy truck t:aific be k � Nrovided uvith rigid pa��eme�ts consisting of 6 or more inches of portland cement � concrete. An equivalent flexible section would be 6 inches of fuil depth asphait, � although that section will not perfo�m as well as the concrete section. For superior � � `' performance, the concrete secti4ns should be underlain by 6 inches of properfy : i campacteC aggregate base. � � � Private concrete pavements shoufd contain saaved or formed joints. CDOT and varicus : � industry groups provide guidelines #or proper design and concrete construction and �' associated jointing. In areas of repeated turning stresses we recommend that the concrete pavement joints be fuily tied and do�veled. We suggest that civil design � � consider joint layout in accordance with CDOT's M standards, found at ihe CDOT website: http:ll�vww.dot,state.co.us/DesiqnSupport/. "' f � e e � � �` € � „oia�io.ii8-FAJ� GftOUNU Engineering Consultants,lnc. P�ge 38 � ; " � : 4 a � e; t NorEh Day Lot � Vait,Colorado i# a concrete pavement is sei�cted for the Soutn Frontage Road i U.S. Highv+iay 6, the pavement must be jainted in accordance with CDOT stardards. Also, the pavement ;oints must be fuAv tied and dowelled to �se the above-recommended concrete section. Standard pians for placement �f ties and dowe€s, �:�„ (CDOT M Star;�ards} for concrete pav�ments can be faun� at the a�ove CQOT�ve�site. Maferia/s Asphait pavement shouid consist af a bituminous pEart mix composed af a mixture of aggregate and bituminous material. As�haft snixturers) should meet the cequirements af a job-mix formula establi�hed �y e quali�ied engineer and, as applicable, those of CDOT. Concrete pavements should consist of a plant mix composed of a mixture of aggregate, Portland cement and appropriate admixtures meeting tF:e requirements of a job-mix formula established by a qualified engineer and, as applicable, those of CDOT. Concrete should have a minimum modulus of rupture of third point loading of 650 psi. Normally, concrete with a 28-day compressive strength of 4,Q00 psi should develop this modulus o# rupture value. The concrete shou(d be air-entrained with approximately 6 percent air and shouid have mir,imum cement content of 6 sacks per cubic yard. hlaximum allowable slump shoufd be 4 inches. These concrete mix �esign criteria should be coordinated w�th other p�oject requirements inc�uding the criteria for sulfate resistance. presenie� in ihe Waier-Soluble Sutfafes and Soil Corrosivity �ection of this repo:�. To reduce surf;cial scalin� feGuliiry fror� €r�ez�-t!�aw c;�c�ing, �ve suggesi that pavement concrete meet the requirements af CDOT Cfass P concrete. fn addit;on, the use of de-icing salts on concrete �avements during the firsE winter after construction will increase the iikelihood of the development of scaiing. Placement of flah�uork car►crete during cold weather so that it is exposed to freeze-thaw cycling before it is fully cured also increases its vuinerability to scaling. Concrete placing during cold weather canditions should be blanketed or tented to allow full curing. Dependina or the ��reather conditions, this may result in 3 to 4 weeks of curing, and possibiy more. If composite flexible sections are placed, the aggregate base material should meet the criteria of CDOT Class 6 aggregate base course. 8ase course should be piaced in uniform lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness and compacted to at least 96 percent af ths r;�aximum dry e(ensity a uniform moisture cor�tents within 3 percent of the optimum as determined by ASTM DZ 557/AASHTO T-9 80, the 3modified Proctor." Job No.0$-60G3 GR4l1ND�ngineering Coasulfants,lnc. Prge 39 � � � z z � North Day Lot ; Vaii,Colorado � f! Subgrade Preparation Due to the rela#iveiy high subgrade support that shouid be provided by the subgrade materials encauntered across the site, GR�UND daes not recommend that increasec� mitigative measures or subgrade stabiiizatifln be performed � an the subgrade materiais. Remediat Eartharorks Prior to proof-roiling, al4 pavement areas shouid be scarified i: andlor excavated ta a �epth of 8 to 12 inches, the material mois�ure-condit�oned and ; then re-compac#ed in accordance with the recommendations in the Project Earthworks ' � section ofi this reGcrt. Subgrade preparation should extend the fuH width of the � � pavement from back-of-curb to back-of-curb. As recommen�ed in the Exterior Flatwark sectien of this report, the subgrade for sidewalks and other project hardscaping aiso = should be prepared in the same manner. The Contractor should be prepared either to dry the subgrade materials or moisten them, as needed: prior to compaction_ Some site sails likely will "pump" or deflect during compaction if mcisture levels are not carefufly controlled. .. x Where adequate drainage cannot be achieved or maintained, a greater depth of � excavation and rep�acsment is recommended, in addition to the edge drains ; recommended belQw. � ; ; Proof Rollinq lr:�mediately prior to paving, the subgrade shauld be �rocf rolisd with a ` a _ he�vily loaded, pneumatic tired vehic;�;. Areas that sho�v excess�ve �eflection during proof ralling should be excavated and replaced and stabi!ized. Areas allowed to pon� . � prior to paving will r$quire significa�t re-working prior to proof-rol!in�. Passing ,�rcof- � t rolling is an additional requirement for pavement subgrade soiis; it may be possible for ' soils to be cornpacted within fhe fimits indicated in the Project Earthworks section of this � < report and fail proof rolling, particuiarly in the upper �ange of recommended moisture ; contents. � E � � Additional Observations The collectian and diversion of surface drainage away from ; � paved areas is extreme(y important to satisfactory performance of the pavement. Tne � subsurface and surface drainage systems should be carefuliy designed to ensure � removal of the water fram paved areas and subgrade soils. Where topography, site r constraints or ather factors fimit or preclude adequate surface drainage, pavements � should be provsded with edge drains to reduce loss of subgrade support. 7he long-term ? perfarmance of the pavement also can be improved greatly by proper backfilling and � compaction behind curb, gutter; and sidewalk. Unless the inferceptor drain and edge € # � ; � .:cb No.G8•o�J�3 Gi20UND Engineering ConsulW�ts,lnc. Pa�e 40 � f x i 4 � North Day Lot Vait,Colorado drains (where includeC) are instaiied properfy and maintained, and site �rainaga ir� generai is weii maintained, there is an increased risk of poor pavem�nt perfarmance at this site due to the expansive subgrade materiais and the iocal intreduction of off-site irrigation water. Landscape irrigation in pianters adjac�nt to pavements and in '�isiand" pl3nters within paved areas should be carefully contralied or differential heave �ndl�r �utting flf tt;e nearby pavements wili resuli. Drip irrigation systems are recommer�ded �or such pianters to reduce over-spray and water infiitra±ion beyond the planters. Enclosing the soil in the planters with plastic liners and pr�viding them with positive drainage also will reduce differential moisture increases in the surrounding subgrade soi{s. In our experience, infiltration from planters adjacent to pavements is a principal source of mois2ure increase beneath those pavements. This wetting of the subgrade soils #rom infi{trating irrigation commonly leads to loss of subgrade suppart #or the pavemen# with resultant accelerating distress, loss of pavemenf fife and increased maintenance costs. This is particufarly the case in the later stages of project construction after landscaping has been emp{aced but heavy construction traffic has not ended. Heavy vehicle traffic over wetted subgrade commonly resuits in rutting and pushing of flexible pavements, and c�acking of rigid pavements. Where the subgrade soils are expansive, wetting also typicaify resu�ts in incrEased pavement heav�. En relativeiy fla# a�eas where design drainage graclients necessari(y are smatl, subgrade settiement or hteave can obstruct proper dr�inage and yield increasetf infiitrafion, exaggerated distres5, etc. Also, GROUND's experience indicates Ehat longitudirial cracking is common in asphait- pavemznts ganerally paralfel to the interface between the asphalt and cancrete structures such as curbs, gutters or drain pans. This of this type is likely to occur even �vhere the subgrade has been prepared properly and the asphalt has been compacted properly. The anticipated tra�c ioading does not inciucie excess loading conditions imposed by heavy construction vehicles. Consequently, heavify loaded concrete, lumber, and bui{ding materia{ trucks can have a detrirrental sffect o� the pavement. GROUND recommends that an effectivs program of regular maintenance �e developed and implemented to seai cracks, repair distressed areas, and perfarm thin overlays throughout the life of the pavement. In areas where Ehe maintenance traffic is turning, concrete pavement is recommended. Job�fo.v8-o"�43 GROUNO Engineering Consutfants,Inc. Page d? §: 1. � North Day Lot t Vail.Colorado � � EXTERIOR FLA'1'WORK � � � Proper ciesign, drainage, constru�tion and maintenance of the areas �etwee� individuai ! buiidings and hardscape areas are critica! to the satisfactory performance of the projecf. � Sidewaiks, entrance�vay sla�as ar.d raofs, fcuntains, raised �larters and athar highly � visib{e improvements cammaniy are installed within these zones, and aistress in or near these improvements is common_ Commonly, pfoper soil preparation in these areas � receives little attention during overiot corstruction because they fali between fhe building and pavement areas, which typically are �uitt with heavy equipment. Mult�ple sub- cantrac#ors, with light or hand equipment, often perform subsequent iandscaping and k � hardscape installation. This results in necessary over-excavation and soil processing � and compaction not being �erformed. Consequently, subgrade soil conditions � � commonly deviate significantly from recommended ranges. Therefore, GROUND � recommends that the Contractor take particular care with regard to proper subgrade � ( �reparation in "the immediate building exteriors. � � Positive surface drainage away from all pavements and flatwork should be included in � ; � project design. This is extremely important for satisfactory performance of project � S hardseaping. Proper drainage aiso should be maintained after completion of the � � _ �roject, and re-established �s necessary. � _ � Exterior f�atwork and other hardsca�sng placed on tt�e soils encountered or-site !ikefy �' � . wi!! experience pcst-construc.ian m�vemerts fr�m consolidatian of unaerlying cr $ adjacent sa;ls. Both vErtical and fateral soil movements can be an;icipateu and disfress � � � to rigid hardscaping likely will resu{t. � 3 { The foflowing measures will help to reduce damages to these improvements. � � � 1) Shartly before instaNation, the subgrac�e soils beneath project sidev�aEks, paved � � entry4vays and patios, masonry planters and short, decorative walls; and other e flatwork should be ex.cavated and/or scarified to a depth of 8 to 12 inches. The � excavated soil shoufd be replaced as properly moisture-conditivnpd and � compacted fill as outlined in the Project Earthworks section of this report, in ; order to reduce the magnitu�e of potentia{ movements. _ � � 4 2) Prior to placement of flatwork, a proof roll shauld be performed ta i�entif}r areas ' €. that exhibit instability and defiection. The deleterious soils in these areas shouid i � be remcved and replaced with properly compacted fill. The C�ntractor shoufd ; � � � � � ,:ob l�10.G&�J03 Gi2QUF16 E:►gineering Consuitants,tnc. ?age 42 � � Z � � f i � North Day Lot Vail,Colorado take care to achieve and rriaintain compactian behind curbs to reduce differentiai sidewalk set#lements. As in the case of pavements, passing a proof roll is an ad�iti�nal requirement to placing and compacting the subg;ade fill s�i{s within the recommended ranges of moisture conter,t and re4ative compactian �resented in the Project Earthworks section of tFis report. 3j Ffah,�+ork should be psovided with control joints extending to an eifective depth and spaced na more than 10 feet apart, both ways. Narrow fiatwork, such as sidcWc�I�{5, IiI{@Iy N11I� f�C{Uil'G t1lQC2 CIOSBIy Sp8G8C�JOIiItS. 4) !n no case should exterior flafwork extend to under any portion of the building where there is less than 2 inches of clearance between the flatworlc and any element of the buildir�g. Exte�ior flatwark i� contact with brick, rock facades, or any other element of the building can cause damage to the structure if the flatwork experiences movements. Frost and Ice Considerations Nearly aU soils other than relatively coarse, clean, granular materials are susceptible ta�loss of density if aliawed to become saturated and exposed to freezing temperatures and repeated freeze —thaw cycling. The formation of ice in the underlying soils can result in heaving af pavements, flatwark and other hardscaping ("frost heave") in sustained cold weather �.�p to 2 inches or more. This heaving can develop relativefy rapi�ly. Much af this movement typ+cally is reco�ered when tt�e soils thaw, bui due to loss of soil density, s�me degree af displacsment commonly will rEmain. This can result even where the subgrade s�ils +n�ere pr��are� properiy. Where hardscape movements are a design concern, e.g., at doorways, replacement of the subgrede soils with 3 or more feet of clean, coarse sand or grave! should be considered or supporting the element on faundations similar to the bui(ding and spanning over a void. Detailed �ecommendations in this regard can be provided upan request. it shou(d be noted that where such open graded granular soils are placed, water can infiltrate and accumulate in the subsurface relatively easify, which can lead to increased settlement or heave from factars unrelated to ice formation. The relative risks f;am these soil conditions should be taken into consider�tion where frost heave is a concern. GRQUND wiil be available to discuss these concerns upon request. Where soi{s supporting foundations or on which foundation wiCl be placed are exposed to these conditions during construction — c�ommonly due to water ponding in faundation Jvb ivo.C,&8003 GROUND Engineering Consuitants,Inc. r�age 43 � � � F _ � North Day Lot � VaiL Colorado � � � � E �: ; exeavations - bearing capacity typicaliy is reduced andtor settiements increased due to $ the loss of density in the supporting soiis. After periods of freezing conditions, the �: � Cantrac#or shouid re-work areas affectPd by the formation of ice to re-establish s , adequate bearing suppor�. Concrete Scaling Surface scaling of sidewaiks and other exterior cancrete can resuit f � from poor workmar.ship during construction, such as `�ver-finishing' the surface. !t a{so � � can result from exposure to relatively severe weather conditions with repeated freeze- � �. thaw cycfes. In GROUND's experience, it re�ucing the potential for fresze-thaw scaling - � is a design consideration, the following measures are beneficial: a) maintaining a t maxirnum water/cement ratio of 0.45 by weight for exterior concrete, b) including Type F � fly ash in the mix for exterior concrete as 20 percent of the cementitious material, and c) � s � use of exterior concrete that exhibits a minimum compressive strength of 4,500 psi. � ; fnclusion of`fibermesh' in the concrete mix also may be beneficiat for reducing surficiai � � t scaling. (These concrete mix design criteria should be coordinated with other project � � requirements including the criteria for sulfate resistance presented in the Water-So/uble � � ' Sulfates section of this report.) In addition the use of de-icinq salts on exterior co�crete ; flatwark durinq the first winter after construction will increase the �ikelihood of the � � development of scalinq. � � � � � � � . £ e. � i i �' t � � E � € �; � i; � � s � t , � t � � , � � � i �' < � � � J�b No.C8-o0C3 GROUND Engineering Consuttants,lnc. °�ge 44 � � � `e, � . � No�th Day Lot Vaii,Colorado CLOSURE Geotechnicat Review TY�e poar performance of many pavements, i�undaTians and subsurface structures has been directly attributed to inadequate geotechnical review and earthwork quality�antrol. Therefare, a Geoie�hnical Engineer shou�� be retained to review project plans and specif;cations to evalua:e tivhether they compiy with the intent of the recommendations in this report. The authar of this repart andr'or the reviewing engineer should be contacted directiy to provide this review. This review should be reported in writing. Project earthwork construction operations should be obsenred by the Geotechnicai Engineer. Ail excavations shouid be observed by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to piacement of fil{ or backfill soils, �nstallation of shoring, or foundation c�nstruction. Placement of fill/backfill soils should be obsenred by the Geotechnical Engineer, and the soils tested. The geotechnical recommendations presented in this report are highfy contingent upon observation and testing of project earthworks by representatives of GROUND. 1f another geotechnical consultant is selected to provide canstruc#ion observation and quality control, then that consultant must assume al! respansibility for the geotechnical aspects of the project by corcurring in writing with the recommendations in this report; or by provic�ing afternative recammendations. timitafions Thi� report has been prepared Vail Resorts Developmen# Company, as it �ertains to design of ihe subject residentiai ccmpiex as described herein. �t may n�t contain sufficient information for other parties or other purposes. ln addition, GR{3UND has assumed that project construction will commence by Spring, 2009. Changes in project plans or schedule should be brought to the attention of the Geotechnical Engineer, in order that the geokechnical recommendations may be re-evaluated and, as necessary, modified. The geotechnical conclusions and recommendations in this report ��lied upon subsurface expioration at a lim�tec! number of exploration points, as shown on Figure 1. Subsurface conditions were interpolated between and extrapolated beyond these locaiions. Findings were dependent on the limited amount of direct evidence obtained at the time of this geotechnical evaluation. Our recommendations were developed for site conditions as described above. Actual conditians exposed during construction may be anticipated to differ, somewhat, from those encountered during site expforation. If Job No.�3-&003 GRpUND Engineerirtg Consultants,Inc. ?age 45 � � � North Day Lot VaiL Colorado � � 4 i during construction, sur#ace, soil, bedrock, or groundwater conditions appear to be at ` variance with thase described herein, the Geotechnicai Engineer shaukd be advised at � once, so that �e-evaivatien cf the recommendations may be made sn a timely manner. ; This re�ort was prepared in accordance with generaily accepted soif an� €tiundation � � enCineering practice in the Eag{e Couniy, Colorado, area, at the date of preparation. �: ' GROUND makes no other v��arranties, e6ther express or impfied; as to the professiona! � data, opinions or recommendations containeu herein. �' � ; � Sincerely, ` f GR4UND Engineering Consultants, Inc. ` a � � f` �-�1 �%� x , � �:izacnary st '{� � � � �� •F � f � �oti,�,.....;,Gif� �� . ,�,5 B'K�� - %' ?, � � � � i � � . `�: � . . ,��.'• � % tk�n'e `� fr , �` l�'�YA E ` ; •�,. - � R2��ewed �y James 9. K�v�rafsky, P.E. � . f . � � F € i 3 � k $: � � � € � � � � r � s [ x � € � � � Y .i�b yc.:;8-o0C3 GROUND Engineering Consultanls,Inc. Pere 46 � s t � �' , t � t �{y` ..._ �, �� F ' _�-.._ 1. 1 • � .' � t. ,. _ . } : '`i V t}� � �_........._., � � ��-�t�� ' j' i � � � � � � r' € 4 i �.l� . . � � i (I3 I� I � ,� , �`,_ - '� i i = , : a �c u, 'z � �� t� � �-- - �-._ ` , . : , . _ .�,.��,�� , , � �. � . � �. ..... ,..aia.?ec'a.�m��+.!�°`�'y..r:_'_� %:/ , u " � ! ��,�, 3 . ` �",•.�_„_, � • ' ��Y____'"_'__� ""�r--1r�A"'� �•`,�_ —i� `. .., -/ .'^'3"'_' � .L '� k> � � -}� � i i �^ ' J•' f i 4 � .......1 t �;� �. � -�- �.'�`' r� d.. y � 'z �� i `_ ;f l . � �.++��—� _`�a�� ._... _... ;� , `'...� : �;\ O W �� Q � � � � ` �� s"i. u � ' t, g 1 �--.�IC.-�---; .__ _. _ _ � °" _ � O I 's F- ! ' � u} � �� } 1`}t �� `� �` ��` g Z ? r�,� !i . - � ij,t` � � ` , '�` t,o f �� '_ �� O ! i � � t� ��; � � {t f , {-. 'i ¢ ��3� �"j Q' i� �i � G+ �, i Y � j, �, � = ��: � U 1m i� �( a '; `+ � � � � ;� i W � f° � t Z � � : S. t � ti F�E 9' L� �l i s�� i,4� -��i -. �� . �Z x !} � Y � F 3 , 'l � � � '�f4 i '.1 '-� � � j , '� t y.�� O V Q ! ; N ,� �� ,1, t ; .; � � k � ! � .. � �i t �� -� � �� ! • � � �. d ;� i i � � 'st, �`�i — t i � � , � ',1�� 't � S tl i O 1 . � i �t .4 � ! � `FS , � � � i. , __ �i ` � i � ., �� `� ._ ..__. � Z l `} i''� � ,� ; ; ;� . ,a 1 O ` ' �\ p �.;i `t �S:3 c i`t ! � t ' 1 ; � �; : :� . _.__._ o ;..� c � ii- , � . �: CO �` + '� ` ''�� ,� �£' � .JR Q . a 1�� 1" �: i � ;5 4� �. \., �� ,,S:..j � ;. �, . ,, ';�. t -. NF @ �.. � , 2 �ti t '� X 11 4 1-. .l ...,,� � O z.._�._ ;} O ,4'� � �� t fi `G�. s� � � � , x i � � a ,t i F t ,��j o m . s. s; t • � �\'_' I y � ��y 1 f. � 'f � � •, io ca 1� � ! �" � `�' E �:�i � , �� 'x a� t i,Z \ 1 , . �a i ' O D . �i'..� ; 1 l `'. - ;�`..... �-.�' ��'' `..I� �! Qa, � 0 {, ,""3`��.__. � � : N C U , � � i }E' ,,� �� i , �p G7 '� � �i � � p O t��l , ` � �,�t¢ �At -� �p L CT �.t ! 1�, , '� ..,�� - JR �� ,_ � a � � O �p ° ' l� ; �1 ` i N ; ��u�: � ' •X 1 ` t, �� t�� !�. } ', �, �� 4 p c c��i °a ' v a ,`�` � � 1�,::� 1 �a — �__ � L �' m �; � � ' 1 �� ~��, � `� � �4 ; y}�'. � 1w.r* t �a .¢ �� 0 d C L ;t i t �. � Q ` � N 1 �� '� I fl. a� N � 1 i 1 €., ._�.�_� �" ! � m v � ' �� i �,. °ti � � •' E E � v �t � � ' ` � � "• � t � o o � �� . � _� �y `.. ' , _ r � N m L i�� t '��' t iti' � � �Q, �p. l 4�4 \ ' �` '� '---------- � u� 's� : si;� } c 3 3 � `=i� ,� � � �------- ` � � � m � _ '�: � t� ��.., �� ;��--- :�.--. . o 0 0 � �� , � ,� � .c z r m s,it�. � i ' ��_..- r', _ °`�„ m a��i m Q � �`�. s M- .j�� '�p � ��- � - _.: � m Y m �., H _ � ` � j � - �..��.... ..��... .:.. t % ' �� 'R' ,#1 F .a :' . '� v:-.�_� �.�'_ �E � ' . � l3 CO tC lU t s t `• 1 U V U C; t i.� � � i • j �-�. \`' t _ G C C C `�� ~ , �� `t - '� '' '' �\; �(, ` _ � �- • �X X '' a� t�t` �, ,,----t��"T i �-- �J -- �' � � � `s � Test Wofe Test Hole Test Hole Test Hoie Test Hole �: 1 2 3 4 5 � Elev.8i65' EIsv.816T Elev.81ST Elev.8Zfi6' ESev.8i66' `� � 8170 � � � 4.Q'HBAP 4A"NBAP � 4.0 N9AP 4.Q"NBAP 4A"ffBAP � d 38112 5Cb'0 � 13,�i? i6112 ��Q � .. .. _ x z � 3?J12 � 56lS 1 1yZ2 : � _ � 39/11 � s�5a ��2 ; � . . .. . . -- 4 s .. .. .. . � � �� '? �� ' "' '. .. ' :.� -: . ... � t ' 3d/12 - .. . . .. . : 50/3 — ` � ,,, 8140 ? � � �: a� — � � � ,: �" � � �... ! � n 50110 — � � �I U k � G^M F i � ' :. :• '• :. W/V .. . .. . 4 � . 8130 �� ff i /�IG E JVlU � , p � J �' 8'!20 � � � I � K � :4 � L.� � 8110 �.. �� :r � ; � � � � � 81�le� �- �� ; r �� ENSlNEERINB CON�ULTANTS � ; � LOGS OF TEST HOLES g > .�e r�o. oa-scos aw►wr�sr: ►is � � ' FIGURE: 2 APPROVED BY: JK � s ; CADFILE NAME: BOD3LOGOI.DWG � i ` � � � � Tsst Hole TesE Ho►e Test Hate Test Hoie 6 7 8 P1 Etev.8168' Ekev.S'!89' Eiev.8168' Elev.8165 B17fl� 4.D"HBAP d.0"FtBAP 4_t3'HSAP 4.0"'riBAF 201t 2 9t12 • ;.f _ 19f12 8160 � 49112 � 3?r50 38/12 8150 - 36112 SCU10 50/11 814�J - p •:: m so�s ,?? ' San , - c 0 m �� i 50/3 > ... .. ... .. .. � UJ 813Q� � 50i3 - 50/8 8120 81f0 8i00 � �ROUI�D gNBrINEEl�11N13 CONSL�.TRNTS' L�GS OF TEST HE}LES Jd8 NO. 0&8003 dRAWN BY: HS FiGURE: 3 APPROVED HY: JK CADFtLE NAME: 6003tOG02.DWG � � ; w ��E�li7: � Hot Bi#uminous Asphalt Pavement(HBAP) � { � ; � Fill:Ranged#rom cfayey siRty sarxis with gravel to silty claye with sand;moist to very mast,lrnar to ( moderatety plastic, ioase ta dense,ar►ti�rawn t�pale gray in calor.although not identified in the test holes, i based on passed expe��ence in the adjacent areas;conshvction debris likely is present in the fiii soi#s �:` � E�ally. ` � Sand and Gravel: Generaly silty to dayey sands with gravel,cobbles and bouiders were comrnon ; thraughout the a!}wiai section,buk parkicutarly in the Iower materials;fine to caarse grained,dry to moist, # ; low ta moderately plastic,moderately dense to very dense,and pa�s gray to borwn-gray in oolor. x � � t �77 Drive s�mple, 2-in�h l.D.Celifomia linsr sample ; � 23l12 Drive sampie blow count, indicates 23 blows of a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches were � required to drive the sampler 12 inches. ; + � pepth to water Ievel and number of days after drii{ing that measurement was taken. � _ ; ' £ Rig Refusai � ; � 4 i „ � � t � + NOT�S: F 1} �`est holss wers c3riEl�on 03/10108 w��4ir�.h diameter oontinuous fl��ht pawer augers. � � s ; 2} Locatians oi the tesi iwles were measured approximatety by pacing from features shown on ' ths site plan pro�rided, � 3) Elevatians af the test holes were not measured and tlie bgs of the test holas are drawn to � < depth. �: ` 4) The test hole loc�ations and elevations should be considered accurate oniy to the degree � Implied by the methad used. �: 3 5} 7he lines beiween materials shcswn on the test hole logs represent the approximate ¢' boundaries between materiai iypes and�e transitions may be gradual. 6} Groundwater levef readings shown on the logs were made at tt�time and unde�the conditions � indicated. Fiuctuations in the waa�er levei may occur wiih time. ; E � $ � €. �R�tJI'H� � �NSfN�Ew�N� cor��u.n,�rs � � The materia!descriptians on this legend are for generai LEGEND AND NOTES � � classification purposes only. See the fult te�of this repat for �� descriptions of the site materials and related � r .toe nro. ae-sctas ow4wwr�av: Hs �' recommenaatians. �rG�e: a r�ROVEO sr: .nc ' � > ' CADFILE NNdE: 8003LEG.0ING � ; « ,� € � � . t ��w . �Y�� r�. -•,�p.-.�.. �,_,�_�.._,.w �,,,Y,,,,.:,:.� .,,,_. _.w..-x.--� �,,.,_... ,w�-;.,._� ,,,.�_.�_ _ �.--_... . �_......_ _ '`/�'».�+.,w...... �J . .. \ �M e .�-_..� _,.--- A� 6� �'-,.._� ..---� t-11GH`r'! N,.. .�--__ �u.s- .�,� - _�-- Pp ... �..__ �r• .,.�-� E RO �_.....---- ":� �..,,, ...-� yr.M".� pNS PG _.__° �.� � f �..� M - �" ..---�="...---�'" - Sp`1�H FR _^,__,....,...--~ .__-� .- ;..� ....� M � .. • ..�.... ��. .........^.J- ..- ...- � ... ..+ :* �J ,,..� .� ,... .. �,^,. .. �. � ::. .. .�� .,,,,,,.w- �: .... . � R� � �.••-. -. ..�.--..._ !�.-.�^' . p1 _. ". .. �i. Y .." r J v .,.-h�� .�+�". �� .� y.J r`y,,..-' ' .. .. _... . , °"" .......,+ .. . �. ......,,,., .. �+. 'T n�'^�' . .nr "� .." i�•'^•�r�^•� � ��_�.. .'�./^ ........ �R,�..'u+..� I Jyysy ��.�`� �`. -,��"��,..n,,,.,-r,. ,,,..-''' � "" � :- „" � �p�.,� Y 1� -"".�'w " �"' �^I .,I'" / . �' l° 3x;"�e e '....--' —.. '-..'.� ,,,f•;.w^"" ..��,F �: - ;{ {'I M � . � .+ " � .. . . . �.," y /".�. ,s �,, �r��^.+ �.. r nr,r+M+'_. �! f...r *� /. M �'i�,^� w+ :,. ' . . 'A... ... _�+"'�� „�.* . . ' �,...r' .•r/� „ ,�:✓ Jr" f ! r �.M r,,,.. l_,� , . .. ,��.yii�_. , .. ..:: �- ,.T- �' � .. , i�"''' i �r�� ; y ,, �,,.�.- �.� ��1 4� ., � . . , � �� _ ,�� _ - • � .. ,,,,,,.:.:�-�".. ,�' 1 _ . , !�' ,,,,,.;r `"�w ..... - ;�'"� ��- . - �.:�;,~ � .. - - �..� y'' - - �.�.. �� .�. _..--:-- , . �.. :�.w .�.�� .:^'- . � .'.. .,�F?,'� g� � t � , ...,.....«. FP ...�. �.. �� " ,�� y�/,{ , "'� ..%'^""r ..,. .: y y. � '�� .�;.,�.•.�" / - . . �...^'� . : Y� . �-!� �?;�`.��Srvt ° t� 'A- �� tl� . .. ......... . .... . . ,M/y _ ..... . �"� �'��i�f�� ,�`' _...;- fi••-� �''s a� ... . _._....... ,'� ... �� i 1 �, ,.y� � , i F � �,,,,I,��s �,, f �..�'a'. !� l .SLUG� �,r� �"�`� .; . �xr ,�'�x. �s '` � '�Y.,,..u+� y^ � TES?` .,13F �: f � I `�'.sw'""„" .;�"i�'��'�.�.�'�l-j» ... ,.r.r''�. t � . . i ` '� r ; � �,,..�� ?^�""- �,�:�� , �� ; � e�� , ` i � A �,,,,"�°� ,.',,... , , � , . �5{ �' . �?,..• . � .,aw �� . w....�.---�� ......_._. .. .._._.., r . . , ! wR��{r��' �� . �;� ;! �_.. . ` �"'',� r ,.. , ��: � �' �� 1 . �` / �y/ � i.� �� - �„a.y�d,1J3�'il�' 6ifilwC 14`� . �/ �� . rk� �K: �� 1� . ,�r ` �.a.+. �� { (.r � 1 ,� �� . � . __ ;� _,. _ ..: � ' � ,�,. -�'"f 1 .. ._ � , � ......�,. �...�-..,�r�� :�� `P 3�S � _. _.... , „ � ; . , r �,rl; 2� .P r '. � ; � � , . � ; , ' s . .. .... ,.:rr� ... d . .......,...,,�.w,rnm�...-,�'""""'"`"""� �"`". 4 >r} �1 �145••-:• _ . 8150 8t&0 } "�� y�.� � � � . � ��{U� . � nt _........-.� ..,.�.;.�.-..-�^^"'^"" ^ �. ��`.� .� ._..... . � � �'' � � k� ` . ...... _ ... .. ... �� _ .........� I , . ... .. ._.._... t .' ^l � .,.... i ..r.r.n-�+^�a' . i � �. �,-,J,,,,..-._..:--•.—_".'._.-..� '. •r -- ` yt �� .. � . , �, , , 1� � .... ,..........� �:.._.... .J � i ' ', �, ��, 8t40' �.-'ltndicates elevation of top of very dense cohbles,gravets, and boufders. 1 ,� tndicates test hoie number and appraximate location. 1 �Indieates test hole with piezometer, test hole number,and approximate location. 1 TEST X �ndicates test hole wiih piezometer and slug test,test ho�e number, and approximate location. P1 ,�tndlcates pavement test hote number and approximate locatiort, 4�` �`'''�.:._� `'' r f� x � �y � '.� �,h�.,�""° 8160' 8155�_. _ a960'�{ . ;.'1 ,�:,.,,�"^y�C"" ayrr �rr, I � F'�:,�' \ . :`.p .-....� � ..... : �. �,��'t . .��. .....,.... ��\1 M�L O�M[V.'iRM � %]P V�WWK i r.�..�.x.�.t.,k .1R .�.} I,M+ � e�a�� 45' � l i� �: � ti155 ; i lr+d rAV°R. 1� i �; � i� ,, 1� t?160? � �� , / � \��: 1 �� 1 i , � � ,1 � ��aur�� I�PtliiNE�liiN6 COFt�U1LTI�iNTS �..�._.. .,_ INTERPRETEp EI�FVA�lC1N OF DENSEF�ALLIlVIUM ___.._.—._._�...__.___.._.......__._,.. _. JOB NO. 0&&003 URAWM1I HY: �,{S __. f=1GURE^W5�� M APPROVED�BY: JK (NOtto ,a�a) CA��FII.ENAME: 6403SI��E:.t�WG �. _ Y..�,._._.� �_�,.___-- �.....-.,.,--�=-.. --�..._..�._..w ., �,,.a-_ 8145' _...-- _ .' ; ^.:- ..._.._"- � �, _..�-- i � _..,,•-+"""°...� �w- - � � ,�,;_�,_.� �._ j � ��i4Q� ..;-�` .�- ,f ....-- . � AY \ I i ..��'"_�-, w^" � ,r � � ��,...�M....M �^��IY.+ M"'� +.. C .i „�.r.� 4: y.--_` ( � .-, .• . H1�NW » �. �y.-• r � �b� � w.-- a `�.��' �� ...± ....�� -' .p �-...-^"' ,:. f�,�»-�-.. �.,,.�.-. � FtipAD _---._.. �� __ t �_...%_.-• �-° •�. �,-,� RpN-�AG � �_,_.�..... _. �, - ,� �`� � N �, ,�,..--:. ,�....w- .� � , �„_,.�- �.- � � -�,,". S��y �s-"'" .-- � ' �`�. A.._----- � �f",--�.- �,,``«� . �.�-� ,.,.-"'. ---- .. ,�... t �.r, �,,,- _ ��" l t �,� �,,; _ �... "�� . .. "- ... � �.,,,.,� r� �„' . ` ' ' ....�•»..--"' ..'.'.' R} _.� . ,,,...�„''�,.w•�" �.,,.r. « ..... .__. .,...-•,.""°, 1�,.._ _. � . Y�_�. �� ._�- � g� �,-� �. ..� , � � ,,,.,. .� ,,.,,;w . . +„_1..� , "`r..-- . : � ..--!rw� ...�. , ,,....,.... . ..�...� ... �..." . �,.....�' � . .�'` .....-^"� , Y{.. !' ....�. ��„!�-.• � Aa" �x,✓'^"� ..��,,,�•� '_. je.�:hS. �-.�.jf ..,�•.,_. _ „�_.... r,.,� . MR�' — _�+'��f . . .. � a. �^' ^ . .r•� i"..-.n' .r� qd �;.+."'/�� .. ,�,. .. �.f iY'Y �S.r✓'.�.,,,...�.!-" ��'..+w"'� .,..�..!°v+' ��4' ,.�•-^'' ' _ dt �,�,.,--'_. �� I' /. '' � ' .r'..,. .. A'� I ..... ..- .,,^ ._.: �. . c , ..,.."" '��...�� . � � " ��.r"' Y�./�f•r' " .i� � / �" ,�.�'� J - � ' .. n � .n! . ... ...�, .� .. _ .� ..;'� ... , � �,.r '� � ... �..' . � ._...� r/ .... .n� I '�+ ,. � � � . � r� ... .. �.� �(�.-�... �✓'. �"!'� f , � i -�' , _. ' �,... '...- �iy"'. �,,,!�'`,r;.�� _ � I i; ..._, . - }. � � ... „' r�y 1 a� -^".. .. ....._� " , . �, . , �"/w . . .,......�✓- r+' �� ...� ,;,... ....... ... :: ,n,�" .� : ��w,,. '��i._ ,'..�� . ' :��t� . .. ../'' ,� .. �.. . . ,. . . I ,vM ' � � -' � �� .� �'� '��.� iw I.'� ��r�'� 1 . � .r.^', r . ,.., w. . ... .. r . .. ... � �'''-�.. ,� �,,., . � : , ..:-- :,. ._y�,..,,,,. ,, �+''' .- .- _. .,--" `. ; , ' �,..- I . ... , : • `"�_....�-...� �,,. _ ; _ ;,{ 1� _{. _ ` ~; ! � ...-- - � . , ..,��. _: .: ... . _ _ _.. __. ��. ,..- ,:: ._ 1 , " . , , ,, _ ,. ..� � _ f , ..:...._.�..«.-��3C:~"�ye�"�� SEST,°^ ,� � , 8 . , � , , _ .: - ,. �'' ,i. �k� _�:.. ii ,,: _.. �„� .. . ; ; � , � , �� , ��,.� f , � „ .��, j ° - _ _� �..� M � �� a��i. � / /l � r S.f.�SLMu�',a�'"Y.""" ..,..�.....--..y.-_ �---�"'_ . .. •#��.Y ,�.�-±,.,.G.�..re:. . '�'��• -a�.�.s.�.� t.f`` 5 `�°-?. ¢��+'" ..�^' /�s'"� �_+"'^"'�'I;A i r' � k� � , « fl 1 .:•� f � __.. r ' i � 4 x .. . __. j _..'. . �. j, , y. , � Yi-Y��^ .... ' .�....� ,„,� k �-� mY� �,. �� ..».,�..�"°w�''"�� ... . ..... - ` ;. . fr �._, �_.. ..... R' � ,�.�vnr�:a ......... ......... - : , . , , '� 1� z� 3�� ..�::.. �,. �' ' i , _ - f ,�,,, -,<, � ... _ ........ : .�r. .. Y'y � �:% .t ... pd' , • .. �....w.vs'.. `wmm�"'m.��.m�m { . ...:... ...�.,�.�... ��-+ .M � :.. ..+ � M . � .�L � F �..-. ...,� � .' � . ....... � ._._.. �i.�y&��ry� ` � � � ,. _�-- . ,:.......:.�, , �� - �'n _._,..�.:.:_..._.i------"'""'""'_..... . �' � A � � �\'5„>,, = ._---__.._. - - 5 �..i,warNr _ _. . ' : - ._ . , � �. , __ .. , � � �, � � � � ``` * - 814 �. � � I t 1 .;,,..:. ...-.----- — �..., 815fl• � ';`` ; , � it � .` �� ..__ . . ... , __.... � v�, - ._.. � ; � � 814U' � , :; +` , �� ' ,. . r.., �.. ' a+a nar+ ,woa�r _R 3"�..�. ��- 4 �� / �. . y�. • ` , . , , � .. _ ... � , .r,., ._.�' . � i � . ��,r.,�. , , �- 8140' . .=`Indicates alevation groundwater. 1 � Indicates test hole number and a�proximate locatio�. 1 x Indicates test hole with piezometer,test hois number, and approximate location. 1 SLUG x Indicates test hole with piezometer and sfug test,test hnie number,and approximate location. TEST P1 �Indicates pavement test hole number and a�pproximate locatian. (NUt ta$Cala) � � � d ' : i � i ' ' 1 I ; ' i i i i i j ' ; , � : a ' ' � , ! € : . : ; � ; ' ; � ' i ' ` � � � , ' � I ' i 's � � � r : i : ; , ; x a � � � i i ' '� '_ r_,_.._-�- � 3 � i s i , _ � _. _ . _ . .__-- 1 ; � ' . . ..___._.....__ �- � �..r ...._------.... ---t-- - { . , ; ' ` ' � 1 ' ' t'.Of1S0�'tC�2:tOtl � , ' S 3 � � __ �' ` '..' .. ' ' ` � i ! ' j j j 1 ; I ; ' ; with Consiant Pressure z ------ ' } -:--�- � I � � _j._ ` � ' ` �_lJ�_on Wetting � �-?-�----- --�---- ��;- --� ---�-----Y- } �-i-� : - ` ; � , , ; i -T-T-; , ; ; i � ! 1 't' ; ; ' � + ; � ; � ' � ; ( , i I ( I I E � 1 ? : i : � � : � ; I � i ' ' � � ! � ! f i s I ! i ! � � ! ! , 1 ' ' i i ------ -------i- T-i--}-=-}-- ---}--• -- ' ' -a_ � `�_...__..___.__--� -!-----.�.__a--t_�:-J-�.-._ -i---�- � ;- ; i ; j --� �.. `.�. ! : : ; i I I � � � t i ' � ; i � ! � j � ; ; I , . , , . � s , . : � � , ; : ; i � � � ; : i ' ; ( i : � ! i : ; ; � i : . ; ; : � �' ; ! y � ; i { i l i i I ' j � s ; i i I ' � _ ' �---- , i tn Q __..._--+----;�--------;---a--E---;--i---- ---�--- ---!-__�_�- -'--t--�----_.__..._,._------r- `1 i--1- ~� t .�.__ i ' { i i , ; � i 1 i � 3 . o } � 1 � � � ( j { } ; � � ( � i � � Z ? � i I � � � i � ; i ( � , { ' l ( j f 1 � i i � 1 t i--�-�--i- � ' ----- � ' "• ; 3 ; ; _ ' '�f : ---�--�r------i , --�+---- ;j �—*--i ---�' �_`�""T i.-� T � ------ . : �--r-; � : � o i ; � � �! i � ; i � i ' ' � ! � 1 � � ' � � � ' J ' I ! ( I I I j 1 � i i � ; � ; i � � � � ! � ! . . � i � ; ' � � � � ! ; ; ° i � _.1_._ i I _ �—�- —4--�-�- 2 2 ------�-----�---;—1---t-j--r � ` —t—�-;--�---�- � --- ; --}---- ;�1 { � , � � � f � 3 I � � i ! t 1 � i � � ! � i j � i j � I 1 j ; ' � i : � + � F ' � � � � � . s , , , . .. . . I � ' ' ' � � ; i � ♦ f i � - -i-' '---i i t � ' ; �+ � i . . . . ; : : , _"_L - _ .T �'_'Y""-�"_ 3 -------...__._.__----=--.........__-!--<-_�_-,--.------_._�._..._�.._ - , -+-+�--�---...___.....-----�._.._--' i I � i � i i � ' j } I � ' � � � { � � � ! � � ' = � � G � � ( 4 i � � IM ! � ; � ; ; � 1 ; . � ; ; . � , . , , : , , , . , . ,4 � t � � � i i � _ 1 __ ' � E_ ( �..__ _ � � _ -- _.� _..._.. __; ; , ., � , _ _ L : , '< � . f ( � t ,_. _ _ ;.. ; , � ; � � ; ' s . ( : � , • i ( i i i I I i , � ' � 2 � i � � � � � , � } : � � � � , k i � � ' i l � � � j j i � � i � l 't i 't j I ( f � i 3 ; ; ; : 5 p,� 1.0 �0 100 . APPLIEd PRESSURE-ksf Moisture Canteni = 4.3 percPnt Dry Unit Weight = 120.5 pcf Sample of: Clay Silty Sand From: Test Hole 8 at 2�ft ��ouHn EP�lGINE£RIN6 CDNSlJLTRNTS SINELL-CONSOUDAT(ON TEST RESULTS JOB Na. OS-6tM3 ORAWN BY: HS FIGURE:7 APPROVED BY: JK CADFttE NAME: 60D3SWL_DWG fi S E 7 V ? ! � � 4 0. H ' Z W U � � W n. � �oarse ( Fine Gf2AVEL Coarse � Medium � Fin� SAND _r.._.._�..___..._..__..___._...._.......,.._.---..._._..........._.............................._...._...---.......,..._._... I I Gravel: 12% Sand: 57% liquid Limit: 20 SlLT Siit and Clay: 31% Plasticity Index: 6 CLAY � w � Q � w � F- Z W U � W a � � � _.__ _... �ROU�� EIV6INEERING CONSUITRNTS TA�BLE 'I SUMMARY OF LABOftATQRY TEST RESULTS � ��a�.�rHn Et�iGiNF.�EFi1NG CONSULTFINTS TABLE 3 SUMMARY OF L.ABORATORY TEST RESULTS, CONTINUED �� a wn.os-s«��:s APPENDIX A Geophysical Study by Z�r�ge Geosciences, Inc. t990 S.Garrison Sheey Suite#2 ��l��d:G Lakewaod,CO 8022T �e � �'' Phone:(T20)982-4444 r �r,�■+. �j �y Fax:TTO-962-041T i��r7Lri�i E�'�r�r ��s zongacalt�Ca2zonQe.com t'��CI} 1. ZQQg �ir. Lach St.Jean Project Manager Ground Engineering Glenwood Springs, Colorado Subject: Project 8U52-Geophysical Investigation Keport—Parking Garage Construction, Vail Ski 4rea, Vaii, Colorado Dear 'Lach, �� This letter report presents results from the geophysical investigation conducted at the proposed parking garage construction site for the�'ail Ski Area, in Vai1, Colorado(see f�igure 1}. The area ofaur investigation was an the existing parking lot(see Figure 2). Zonge Geosciences, Inc. (Zonge}perfom�ed the geophysical investigation under subcontract to Ground Engineering. Field data were acquired on 3i20l2008. The objective ofthe geophysical investigation was to detern�ine the vertical distribution afshear- wave velacity(using refraction microtremor methods {RF.M[}}down to a depth of 100 feet and to determine the depth to bedrock along a profile using the same methods. This report summarizes data acquisition parameters and field rnethods for the investigation, anc!also includes sections on.2D data processing and resultstinterpretations. Site Conditions The area of investigation is tocated on a parking lot just south af the pedestrian bridge over I-70. The line location was selected with agreement�y your representative. The line is east- west along the soath side of the existing parking lot;the orientation of the li.ne was constrained by avai(able room for the line(see Figure 2). You indicated that drill holes in this area to about ' 60 feet did not encounter bedrock. i s' � I � , F i:'. � �t€.sfe�l: _`':(%.�J l.r��1�.;��,i I }�;�`{�.;vi�:�vt�'.�;'4�Cr 1 t`"s.'�Gr� iE t E F F < � x g t � R Data Acquisition �: � � Re�v1i and refraction data were acquired using a DAQ Linkii siismo�raph. This system utilizes a � state of the art, 24-bit seismograph connected ta a field laptop via ethernet cable. .Analog data 4 from thc;geaphones are collect�d ir�the DAQ seismograph where it is anti-atias filtered, converted to a di�ital signal, transmitted to the lapto�compuier and then recorded on the hard ' drive. UAQ modules have a 24-channel capacity. Twenty-four recei��ers(geophones) were r � placed on the grou.nd along each line at a spacing of ten feet. The receivers were Mark Products, 4.�-�iz vertical cc�mponent geophones. � The refraction microtremor(Re��i) meihod uses the same instrurnentation and field layout as the ` � refraction sur�=eys. However, there are no predefined saurce points. The ReMi rnethod uses � � ambient noise, or vibrationat energy,that exists at a site. For this project,ambient noise was � largely the result of local traffic on I-70 and in the parking lot. These small-strain vibrations � 3 cause surface wave energy to propagate across the sife, 4vhich is the seismic energy recorded l measured by the ReMi method. At least ten,unfihered, 30-second ambient vibrational energy � records(i.e., `noise'records)�ere recvrded for each 1 D sounding. After a sounding was ` camplzted, the active spread was advanced ten feet and another 1 D sounding was recorded. Thi� � process was continued across the available area. Note that each sounding is based on a?30-foot � spread,thus 1 i 5 feet on each sic#e of the end points of the line are averaged into the first(or last) sounding. This"dead zone" is sampled(averaged)but data is not interpreted off the end of the line. The ambient ground motion &om 1-70 was subparatlel to the line(see Figure 2}. ; �: Data Processing � _ t The ReMi method calculates the shear-wave velocity(Vs)of layers and the respective depth�to � :a interfaces beneath the refraction line as described by L,ouie(200I). The ReMi method is primariIy used to calculate shear velocity versus dep�h at a point(1 D)to satisfy building code � requirements (lnternational Building Codc:—IBC)with regard to earthquake design and wind � � laading. ' � k § The 'noise' records cotlected at this site were processed using the SeisOpti� KeMi'�"' software(��; `' � Optim LLC, 2Q05)that uses the ReMi method(Louie, 2001). The ReMi technique is based on = ; two fundamental ideas. The first is that common seismic-refraction recording equipment, sei out t in a�uay almost identical to shallow P-wave refraction surveys, can ef�'ectively recard surface waves at frequencies as low as 2 Hz. The second idea is that a simple,two-dimensional E slowness-frequency(p-fl transform of a microtremr�r record can separate Rayleigh surface waves � from other seismic arrivals, anc�allow reeognit.ion of true phase velocity against apparent � , velocities. The advantages of Rel�ii from a seismic surveying paint of view are several, including � the following: It requires only standard refraction equipment; it requires no triggered source of ; wave energy;and,it will work best in seismically noisy urban settings. Traffic, construction,and ;; wind responses of trees, buildings, and utility standards provide the surface wave energy for this '; € method analysis. ', � � There are three main processing steps to derive the Vs profites: � � Sten 1: Create a velocity spectrum(p-f image}from the noise data. The distinctive slope of � dispersive waves is the advantage of the p-f analysis. Other arrivats that appear in microtremor � , . � � .: _ �.. ._. . ..r j:' . __ .. ..._..._ . . 2 - � ; ; 4 � i ; , . ; � � 4 records,such as bady waves and airwaves cannot ha�re such a slope. The p-f spectral pc�wer image�vill show where s�ch�haves have s�gnificant ener�y. F:ver, if most of the en�rg� ill 3 seismic record is a phase other thatt Rayleigh«�aves, the p-f analysis will separate that energy in the s}owness-freguency plot away from the dispersion curves this teehnique interprets. Step 2: Rayleigh-wave dispersian picking - Picking is done a}ong a towes"t p-fenvetvpe boundin�th�energy appearing in the p-f image. This cflnstraint ensures that the picks are represen[ative�f tnie relocities rather than apparent velocities, because noise is a.�sumed ta came fiom all directions. Picking a surface-«%ave dispersion curve along an envelope of the I�west phase velocities having high spectrat ratio at each frequency has a further desirable et�ect. I3ecausc higher-mode Rayleigh vvaves have phase velocities above those of ihe fundamentai mode,the re�raction microtremor tec.hnique preferentially yieids the fundarnental-made velocities. Ftigher modes may appear as sr;parate dispersion trends on the p-f irnages, i�they are nearly as energetic as the fundamental. Spatial aliasing witI contribute to artifacts in the slowness-frequency spectral-ratio images. On the p-f images the artifacts slope in a direction opposite to normal-mode dispersion. The p-tau transform is done in the space and time domain, so even the aliased frequencies preserve socne information. The seismic wa�res are not continuously harmonic, but arri�e in groups. Further,the refraction microtremor ana(ysis has not just two seismograms,but 10 or more. Henci;severe slowness wraparound does not occur until well abave the spatial Nyquist frequency, which is about twice the Nyyuist in most cases. Step 3: Shear wave velocity modeling-The ReMi method interactively forward-models the normal-mode dispersion data picked from the p-f images with a code adapted from Saito (1979, 1988)in 1992 by Yuehua"Lena. This code produces results identical to those of the forward- modeling codes used by Iwata et al. (1998),and by Xia et al. (1999)within their inversion procedure. The modeling iterates on phase velocity a[each period(or frequency}, reports when a solution has not been found�vithin the iteration parameters. This analysis approach and the propagation properties af surface waves allows velocity reversals(low Vs layers at depth}to be modeted successfully. Resalts!lnterpretations The ReMi 2D shear-wave velocity resutts are presented on Figure 3. Each of the one- dimensional pro#iles which make up the 2D cross-section is based on the spread of 230 feet �n either side of ihe plotted center point. As such, these shear-wave velocities and �epths to bedrock generally are an average over the entire spread. The resuits indicate that a higher ' velociry layer(near 2800 ft/sec)occurs at depths of about 75 feet. This layer can be in.terpreted ' as bedrock. Same higher velocity material is present near 40 feet al�ng the surveyed profile but , this anomaly is not interpreted as bedrock, the anomaly is consistent with a large bou}der or other geologic phenomena which might cause a velocity pullup. Additionally, the fact that the principle source of energy was I-70 the velocities may be measuring an apparent velocity rather than a veiocity based on surface �vaves propagating directly down the spread. `Chus, this anatysis ov�r estimates the VS100' values that is often used to determine the seismic site classification i for foundation design. � � 4 S . .. .:#:F i�,... , .... . .r��. .e�1.r.s.., 3 _ ..iP'i` � t- � t: � � � s �: w � � }3ased on the fel�i cc�nditivns (s�w'ce�s and their locations r�lative ta th� ge�opharte array�s), the � ` � data and the res�iltant models, overall Vs100' value for this project site is estimated to be abo��e � _ 1,8U0 fti's. This value corresponds ta a site classification ofclass D. I�owever, �ve do nv:assign " a site classifcution busecl on V.s measurements, because we are atit�ure that�tlrer site factor.s may inJluence t�1e classiTcutian. Additionativ, specific en�?ineering judgmeni is required for the �' �peciat purp�se foundations for this parking garage. Due caution and a cnnservative approach ' should be employed ��►rhen evaluating site conditions and makin� appropriatt shvctural and � foundation designs at this project site. � If you have any questions regarding the field procedures, seismic analysis techniques, or the � � � ' results anci inteipretations presented herein, please do not hesitate tu contact us. VVe appreciate € � ��rorking with you artd look for��ard to providing yau with geaphysicai services in the future. � : � �; Respectfully Submitted, ; i f s,/�f f""j��: y J'f`,��/j�*j�[�� i k f 6+�)" �'..t�.�-+ �: , J� w ? � i f Phil Sirles � r Managing Geophysicist r � ';4 € References � � Iwata,T., Kawase, H., Satoh,T., Kakehi, Y., lrikura, K., Louie,J. ivT., Abbott, R. E.,and � Anderson,J. G., I998, Array microtremor measurements at Reno, Nevada, U5A(abstract): Eos, � Trans. Amer.Geoph.ys. Lnion, v. 79,suppl. to no.45, p. F578. � � t Louie, J,N.,2001, Faster, Better: Shear-wave velocity to 100 meters depth from refraction � ; microtremor anays: Bulietin of the Seismological Society of America, v. 91, p. 347-364. �' � Pullammanappallil, S.K., and Louie,J.N., 1993, Inversion of seismic reflection traveltimes using � a nonIinear optimization scheme: Geaphysics, v. 58, p. 160?-1520. � � Pullammanappallil, S.K., and Louie,J.N., 1994,A generalizec3 simulated-annealing�ptimization � - for in��ersion of first arrival times: BSSA, v, 84, p. 1397-1409. � � � Saito, M., 1979,Cornputations af reflecti��ity and surface wave dispersion curves for layered � media; I; Sound wave and SH tivave: Butsuri-Tanko, v. 32,na �,p. l 5-26. � � f ; Saito, ;v1., 1988,Campound matrix method for the calculation of spheroidal oscillation of the $ Earth: Seismol. Res. L,ett., v. 59,p. 29. � � � Xia,J., titiller,R. D.,and Park,C. B., 1999,Estimation of near-sarface shear-��ave velocity by ,' inversion of Rayleigh wave: Geophysics, v. 64,p.691-7d0. E � z � $ ; � � . _ . .^{ -1 r � �' .`.r7.,�S�L)�f. !S�Ff�'i �-.r�{S�IL.e�`f �..'��1I��.`i��i.l�`f � s�E:�l#�i�� . ��. Y � 3�, € � t � Fq� Y F � F •3' � $,,,- < 3 c �: .1� - r ' �� '��i ��1� � �, i :�. �z.� a�`�. � � �s.. .� `'�+, �: ra . UTM l� �`x x �, ''�� t`�- °�' �,�; ��,X � �; , NOR7'H '� �� `µ .�� _ .� �� ,.�^' a l r. .^�^ � � . ,� : � r � G ( z,xe �^-�r i�t. as.- ^� * ; f ��Y� x .� d r`� . �3 _x ��„- 'f f��[l� F2'4 tr �.� �: ^>° �i�*-5,�*��Fr ��R -«,�, ��z-s..,: . �^ Y°. t '�`�� ` d �� "'OS � �,=Y i �`{. ��-. .- .;�,.+». .. R o,� �*a`�S'4u r's :. � 4'�� ..R. 7' "�wm a'"=^ �'"�"- s � � �,�^�� 5 j +.��-��' 7� �r."�f � :.- ��" xy..`y', -^a. . �y. 3 ,�jF �� '. t r ��'�� ""�.: ..,�"F -��„��' ��'"�s; �,3c.- .x � .,,..5�" � }�� 3 � � � "'�z.+iT� �,r`�� - y�� -- 'v.��p"�� 4,i��zs�'i��' �'""J,'�'�`'� � C�.r'�e«"v��. .� ,+' $S� i �: � r'' -.�t' S �� • ,,,� :. �•, .ym-� s �� : z � y ; � � -� �',� �}"^ ° z'�3 '� z x �•�" � � t .m'�z�°�.,.ye'f� :� � � �-i �,r',�" �� c. . �., .� � a"`-�✓ .. t , ;f�.�.�f�.X..� �T> ��.'� `S�.h, .- � =. �'��e'��`., �' ��'� ��xz�',�a� �� F u.^. � .�.� r � ��`�� iz �; �`� �£ � ,+��4 v '� �z.��-r�.i� " F ,�,s'C�-�. � :.�� c� si' . � f��'�`"g+�c-. ,. �. . �{' +�" g ��'� ^'�.�s .� 3 �`F .a" k�s , ; r�,Fy .�i�. <�„r � �`y x 1� a�,s""e3'.e._ f: b`--s:-�y"�'� � y L: .-' �� >'x�+„`� . '� �'e"�*.t,z � a" '�.��a,�: � � ':� f � �'��' r�� -�S3tsT��'��`�'�"`��, a '•"`�''� �`'Y� � +��{f�.`�1�' �^�`��''`� t �r�`a�`�"�.� �..Y�a` .t�Y f* � ��Y��'y , �,�t��'�u '"l�+i��`�`�*�� t � � � "�''�'�ai. "',�' �.F 5' '^� ,� at z .s '�t . �'"'x�++�" .3�.ri: � - �s�i�& x'�% x-}� 7��-'�'.�`�''�'�'�'�'`'�-��'�� ,� `y'�� "' ." �� -� �.��p J�,��.t�, '�xF-��,�,v�� /�a'��" } � �`� ��r��' � � � #� �'ri'��` �� i-� �� %a�-�,��.;�•.x��x,�� ,�� ., ,r� .2 �� 5, f�^� �"y r- �r�z:�'°'��'��'�' ,�,i ��w�� ✓r�,�. �,� `'' .,`.�.�-��;> ,:�'��k"�y�.�f � �`�'S�r�'.�'"�� £� .,�`�.�-'`�," �`..,,�U,X�'�""- �'i��x � -�� Sx'��`,e�y��tl`Y .�J "y,.^�j��c a+.� ��±� ^..�'N,��i � „'� � �") '�''�T'�c'�' _ �"�C ��C(f� '�'r �-� � �..�� :- r �� -g'��-��,�,r �K�•�.-��,�'�� r Y-Y`� .�,�� `�'�`�$-� r = � '�h. -.�'�`�'.;n��`� .. �' � k � �ah�� ..' ' �� ; �, %! Rf' v^J� z .,�.,.,� .�.� .x �S '4 -„�� j51 �} ..�`yx�a Y.��+.-.. j `"'�..s'�'�� -:�r i ,� :�`�:��'�-'4 �+��-i -°v��.��''y�-. . � � � � � � _?�... � _ �'� � 4 , rc °�'` a• '� . ��$ �^ �`��'" '�*�: �. r 1-: v. e r� ,,,s�'�� 4 �♦ �� .:.�'�'r •-� ..�n^`,s�'-�rt`' ,�.,.,�� .:�,,,7�-- t�� ,�,�&. ��[.'R�� k' � .. s + .� y.fi �� .K f"— { � � ;,�E i4 �.C,,��YyKy;; e;. �J�� -� y ::#�..-. x.� ` �� ,4T,��"..?�''�j r� bK - r�.,�y"'S�c� ��,t+r 9^ro.•x . � ��.�"� ��^:+--.� 1�' �y`'�'. x"_'.Mr �"� °#�. � bnt�1 +'z;�` f= °>'r ,r�� „ p �'�,,.": -� ,r`-°'. w-� .� -:� � /r.,"` ,� _ � ; ,�,� �� ✓ �- � a ,,, � �,$ � , �j- ' � � t S.,Y �' `� 1,.. � �`. '>"�PS.� ,,�6. �.�` Y#.:�2'�� i��w''"� 4 ,;�� ' ��/�'� �� ,��.a'�.rj e��;��"��r"�� ''��f�,c�s � x�: � '~�� r '4`"��r ✓. �r�y,. v ,(-i•�t y ^�"ra 3R �.:. �'�Y� ��-r�r��'`��` : ��z��.� ,:;�.� x FL"`�i a ^" _ :�" ��- F`a ,�s�M��'"F '�t r� .� '�'� Y.� K �s.�_�'�. x�n'�i..�c*^"'"� `� t , '� r'��.°� �y- 'c�?� �K � ,��"� � £�'�3 4e r,-�sC�"' : } � �' �'� �,. �C��cl��,E` . �� ,.F' ��- �� -� "` °-�.` .�� '"*y. ��z" �,�'` ��`�� '��.,�.� �"` � :.a �,-� ��,.a �.�k�r,��.�,� �1'. � ��'.F �" /.-f��'� �?gi_� 'Z.3'4�`� •'�-��A�� ^`5(y�X�'�w- 2+� � .�,...`fi«r.r�"�^"`.,�..ae.�K.`.,.. .:,�"'� .:4:x^u . ..,.".".m.rt'L� . ` ._�.��` �"�K"•-K'�s�3"�' ""?r -- . �s.. ..., .,_.�.._.... .._.-=-.h.-..c�..._.,,a,_ . -.... �E7 S YY NORIZONTAL SCALE CONTOUR INTERVAL=40' UTM COORDINATES NAD83 ___ . ______ __........_____._ � � SAFETY FIRST s :--___ �._._..,.____...�._�___—._---------_.__.. GItWHO BPGtNEERING Gypsum SprMps.Coloredo NOTES: Pp��cE ' v,t�cowndo � 7)The rt�p was denved trom a map downbaded from the USDA/NRCS $�� website.UTM,NAD83 projeciion,z«�e i3. LOCATION MAP '• 2)Geophysica�survey area(approximate): � � __..___ ---__._�..._ , ocarwryc+ ,�[,x�¢..a�r„o_. '�'x,.mww a�r,s.n._r�.._ rn.�xx D-.'_L .__ °�'� _. —_ Kii6.D s�Yi`E.F i1MR0YH1 ?ra M . .. r _'____ . .__ ._ .,...___"'_. . — ____ —_ ` APRII. 20� FIC,URE 1 � i i ; � 3 fr r � s � � � s k � � � � ` °�� 4 ' ,��,��•��`7 F _ . __ . � , 1 .•'_ _. i.- •�. � �� ,� T � ...,^i : ; � � : . , -- t » . ,. _ l - " � '`; ; J �` 30��rr-� �, ,! : _ ? = a ; . � — �"`_..---.r�- � ;. , ,; ',' '�-� �,.r +..r, " _ .,.--� � ! � �: : z,� � � i�'�' "' r � t i � � �m�� K' ,�,,; �e`' i ��.. } .�. - 1 . '��. f-„ �:� �.�^_ P�,y�, � ,t � z �� 'S�'.r�`'-.e�-"��`` � ��t i -��J�� .� i i;. � s �F�`-�Y _,_.F ' . .. r � � r I � p , _ � � � �i 4T�'�J�➢E �...-��~j 'i L�;�� ,�j , > � i � �,, e�� i . . ~� -:. �`y � '��„ ` i � � � ��-'�' ? �'��r�.:. . .� . i. �, ' � � f�:�;� �Jf � � �i �� 1; �. i`,�S � u.mr.' �yiLl+�':�. �� f �� S.. �, ��: � � �4i 1. "" � F � — —� t �. ; i L[..._-=. ., F - - ,y I L..._,.._.--. ..--'_'_ _ __ _ �� : , , ` �, �-. - - . _ r4 = .: ::��;�r�� M� - � 1 � � � � F ,,..�. .... .._� _ zfT2iC.�' , � ' � �. ..... .. ... . . . . . F ��. �� S � LQG�IITI�is CFT�SF NOt�i � t € a lydi�iNt hai��ratdpt ND 4fiY DR�eINl� H� ■rl�/t■omiloofon. � 1 MF�p:� iC �: w�eoao��e.aao fi € s HORIZONTAL SCALE � (feet} NOT TO SCALE � , � s'' LEGEND: �` �E1SM(C LIN� . . _ . ;. � . ' • SAFETY FIRST � --- --- -- — —__-- __ GRWMD ENGlNEERtMG ��. `�� Gypsum, Colorado '��, ?. PARKl1VC�GARR6E �.. NOTE5: varb cdorado 1)The map was derived from a drawaig fumished by Graund Ergineering, LINE �' t�neme soo3s�:e.dwq. ' LQCATION MAP � : 2)Lr.e Iocatians are apprwcrmate.r.o surveying done. _.....__ ��---..______.� — ; ? � y�yy ��:m•-rw� nowue..w�avia wcs.r� � ��: � ,T __... ' s a."rr ..r:�u. �errnm ` _ �xc.rn _.u-er.t .... .w�wan . _. _- '� $. �—___.___..__ _..._.':: .._..._..._..�.__�,._-' _::'�. �" APRiI.2068 FtGURE 2 � � �: �. - � � � Y € x: E , S: GROUND SURFACE SHEAR-WAVE VE�OC�TY CROSS-SECI'ION 0 m w v -20- � � � � -40- 0 z a 0 a � -60- - .. � 0 J W � � -8�... a w 0 -100....-: _. 0 2d 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 DISTANCE ALONG L.INE (feet) � EAST ' 1NEST 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 ,._____-----._..--_._. .......___...._._..___.---___.�__.------ • SAFETY FIRST :_._____.......__----__....___.---_.._,___- ----- c:ramo nvcrN�mxc . Gypaum, Coloisdo PARKiN6 6ARAC>E NOTES: v'+•v,ca°`�'d° 1}Sheao-wave vebciiy cross-section based on 2D ReMi StTE profiling. Geopt�or�e spacing of ten fee!and tine tength LOCATION MAP of 23D feet used to generate a iD modei at center ot spread. ,---_.. , ...._._. __._._..__....__ -- Twenty spreads corxana;ed to produce ttiis cross-section. "°'""' - '—` �Y0°- 1°«•�••�•"°�"` _°`-�=`:.� 2j See Figure t ior nrojeci IocaGCn and Figure 2 for approximaie `��,Q, �3 � ......._ w..naa .._.__....._. !�e!oca4en. Y_ ..�° _.._.---- , ;_ _ - _ ._.�-- APRlL,2008 F�',URE 3 APPENDIX B Pavement Design Calculations � � r , s ; � � ; � � � � E � s � � � r�, } � r � � .rr' i z � � � y -� � f . � ^ r, c, -r; s ^ � ^' r''�� ^ n � ^� S) r+': .7'� � ._. i �' � N �O N � r ^ �. � > .^. � N• t`, "� ; . �. v. � s ^ f.. � �� { C J � ` � � .� "� � � � � � � f :� r J � M t'i rJ � ,� � � rn CJ p''. OC t�', � .�i- V �, CI t'+ � � � ''� `+ T �� 3: C K �j v'.� ^O ,� .0 U :"' �.: •^ C � � J r v; C � � ri � p g p G. ._.. x � ,,� € ►�i � .. F ,' � � ` � s � C � �' � ` '. v ix O � ."S CL � '� r. •r, r � a � = :, � ' i. � � � J U GJ � A � � � � j �` ; � � � � � � �ii "'4 `r J ' � P; � �1 '� � d � � � ryJ � �• � , 4I �� K � ti �J �. � ,� � N � ^ � �" O C!' � :�i C�.i i � 4 p R � q . w J � G L 0 �J 3 " r„i \ �� ..^. € .� �� c� i .�",, ,y O v, +ri ir'1 .r '�, N v) r�1 f� a G � _ a. . � �f � N � � � � �i t w� € ^ N � Z e C. ;3 � .; "1 ' ;• i :' u.:' i� v M i� �� '� V P � � J � v � � �. 1E � C, �. j .�fl f ..4. � 4 � � ^� �.''� =� �. f�-+L' � � � �t ?` � "�V. �'. �� .i ` � y & � � V L � � � x 'V ^- 1 r � � � � r v S " � :J � �' � � •; ^� '?C +�C - �-�. .�..�. 4Y' ` •` " � ' - �„ �' �"r � � t rt � �V ~ � � � � � J� i y ~ -�L O � \c '� �; �� Er :\ � € ` x ^ '�'� � ✓� ... v � � ;` Y € `": ..,, i fi -� � s _ �' � �'' =�. :.� � :� .�; ^ : � � ; c`. �,� ` � 1� y �-+ ^ � € � � '- -r '�, � .�L . �, `G�y ! � :,,� �- :.. �ri C ^ S % '"�„\ .,� ,,,�,,.. •-,, ;n r r ti '� R t. � � �: �. � � �. € C s � E � f' � F £ G C .r M � V � r� J �! :� � � � � •� � � � �1 � � o x � c.t �i !' K; sC1. � •� G �` C V � � � � ,., � r r.., N V7 X � " V; :' 'i. 4 :L � � � � � � w � C V -� � � , � r � � J `J � ^ ; ti' J U r ��: \/ ^ .0 ^ .l ' � J � ,� > i y V ;_; �o v �a _i �;,, � �r, cV �' :•• R p�j !� G r �!'� `=: .y r-: � et 'T. �„� N � v � �u ' j 1 �Qy� V hYl ..� � � . O C �C y o o a� � y '^ v; N tf, � '✓.' N C 1'� '�' y � v :/' � V't V ~ � � ,� F �- � .. ., :�i N C U': ��. .� v y' .y .�C ` _ `ti, � � . �^.t1 " � � � �e �1' �y `�, � �!' � � � � � � �: r� ^ V � � � � �; .r, ,` . ' � ca -� � � � � � ~ i: i� i ;:i �aG � ,f��"�. ~ n'1 'r � J v � ..+ .' � ~' �) d . . �, �- a -C -C �.i S.' 3 .'�. �.i J� ,l .r. `-�C t ";,� .'L ,� � .' � � .� �; +. �,. •� t :iC ♦, . C -= �, j` ir �: n ` � f �' _` :� . � � v �� `. � � .y � y 4 . 7 �� ! = �rLi I ','\ .�J "(` "'�.� V G/� � .� \'v v ~' ^' � ��. � � `.\ � � � �- FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 01100 -SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 7. Use of premises. 8. Owner's occupancy requirements. 9. Work restrictions. 10. Specification formats and conventions. B. Related Sections include the following: 2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS � A. Project Identification: North Day Lot. 1. Project Location: Vail, Colorado. B. Owner: Vail Resorts Development Company. C. Architect: OZ Architecture of Boulder, Inc. D. Contractor: R.A. Nelson Construction has been engaged for Preconstruction Services for this Project. G. The Work consists of the following: construction of a new residential four story building with an enclosed parking garage below at the building's ground level. Employee housing units (3-and 4- bedroom units)are provided on all upper levels. 1. Work Included in Contract: a. Excavating, site utilities (within the lines of limit of construction), shoring, building foundations,foundation drainage. b. Demolition of existing surFace parking lot and site structures. c. Site development, retaining walls. d. General Construction of the building. e. Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Construction of the building. f. Site improvements and off-site improvements. g. Landscape. SUMMARY 01100- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � �k k w 5 � [ FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � ; } ; � < 1.3 TYPE OF CONTRACT '� + 5 A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. � � � � 1.8 USE OF PREMISES � � � ' A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including `` ; use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only i by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. � C. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of � Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. t � � f = 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site. � ` 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear � a and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. � ° Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. ;; ; a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. � � � b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of � materials and equipment on-site. c � ' �: 1.9 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS � C. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to � , occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before � Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the � Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance & of the total Work. � � � � 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion � of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. � 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner � occupancy. � 3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully � operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On � occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems � serving occupied portions of building. � � � 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial � service for occupied portions of building. � t �: ¢ � 1.11 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS � A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using F the 16-division format and CSI/CSCs "MasterFormat" numbering system. � � € � 2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in � the Specifications. � � t SUMMARY 01100-2 �; OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; � ; � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 01100-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � 4 < � £ FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET �' :� VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � ; [ � � � y � g t � � � �; _ 5 � i § � 1 � � � � F [ k x € 'r. � t t 1 i � S � � � t � _ � �: � d x . £ • � `s � ,`s; � € . �' s 6 t f t `4 .r, � -P Y rt � � � Cy k �' '7 F � �} 4 } � � � SUMMARY 01100-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO �; � F � � � € i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 01250 -CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 3. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "ArchitecYs Supplemental Instructions." 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. • 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 7 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect . CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � r E. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � = VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 �� _ � � 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the � � effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. �' 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total ? amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. = � � 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade #' � discounts. � � 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. � �; 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the � change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish � times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an � extension of the Contract Time. � 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the �: proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system � specified. � � � � `i C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests . � s � ' 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES � € �: A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for � signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 . " � � # : 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE �, g � ` A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on � � AIA Document G714 . Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with �' a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. � d 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the P Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract �' Sum or the Contract Time. ` i � B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by �: the Construction Change Directive. k � ` 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data �. necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. � � � PART 2 - PRODUCTS(Not Used) � g � k � � PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) � � s � % END OF SECTION 01250 � � r � . � 4 � CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-2 � : � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � a � s � � � �: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � SECTION 01290 -PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 2. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 4. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule. � d. List of Subcontractors. f. List of Products. g. List of Principal Suppliers and Fabricators. 3. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � s" s € r 4 a FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ; s � � ; 2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets . : 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the � following for each item listed: �� s � ' a. Related Specification Section or Division. s ' b. Description of the Work. z x c. Name of subcontractor. � d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. & e. Name of supplier. � f. Change Orders(numbers)that affect value. � g. Dollar value. _: � � 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, ` adjusted to total 100 percent. � g: � 4 Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued � evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the � Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract � amounts, where appropriate. � 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work � where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or � ; fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. „ � ( 5 a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include � 4 evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. � � � 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for � s each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the # Work. � 9. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. � Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each . � item. 4 � � a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual �; work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of � Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. � � 10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next f 'x Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives � result in a change in the Contract Sum. � � . � c 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT � A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments � as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. � � � 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial �. Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. � a � � � � PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-2 � ' OZ Architecture Boulder, CO �' � �, � � � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement befinreen Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets or other standard form acceptable to and approved by Owner as form for Applications for Payment. F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. G. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner resenres the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. • 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule(preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � � t ; �{ � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � ; � `� ,. 14. Performance and payment bonds. � e 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. t S 16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. � � K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of � � Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent � completion for portion of the Work cfaimed as substantially complete. ,Yf D ? ; 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a �. statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. � 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued R s previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. � � � L. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and : € supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, � to the following: � � � 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. ; 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and ` proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. � 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. � k 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's A�davit of Payment of Debts and Claims." � 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." � ; 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." �� 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. � ' 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as � of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed � � responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. � 9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. � :e � £ f PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) � " � � �: PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) F � Y � END OF SECTION 01290 � � :> � � € :. �' � � � r ) � {: F � � � � �' $ ! S � } � � B PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-4 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO N � # 8. � � f 4 � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 01310-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Conservation 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Administrative and supenrisory personnel. 4. Project meetings. 5. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). C. Related Sections include the following: 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � �' t � � � r � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � � ; C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures � � required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of � � attendees at meetings. � 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of � their Work is required. ; � D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative �. procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid � � conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, �' but are not limited to, the following: � � � 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. �: 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. � 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. € 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. � 5. Progress meetings. �' 6. Preinstallation conferences. e 7. Project closeout activities. ' 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. � ' 9. Project closeout activities. . r � � E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out � with consideration given to conservation of energy,water, and materials. � { , � 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually � � # incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged � materials that are designated as Owner's property. �: _ � �' 1.4 SUBMITTALS � . � ' A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability � � necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components � � or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate � entities. � � 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base �; Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard � printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: � � � � a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, x structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. � b. Indicate required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of � dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum � clearance requirements. Provide altemate sketches to Architect for resolution � of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. � .� � 2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches. � � � �: ` PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � 0 � < � � ; � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy . a. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain finro copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one retumed copy as a Project Record Drawing. 4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than [15) days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concemed parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � �� € � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � ` VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � � 3 � x h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. � i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. � ' j. Submittal procedures. � I. Preparation of Record Documents. � m. Use of the premises. � n. Work restrictions. " o. Owner's occupancy requirements. � p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. _ � r. Parking availability. � :; s. Office,work, and storage areas. � ` t. Equipment deliveries and priorities. �: u. First aid. g v. Security. �` � w. Progress cleaning. � x. Working hours. �: x 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. � i C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before �` each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. � r 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in � � or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials � ; and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise � � Architect of scheduled meeting dates. � 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the � � particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: � � a. The Contract Documents. � £ b. Options. � ;s c. Related RFIs. . ; _ . d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. � x f. Deliveries. � s g. Submittals. � i. Possible conflicts. a` j. Compatibility problems. ` k. Time schedules. � � I. Weather limitations. $ m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. � ` n. Warranty requirements. � o. Compatibility of materials. i p. Acceptability of substrates. ` q. Temporary facilities and controls. � � r. Space and access limitations. _ s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. � t. Testing and inspecting requirements. k u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. � ; x. Protection of adjacent work. �. ; y. Protection of construction and personnel. � , PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-4 �: OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � E .? �. .3 � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals as appropriate. Coordinate dates of ineetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of p�evious progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from -� parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. � 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � t � :; � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � i VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 z � �' f 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. � � �: 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who � should have been present. k t 3 ' a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each � ; progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or s: � recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each ; meeting. F � � E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings when required. Project ` coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as � � progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. � s + 1. Attendees: Each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with � current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future � � activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference r shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. ° 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination � � meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics �; ' for discussion as appropriate to status of Project � ; c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the � = following: � � ; � i 1) Interface requirements. � ; 2) Sequence of operations. � � " 3) Status of submittals. � 4) Deliveries. � t 5) Off-site fabrication. � ` 6) Access. � 7) Site utilization. . � ' 8) Temporary facilities and controls. '' 9) Work hours. �' fF 10) Hazards and risks. � ; 11) Progress cleaning. � � 12) Quality and work standards. � � 13) Change Orders. �: . � ; 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance �. and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. ; � E ; 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) � A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract � � Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and � submit an RFI in the form specified. � F 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor � will be retumed with no response. � 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's � ; work or work of subcontractors. � � � � � PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-6 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � V �x t � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. C. Hard-Copy RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A . 1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. E. ArchitecYs Action: Architec�will review each RFI, determine action required, and retum it. Anticipate no less than two and no more than ten working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. ArchitecYs local time will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of subsfitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section"Contract Modification Procedures." PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � z � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � t � � a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time �' or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within [10] days of receipt of the � RFI response. � ;: F. On receipt of ArchitecYs action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI � response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if � Contractor disagrees with response. � G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. � Submit log weekly . Use CSI Log Form 13.2B. Include the following: �` � 1. Project name. � _ 2. Name and address of Contractor. } 3. Name and address of Architect. � 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. � 5. RFI description. � 6. Date the RFI was submitted. ' 7. Date ArchitecYs response was received. � ` 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, ; ' and Proposal Request, as appropriate. F � ; H. If requested information is available from a careful study and comparison of the Contract � '� Documents, field conditions, other Owner-provided information, coordination drawings, or `' ; prior Project correspondence or documentation, Architect may invoice Owner as a change ; in services for costs involved in ArchitecYs review, analysis, responding and processing of � : such RF1. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for such costs. � � k r I. Contractor may anticipate receiving 75 clarifications, interpretations, orders for Minor � Changes in the Work or responses to valid requests for interpretations or clarifications of �, the Contract Documents. � � ¢ . � PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) � � PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) � �; �: END OF SECTION 01310 { , + � _ � � 5 : t � a' i � � PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-8 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � t f t � } 1 & FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 01320 -CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 6. Field condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Sections include the following: 2. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures"for submitting the Schedule of Values. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 4. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures"for submitting schedules and reports. 6. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS I. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category(action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit one opaque copy of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit one copy at weekly intervals. I. Field Condition Reports: Submit one copy at time of discovery of differing conditions. J. Special Repo�ts: Submit one copy at time of unusual event. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � f. � f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ; � ; 1.5 COORDINATION � � � Y A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of ; construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. � t B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of � subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required =: ;;; schedules and reports. ¢ 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. ' 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the nefinrork with other activities and schedule € them in proper sequence. { � PART2 - PRODUCTS � t � 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE � A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates � required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, 3 manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. � .. � 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, r and Contractor's Construction Schedule. � � €. 3. Submittal: Submit concuRently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's �� Construction Schedule. { � 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL . � ; B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of c Substantial Completion. � 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that ' shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each � principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: � � '; 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless k specifically allowed by Architect. � 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items � and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing,fabrication, and delivery. ; 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 � Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in � Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. � 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 21 days for startup and testing. � t $ CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-2 ; OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � ¢ i ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for ArchitecYs administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: e. Use of premises restrictions. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. �. G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart- type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 14 days of date established for � commencement of the Work . Base schedule on whatever updating and feedback was � received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values." 2. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion. 3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. 4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � t t E FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 = � 5. Coordinate the Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list � of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other � schedules. 6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. � Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. i � 2.6 REPORTS f � A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following � information conceming events at Project site: _ 3 ''s 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. � 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. � 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. � 5. Material deliveries. �' 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. s 7. Accidents. � 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. .. � 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. P 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. � � 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. � � 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. � 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. � 19. Substantial Completions, if any, authorized. � ( C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference befinreen field conditions E and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request � for interpretation on CSI Form 13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing � ` conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. � � 2.7 SPECIAL REPORTS =� A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. � Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. � B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special � report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance ` when these events are known or predictable. � � � CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-4 � ; OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � � € � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activiry durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to ArchitectOwner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � s ; € � ; `' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ` VAIL, COLORADO ' MARCH 4, 2010 � � � x � 4' { � [ i b i �k # � $ f t t � d �.. Y ( � } . � } ¢ Y 4 � F F � } � f � f � $: � � i P � F } � � p � � CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-6 ? OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � ; t � r t � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures"for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 5. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements"for submitting test and inspection reports. 6. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties. 7. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 8. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 10. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings may be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. See other Part 1 Articles for additional requirements for release of electronic file copies. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ;. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other � { submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for � coordination. � � a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. ;: C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction � Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled ! performance of related construction activities. _ ; � ; D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, � as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals t ' enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. � r: ' 1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional ` ' time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise � Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. ` ; 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same f � manner as initial submittaL f ; 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 14 days for review of each resubmittaL r ` 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, ` ` Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. ' k � i E E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. � �< 1. Indicate name of firm or entiry that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record t € , Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. _ � 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: � { � a. Project name. ° F b. Date. � € c. Name and address of Architect. � d. Name and address of Contractor. � e. Name and address of subcontractor. ft � f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. � h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. � � 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a § � decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). � Resubmittals shall include a sequential alphabetic suffix after another � � decimal point(e.g., 06100.01.A). � � �i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. � � j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. � � k. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate. � � I. Other necessary identification. � � � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-2 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � t � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � F. Deviations: Encircle or similarly specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect obsenres noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 2. Do not submit additional copies intended for maintenance manuals with initial submittals. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will forward to the Contractor, without review, submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810 . 3. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. �� 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Revise As Noted" or "No Exceptions Taken." J. Distribution: Fumish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Revise As Noted" or "No Exceptions Taken." 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files may be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions: 1. A $500 fee per discipline to cover the ArchitecYs administrative costs and labor associated with assembling the waiver and the documents to transfer the files, is required. 2. The Architect will provide to the Contractor electronic files required upon completion of the Architect's electronic waiver form at the end of this Section. Sub-contractors may obtain files from the Contractor. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3. The Architect will only transfer files containing plans, including roof plans, exterior a� elevations and building sections. Files may not reflect field changes. No other ` ! drawing files will be transferred to parties outside of OZ ARCHITECTURE. A signed copy of the abovementioned waiver must be submitted by the Contractor prior to any files transfer. 4. Refer to Architect's form: "Use of Architect's Drawings on Electronic Media (Contractor Form)°following this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS E A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification � Sections. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and rype of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data ` are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. _ 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. % 3. Include the following information, as applicable: t a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. � b. Manufacturer's product specifications. ; c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. #: d. Standard color charts. ` ' e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. € ' f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. � 3 g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. E i. Mill reports. ; � j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. � � k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. ` I. Testing by recognized testing agency. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. � n. Notation of coordination requirements. � � 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit finro copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. ` f Architect will retum one copy. Mark up and retain returned copy as a Project Record F Document. ; 's C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not ;` � base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed s ';; data, unless use of Architect's CAD Drawings are otherwise permitted. Standard t information submitted without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing and ; will be retumed without review. � � � � °� SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; _ � � ; ;s , ,.a � ' j; S FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate befinreen manufacturer-installed and field- installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches. 3. Number of Copies: a. Initial Submittals: Submit finro high quality, high- contrast blueline or blackline copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy. b. Final Submittals: Submit three (five where required for maintenance manuals) blueline or blackline copies of each submittal. Architect will return finro (four) copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattem, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics befinreen submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. e. Required standards compliance. f. Availability and delivery time. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual � Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work or otherwise designated as Owner's property are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. ' a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, t pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. t 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared ` from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. ��a. Number of Samples: Submit finro sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. � " 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. ; 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in . ; material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets � of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. 4' � E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written � summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. � Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. , 2. Number and name of room or space. ;, 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise � indicated. Architect will return one copy. a. Mark up and retain returned copy as a Project Record Document. G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section : "Construction Progress Documentation." ` ! H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." � � ` SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-6 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ' ; £ i '} 2 E l FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated.Architect will return one copy. a. Mark up and retain returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals .required by other Specification Sections. - • 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. • Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and,where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-7 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO II _ �: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead � certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. £ Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying � that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on = evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. � L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in ; e.ffect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organizatiori: 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. � 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. �� 7. Limitations of use. I [ :� M. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before x installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract E Documents. ` x t O. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibiliry tests performed � before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate � preparation needed for adhesion. P. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either : during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance '' ;j with requirements in the Contract Documents. ; � Q. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section"Operation and Maintenance Data." � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES � 01330-8 �� ; OZ Architecture Boulder,CO i r � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 R. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. T. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. � 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. U. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. W. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. 1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or ce�tifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, � submit a written request for additional information to Architect. . SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other � � , required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents, and with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. t Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. � PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. r C. "By Others" Provisions: Where submittals refer to materials or installation to be fumished, ` installed, or provided "by others", or similar language of the same inference, provide � additional notation or supplemental information that identifies "others°; describes its/ their contractual relationship with the Contractor, if any; and describes its/ their scope of } responsibility for the Work. Submittals that do not include Contractor's additional notation or supplemental information will be returned without action. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp = and wifl return them without action. � B. Action Submittals: Architect will review submittals, make marks to indicate corrections or ` modifications required, and retum it. Architect will stamp submittals with an action stamp � and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. "No Exceptions Taken": When the Architect marks this action, the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with the requirements of the Contract � Documents. Final payment depends on this compliance. ' 2. "Revise as Noted": When the Architect marks this action, the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the ; submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on ` ; this compliance. € 3. "Rejected": When the Architect marks this action, do not proceed with Work covered � by the submittal, inctuding purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise � or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. # Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. � G � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 10 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 4. "Revise & Resubmit": When the Architect marks a submittal "Revise and Resubmit", do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a new action mark. a) Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Rejected" or "Revise and Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 5. "Returned Without Review": Submittals not in compliance with requirements of this Section. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will retum it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. 3.3 SUBMITTAL �CHEDULE MATRIX The matrix at the end of this Section identifies submittals required for architectural technical Specifi- cation Sections for this Project. Submittals required for consultants' technical Specification Sections for this Project may be found in individual consultant Sections. Specific requirements for submittals and procedures are found in other Division 1 Sections and in individual Divisions 2 through 16 Sec- tions. END OF SECTION 01330 • SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-11 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERM�T SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � � s � 3 � 1- t i i � I .Y ; E � � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-12 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � R � ARCHITECTURE USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS ON ELECTRONIC MEDIA 4 URBAN DESIGN (CONTRACTOR FORM) ■�� INTERIOR DESIGN T0: DATE: FIRM: PROJECT: FROM: PROJECT#: FILE#: At your request,OZ Architecture of Boulder,Inc.("OZ AR�HITECTURE")will provide CAD files on CDRom foryour convenience in the preparation of shop drawings and forthe use of your subcontractors,suppliers and material men,solely for this particular purpose and subject to the following terms and conditions: A. OZ ARCHITECTURE CAD files are compatible with AutoDesk ACAD zoo6,operating on a Pentium-based personal computer,using MS Windows OS.OZ ARCHITECTURE makes no representation as to the compatibility of these files beyond the specified release of the referenced software nor does OZ ARCHITECTURE make any representation as to the compatibility ofthe files on any other software or hardware. B. Information presented on CAD disks is considered part of OZ ARCHITECTURE's instruments of professional service,require professional interpretation andjudgment,and shall not be used by you for any purpose other than the convenience of preparation of shop drawings for this particular project. It is agreed that this information shall not be used for any other projects,for additions to this project or completion of this project by another design professional. Any other use or reuse by you or by others who obtained the CAD files directly or indirectly through you,will be at your sole risk and without any liability or legal exposure whatsoever to OZ ARCHITECTURE. Furthermore,you agree,to the fullest extent permitted by law,to defend, indemnify and hold harmless OZ ARCHITECTURE from all claims,damages,losses and expenses, including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting from the use ofthe CAD files. You further agree to make no claim and hereby waive,for yourself and your subcontractors,to the fullest extent permitted by law,any claim or cause of action of any nature against OZ ARCHITECTURE,its officers,directors,employees,agents or sub consu�tants which may arise out of,or in connection with,your use of the CAD files. C. OZ ARCHITECTURE makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of CAD files. Addenda ' information or revisions made after the date indicated on the CAD files have not been incorporated and OZ ARCHITECTURE assumes no responsibility by virtue ofthis Agreement to advise you of any subsequent amendments,revisions or addenda. These CAD files are not"Contract Documents". Significant differences may exist between these CAD files and similar Contract Documents due to addenda,change orders or other revisions. OZ ARCHITECTURE makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of CAD files. In the event that a conflict arises between the signed and sealed Contract Documents prepared by OZ ARCHITECTURE and�or its sub-consultants,and CAD files,the signed and sealed Contract Documents shall govern. You are responsible to determine if any conflicts exists. By your use of these CAD files,you are not relieved of your duty to fully comply with the Contract Documents,including without limitation the need to check,confirm and coordinate your work with that of other contractors,if any,and to fully and properly supervise your subcontractors. D. Due to the potential that the information presented in the CAD files can be modified unintentially or otherwise,OZ ARCHITECTURE reserves the right to remove all indicia of its ownership,authorship and�or involvement from each electronic display. However,by doing so,OZ ARCHITECTURE does not waive, modify,or limit its ownership,authorship or rights for purposes ofthe copyright or intellectual property laws, rules,regulations or procedures. a.3.soio Pageiof; c�users�bob\documents�my dowments\00000 specifica[ions mnsuking�projects�oz\first chair�specifications�yo_<onstruction documents�zxxx-xx-zx_issue description\architecmraqoi33ob.doc BOULDER PHONE:303�49.6900 1805 29TH STREET,SURE 2054 FAX:303.��9.3886 DENVER BOUIDER COLORADO SPRINGS US VEGAS UKE TAHOE BOULDER,COLORADO 80307 W W W.OURCH.COM � � k � �: �� ARCHITECTURE USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS ON ELECTRONIC MEDIA t ��y uRBnH�eswH (CONTRACTOR FORM) �' ��6,�o INTERIOR DESIGN � `'� k i `s E. OZ ARCHITECTURE will furnish the digital format ofthe CAD files requested.Referto attachment for a list of all files transmitted. � � F. An administrative fee of 3500.0o shall be remitted to OZ ARCHITECTURE priorto delivery of the CAD files. �! ; � G. No warranty,express or implied,induding the implied warranty of inerchantability and fitness for a particular �• j purpose is made respecting this Agreement orthe CAD files. � � & F � ; H. Any purchase order number provided by Contractor is for Contractor's accounting purposes only. Purchase � s order terms and conditions are void and are not a part of this agreement. � � �: � � L This is not a sale of OZ ARCHITECTURE's copyrights. Nothing herein shall be interpreted or deemed to be � � transfer of any of OZ ARCHITECTURE's copyrights,except for a limited use license as specifically set forth 3 � herein. Except for the specific uses approved herein,no other license,right or other uses are granted or � � implied by this Agreement. You may not assign,delegate,sublicense,pledge,or otherwise transfer any � � license or right granted herein to another party,except as specifically provided herein,without the prior � s written approval of OZ ARCHITECTURE � � ` J. This is solely an agreement between your company and OZ ARCHITECTURE. There are no third party � � beneficiaries to this agreement. However,Contractor agrees to impose the same limitations and conditions � ' contained herein upon the use of the CAD files upon any of its subcontractors,suppliers or material men to � : which access is given to the CAD files by Contractor. � 3 � � � K. The laws of Colorado shall govern this agreement. � � � �x L. OZ ARCHITECTURE reserves the right to request a distribution log from the Contractor of when the CAD files � were issues and to whom they were issued. � � • � � AUTHORIZED ACCEPTANCE �� ; OZ ARCHITECTURE OF BOULDER,INC. �� ; � P. :� � u j. ;. � ;Y By Title Date � 4 � � Offical name of contractor � t ; '¢ 4 � By Title Date � � _� � � k ,� � :f i .3 � � � [ 4 � i � ,3, 3�3��oio Pagezof3 q.: ¢ �: '��' BOULDER PHONE:303 449.8900 �� } 7805 29TH STREET,SUfTE 2054 FAX:303.449.3886 t DENVER BOULDER COLORADO SPRINGS lAS VEGAS LAKE TAHOE BOULDER,COLORADO 60301 WWW.OZARCH.COM t�. � � .� � 5 � i F � � ARCHiTECTURE USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS ON ELECTRONIC MEDIA URBAN DESIGN (CONTRACTOR FORM) MMM�� INTERIOR DESIGN Attachment:Document List File Name Size Date Description 3.3.�oio Page 3 of 3 . BOULDER PHONE:303 4�9.8900 1805 29TH STREET,SURE 2051 FAX:303.�49.3886 DENVER BOULDER COLORADO SPRINGS LAS VEGAS LAKE TAHOE BOULDER,COLORADO 80307 WWW.OZARCH.COM FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 01400 -QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Senrices: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination,testing, or operation; they are not Samples. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO i � i ; t � � ; FIRST CHAIR PERMiT SET i VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 i � ' E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are perFormed specifically for the � Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance �' ; or compliance with specified criteria. £ � � € F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a � � testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having ,` jurisdiction,to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. � � , g G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, � ` i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. � k ; H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are perFormed on-site for � p installation of the Work and for completed Work. { § 4 � s I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing � � laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. �' ; s e J. Installer/Applicator/Erector. Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an � � employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction � � operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. � � ; 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities � = must be perFormed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic � � name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply � - exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. € � � K. Experienced: Unless otherwise indicated, when used with an entiry, "experienced" means � � � having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and � �� scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. � � � . � €' � 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS � �. � � A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish � ; different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the � � most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but � � apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. : � � B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantiry or quality level shown or specified shall ' n 4 be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the � z minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable � ' limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or � ; maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect ` � � for a decision before proceeding. � � ; C. In the event of inconsistency befinreen portions of Contract Documents or within Contract � � Documents; provide better quality and greater quantity of Work. Bring all inconsistencies to � � ArchitecYs attention, prior to installation,for ArchitecYs interpretation. � � � ' � � � � � � f � � ' QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-2 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � �. � , � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies � with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � ¢ � r FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET $ VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 q ;: C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems � � similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service �' performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. � D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those � indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as ` � i sufficient production capacity to produce required units. f ' E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to � ; practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing � � engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those F � performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those r indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. � F L � G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the { � experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented � 6 according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; � � and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. � 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. f � 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NISTs National Voluntary � � Laboratory Accreditation Program. � � � � H. Factory-Authorized Service�Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of � � manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of ; � manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated � � ' for this Project. � ' � � I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction � y testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, � � comply with the following: " € } 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: � fi P `E' a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. � ` b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and � analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. �; ; c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory b mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with � � performance requirements. �� d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will � ;� perform same tasks for Project. ;, f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; ;, � do not reuse products on Project. � � � 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, � '� inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect,with copy to Contractor. ¢ `:� Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected ' T work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. � � ` � � ;TS � � � � ;� QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-4 ` '� OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � :� �' `3 � � R: '� � � ; � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: Submit list of generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, sources of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and source of aggregates. a. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockups constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. 2. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 8. See "Special Mockup Schedule" at the end of Part 3 of this Section for special mockups required in addition to mockup requirements in other individual Specification sections. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies �engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � i fi � i' � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET f VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � }, a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in � ; writing by Owner. i 2. Notify testing agencies at least 72 hours in advance of time when Work that requires � testing or inspecting will be performed. � 3. Where quality-control seroices are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a £ i certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. � ; 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract � ! Documents are Contractor's responsibiliry. 3 i 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having � jurisdiction,when they so direct. � � � h � C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service � � representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including � � service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal � � Procedures." '`_ 4y � 3 f D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were ; � Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and � � reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract � f Documents. � � 4 ; E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance � � of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. � � � : 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in � � � the Work during performance of its services. � 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests � �� are conducted. � ' 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested � � and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. � '_: 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar . �: ; quality-control service through Contractor. ; 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or � approve or accept any portion of the Work. � :_ � f 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. � � � F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and e � similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. � ? Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personneL � Provide the following: � � � � 1. Access to the Work. �� 3 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. � t 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and � ; inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. � ; 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. ' 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by � `� testing agency. � 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at � y Project site. � � � � � QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-6 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � k: s k f �: S: ; � � i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality- assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Include all tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, regardless of whether testing agency is Owner- or Contractor- engaged. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work . 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect,testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. .. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perForm the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. � 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.2 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include all tests and inspections regardless of whether testing agency is Owner-or Contractor-engaged. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � ; F►RST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ' � � � B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access � to test and inspection log for ArchitecYs reference during normal working hours. ; � � � 3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION � � � A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair k` ; damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. � f � � 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and � � Patching." ` ; ` � � ; B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. z' [ y � C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of �; � responsibility for quality-control services. ; € � ` 3.4 SPECIAL MOCKUP SCHEDULE � � 6 � ` A. Exterior Envelope Mockup: � � 1. Construct mockup incorporating the following visible and concealed components and � $ materials: �� : � � ° a. Stone veneers, including flashings and copings and other trim pieces. � � b. Fiber cement siding and flashings,trim, and reveals. „� � ; c. Raised panel siding and flashings,trim, and reveals. � d. Stucco and flashings, trim, and reveals. � ; e. Material transitions details. � � f. Flashing transitions details. � ; � g. A typical aluminum-clad wood window, including flashings and trim. � ; i. Asphalt shingle roofing, including typical eave condition and guttering. � j. Standing seam metal roofing, including typical eave condition. � � ; 2. Construct mockup"full depth", excluding interior finish substrate. Include all wall, roof, � � and soffit weather- resistive assembly components. Include framing, sheathings, � 'z underlayments, flashings, air barriers, vapor retarders, sealants, and other full- � � envelope components. Include typical hardware, fasteners, and other accessories. Y 3. Exclude insulations, interior gypsum board vapor retarders and other components � ; that conceat framing cavities from interior. � j 4. Mockup Size: As required for incorporation of indicated building components, but no � a less than 16 feet wide by 10 feet high. � � 5. Construct mockup on project site. Locate so that mockup may remain undisturbed � � until Substantial Completion or removal is approved by Architect, whichever occurs � � first. � ,� �. ; ¢ � END OF SECTION 01400 � :� � i � �: � � � � (. � � '� QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-8 ; � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � '.a �; Y � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required,"and "permitted" have the same meaning as"directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted,""scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions;�and agreements within the construction industry that 'control performance of the Work. F. Furrnsh . Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 1. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. REFERENCES 01420-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � s, % r � f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ` � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS � ; B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or � other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the � ; following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are ` ; believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ' � I ; AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703)358-2960 4 www.aluminum.org # � AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216)241-7333 � � www.aaadm.com � ; ; AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202)737-0202 � � www.aabchq.com � s � € AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847)303-5664 � § www.aamanet.org ,. 3 � � AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation (202)624-5800 g � Officials � wuvw.transportation.org � iR t � P �� AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919)549-8141 �' � (The) 4 „ www.aatcc.org �; � � Y ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866)956-5888 � ; � www.airbarrier.org � � ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202)367-1155 �: �, www.abma-dc.org � � � � ACI ACI Intemational (248)848-3700 � � (American Concrete Institute) � www.aci-int.org �' ; � � ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972)506-7216 Ywww.concrete-pipe.org � � AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205)257-2530 � :� www.aeic.org � ;� � � � AF&PA American Forest& Paper Association (800)878-8878 � � www.afandpa.org (202)463-2700 � ,y x ; AGA American Gas Association (202)824-7000 � � www.aga.org � � ,s; � :� AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703)548-3118 � � www.agc.org x k � � ; REFERENCES 01420-2 � § OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � $ � ., a � � ; � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202)872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859)288-4960 vwvw.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800)242-3837 www.aia.org (202)626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800)644-2400 www.aisc.org (312)670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202)452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303)792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET-Professional Landcare Nefinrork) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301)972-1700 www.alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847)394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202)293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (405)780-7372 www.aosaseed.com APA Architectural Precast Association (239)454-6989 www.archprecast.org APA APA-The Engineered Wood Association (253)565-6600 www.apawood.org APA EWS APA-The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems (See APA-The Engineered Wood Association) API American Petroleum Institute (202)682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703)524-8800 www.ari.org REFERENCES 01420-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � I �' I � P 1 � E FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � j VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � : � ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202)207-0917 � � www.asphaltroofing.org �` � ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800)548-2723 � ¢ www.asce.org (703)295-6300 ; � ¢: £ w ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering } I nstitute ' � (See ASCE) ' � r g ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- (800)527-4723 � � Conditioning Engineers � � www.ashrae.org (404)636-8400 �� ` � � ASME ASME International (800)843-2763 � (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (973)882-1170 � International) � www.asme.org � � ; � ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440)835-3040 � www.asse-plumbing.org � � 'x �: `� ASTM ASTM International (610)832-9585 � � (American Society for Testing and Materials International) ; www.astm.org � � � : = AWC� AWCI Intemational (703)534-8300 � � (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International) � __� www.awci.org r ; � °� � `; AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association � :� . (Now WCSC) � t � '� AW I Architectural Woodwork Institute (571)323-3636 `� � www.awinet.org � � � Nn AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (205)733-4077 � -� www.awpa.com s � F: ` AWS American Welding Society (800)443-9353 a '; www.aws.org (305)443-9353 � ; AWWA American Water Works Association (800)926-7337 ;� www.awwa.org (303)794-7711 � '� � � BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212)297-2122 � � :� www.buildershardware.com � .� ; :� , ; BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703)620-0010 X `� www.bia.org � :� ; � � ' BICSI BICSI (800)242-7405 � � ;� REFERENCES 01420-4 ` ,; OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � w �; � � € '� � ,; � .� FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 www.bicsi.org (813)979-1991 BIFMA BIFMA International (616)285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Indusiry Sanitation Standards Committee (866)342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610)527-3880 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800)232-3282 www.copper.org (212)251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613)230-9263 www.canelect.ca CFFA Chemical Fabrics& Film Association, Inc. (216)241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com �� CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937)222-2462 CISCA Ceilings& Interior Systems Construction Association (630)584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423)892-0137 , www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866)465-2523 www.coolroofs.org (510)485-7175 CPA Composite Panel Association (301)670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800)510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202)462-9607 CRI Carpet& Rug Institute (The) (800)882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706)278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847)517-1200 www.crsi.org REFERENCES 01420-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � f=, � t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � �i CSA Canadian Standards Association (800)463-6727 � � (416)747-4000 � � i CSA CSA international (866)797-4272 k ; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416)747-4000 � ; www.csa-international.org ; 4 � � � CSI Cast Stone Institute � (717)272-3744 � { www.caststone.org z: 2 � � CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800)689-2900 `� = www.csinet.org (703)684-0300 �. � u i � CSSB Cedar Shake &Shingle Bureau (604)820-7700 � r www.cedarbureau.org � fr ; CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281)583-4087 � ` (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) ; � � www.cti.org � � DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703)222-2010 � } www.dhi.org i '= i � EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703)907-7500 � 3 vwvw.eia.org � $ � � EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800)294-3462 � � www.eima.com (770)968-7945 � � � � � ; EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703)295-5000 3 ; www.ejdc.org � � z • � EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914)332-0040 � ' www.ejma.org €' � � ESD ESD Association (315)339-6937 � k www.esda.org � � FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00 � � (The Intemational Basketball Federation) � ; www.fiba.com . � � i FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35 � -` (The Intemational Volleyball Federation) � www.fivb.ch � � FM Approvals FM Approvals (781)762-4300 � ,:� www.fmglobal.com * ° > ` FM Global FM Global (401)275-3000 x � (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) � www.fmglobal.com � � �; ,� REFERENCES 01420-6 � � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � � � " �' � l; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 FMRC Factory Mutual Research (Now FM Global) FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal &Air Conditioning (407)671-3772 Contractors Association, Inc. www.floridaroof.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610)971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202)289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785)271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GRI (Now GSI) GS Green Seal (202)872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610)522-8440 vwvw.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888)786-7744 www.pumps.org (973)267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908)464-8200 � www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Pa�t of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood &Veneer Association (703)435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P.White Laboratory, Inc. (410)838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAS Intemational Approval Services (Now CSA Intemational) IBF International Badminton Federation (6-03)9283- 7155 www.internationalbadminton.org ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770)830-0369 www.icea.net � REFERENCES 01420-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO o- � � � ,. �� FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 i � � ICRI Internationai Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847)827-0830 ` � www.icri.org ' � � r F E � IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 � � www.iec.ch � i IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212)419-7900 :' � www.ieee.org q � IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212)248-5000 � � . � www.iesna.org � � � � � IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847)255-1561 ` www.iest.org � k � '� IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315)646-2234 � s� � vwvw.igcc.org � � � i IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613)233-1510 � www.igmaonline.org � � ILI Indiana.Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812)275-4426 � www.iliai.com E '; �; � � � � ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 E � www.iso.ch � � ; Available from ANSI (202)293-8020 ; � www.ansi.org � ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association • (877)464-7732 � www.issfa.net (702)567-8150 � � ; ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (972)238-5591 F www.intertek.com t � ;� ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 � � www.itu.inUhome � ';, a ? KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703)264-1690 � .4 ,� www.kcma.org ` � & LMA Laminating Materials Association ; (Now part of CPA) � � � LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800)488-6864 '! www.lightning.org � ;� � MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216)241-7333 � � www.mbma.com , �. � , ° �- `� REFERENCES 01420-8 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � �: � � a i� 4 s �. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847)480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312)644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800)345-1815 www.mhia.org (704)676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440)250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888)674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703)281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312)332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800)797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281)228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202)737-2926 www.nadca.com NAGWS �National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800)213-7193, ext. 453 www.aa hperd.org/nagws/ NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703)684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800)557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association(The) (317)917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703)713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262)248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable&Telecommunications Association (202)775-3550 REFERENCES 01420-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � r � s ; ;:i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � www.ncta.com � NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301)977-3698 � www.nebb.org � ' NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301)657-3110 www.necanet.org � NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association (207)829-6901 � www.nelma.org ! NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703)841-3200 ' ,. ' www.nema.org � NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888)300-6382 � ; www.netaworld.org (303)697-8441 i � NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317)972-6900 = ' www.nfhs.org i i z ; NFPA NFPA (800)344-3555 � � ' (National Fire Protection Association) (617)770-3000 � � www.nfpa.org .. t k ! NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301)589-1776 � � � F ; www.nfrc.org � -� i ` � NGA National Glass Association (866)342-5642 ° i www.glass.org (703)442-4890 ;' s I � NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800)933-0318 ` � www.natlhardwood.org (901)377-1818 • � � NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604)524-2393 Y P www.nlga.org { � Y' � NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901)526-5016 k (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers k � Association) � j www.nofma.com �: i ,:, � NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800)323-9545 � � www.nrca.net (847)299-9070 �' P �. � NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888)846-7622 � � www.nrmca.org (301)587-1400 = � ; NSF NSF International (800)673-6275 � � (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734)769-8010 :' � www.nsf.org ` � � � NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800)342-1415 � 3 � �; � REFERENCES 01420-10 i' ' OZ Architecture Boulder,CO > i � � f � ;: � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 www.nssga.org 703 525-8788 � ) NTMA National Terrauo& Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800)323-9736 www.ntma.com (540)751-0930 NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Now ITS) PCI PrecasUPrestressed Concrete Institute (312)786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting 8 Decorating Contractors of America (800)332-7322 www.pdca.com (314)514-7322 PDI Plumbing 8 Drainage Institute (800)589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978)557-0720 ��PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217)333-3929 �;� http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800)395-2522 (Formerly: ACLA-Associated Landscape Contractors of (703)736-9666 America) www.landca renetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602)870-7540 � www.post-tensioning.org � RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301)340-8580 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888)225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415)382-0662 SAE SAE International (877)606-7323 www.sae.org (724)776-4841 SDI Steel Deck Institute (847)458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440)899-0010 www.steeldoor.org REFERENCES 01420-11 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � i ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET „ VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 �: � � � SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516)294-5424 � ; www.sefalabs.com � i � � SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil � Engineers � ; (See ASCE) § � � � SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315)646-2234 � � u www.sgcc.org � � � e SIA Security Industry Association (703)683-2075 � � www.siaonline.org � � € SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association � (Now IGMA) � � � � SJI Steel Joist Institute (843)626-1995 � � www.steeljoist.org � $ � `s SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561)533-0991 � i www.smacentral.org � � r: � SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703)803-2980 € .� National Association � ' www.smacna.org � � � SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914)761-1100 � 3 � www.smpte.org � ° SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800)523-6154 � � (Formerly: SPI/SPFD-The Society of the Plastics � � Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) ¢ � www.sprayfoam.org � � � SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850)434-2611 � > � www.spib.org � � � '� SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781)647-7026 � � www.spri.org # f ',� SSINA Specia�ty Steel Industry of North America (800)982-0355 � � www.ssina.com (202)342-8630 = ; � '� SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877)281-7772 ;. � www.sspc.org (412)281-2331 � � �: � STI Steel Tank Institute (847)438-8265 �� www.steeltank.com � -� F � SW I Steel W indow Institute (216)241-7333 � � www.steelwindows.com � ; `� � � REFERENCES 01420- 12 � s � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO �, :� � � `� � � � k FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, 8� Restoration Institute (816)472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864)646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703)907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303)939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703)683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800)405-8873 www.turFgrasssod.org (847)649-5555 TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312)670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877)854-3577 www.ul.com �� (847)272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972)243-3902 � www.uni-bell.org USAV USA Volleyball (888)786-5539 www.usavolleyball.org (719)228-6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202)828-7422 www.usgbc.org � USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800)938-7488 www.usitt.org (315)463-6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800)424-2869 www.wastec.org (202)244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800)283-1486 www.wclib.org (503)639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association I� (Now WCSC) WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800)506-4636 (Formerly: WCMA-Window Covering Manufacturers (212)297-2109 Association) www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window& Door Manufacturers Association (800)223-2301 REFERENCES 01420- 13 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i � � � € f E FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET �� VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 �� a (Formerly: NWWDA- National Wood Window and Door (847)299-5200 � Association) � € www.wdma.com � � � � WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC-Woodwork Institute (916)372-9943 � � of Califomia) � = www.wicnet.org � A � ; WIC Woodwork Institute of Califomia = � (Now W I) � � � � WMMPA Wood Moulding 8� Millwork Producers Association (800)550-7889 � � www.wmmpa.com (530)661-9591 � WSRCA Westem States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 � � www.wsrca.com (650)570-5441 � � � �� WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503)224-3930 � ;� www.wwpa.org � z � C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other � � Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following < = list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to � a be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. � ''>; � � BOCA BOCA International, Inc. f � (See ICC) � � 3 � � IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909)472- �. � 4100 � � www.iapmo.org � � � � ICBO International Conference of Building Officials = a (See ICC) # � � ; �: � ICBO ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. f � ES F � (See ICGES) � � ICC International Code Council (888)422- ` ' 7233 � � www.iccsafe.org (703)931- � ; 4533 � :� � ICGES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800)423- � � 6587 = � '� www.icc-es.org (562)699- � : � 0543 � � x � SBCCI Southem Building Code Congress Intemational, Inc. � '` (See ICC) '� � � e 1 : � € REFERENCES 01420- 14 �' `� OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � s p � ,g � ;} t ( t � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC) D. Federal Govemment Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800)638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301)504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202)482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215)697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202)586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202)272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866)835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888)225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888)463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800)488-3111 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510)486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHR National Cooperative Highway Research Program P (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301)975-6478 www.nist.gov REFERENCES 01420- 15 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � I! � � i � ' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET �!; j VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 �� , � i � ; OSHA Occupational Safery 8� Health Administration (800)321-6742 � E ; www.osha.gov (202)693-1999 � j � i PBS Public Building Service ` � (See GSA) ` � PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202)690-7694 £ � vwvw.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs x � � RUS Rural Utilities Service (202)720-9540 � � (See USDA) I � � SD State Department (202)647-4000 � www.state.gov � � � t � TRB Transportation Research Board (202)334-2934 ; � http://gulliver.trb.org � � ; � USDA Department of Agriculture (202)720-2791 � � www.usda.gov ?: � � � ; USPS Postal Service (202)268-2000 � � www.usps.com � a E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications � � or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and � � � regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to � � change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract � � Documents. � � � ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) . (800)872- �' � . 2253 3 � Architectural Barriers Act(ABA) (202)272- g � 0080 � � Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities � � Available from Access Board � � www.access-board.gov � e � � � CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866)512- � F 1800 � � Available from Government Printing Office (202)512- � � 1800 � ; www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html � � k. � DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215)697- $ � 2664 � � Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point � � http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil ` € � � DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus � � (See FS) � � � � � � ; � � � REFERENCES 01420- 16 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � � ; � � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215)697- 2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202)619- 8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202)289- 7800 www.wbdg.org/ccb FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215)697- 2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil � UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800)872- 2253 Available from Access Board (202)272- 0080 www.access-boa rd.gov F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CBH State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home (800)952- F Furnishings and Thermal Insulation 5210 www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti (916)574- 2041 CCR Califomia Code of Regulations (916)323- 6815 www.calregs.com REFERENCES 01420- 17 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO I _ � , i i E FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ` � 's € i � , ; CPU California Public Utilities Commission (415)703- � ` C 2782 : � www.cpuc.ca.gov � � i � � TFS Texas Forest Service (979)458- � � � �� 6650 � � Forest Resource Development � y http://txforestservice.tamu.edu � � f � � � � � PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) � � s � z � rt - � ; � PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) � � s: � , 3 4 ENG OF SECTION 01420 t � �. 3 � � ; � # f t3 � �Y ti tp L '$ T � � � � � f ! � � :t � `K p- � £ � : 3 '� ( . 3 3 � z E s s' � � � � E � $ 3 �. i � € :� � } i � 8t 5 kj { S ;{ ( 'f E � � ' e � � s E ;� �- w �€ � � � �! � REFERENCES 01420-18 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � ,: � :=. � � � � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 01500 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect,testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water senrice use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Senrice: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � 'i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET �' �' VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 ; I � � � � ! 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE � � � A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of � I authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to the following: R i � � � � 1. Building Code requirements. � ; 2. Health and safety regulations. � E 3. Utility company regulations. � a 4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules. x � 5. Environmental protection regulations. � � 6. City ordinances and regulations. � t � B. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for � � temporary electric service. Install senrice to comply with NFPA 70. � # _ � C. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each � � temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. �: a � i � ' 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ; � A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and � � termination of each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the E � Owner;�change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. � � �` � B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. � � � Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the � � Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take � � necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary � � conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. � � � C. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume � � � responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection�of each permanent service during � � its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously � '� assigned responsibilities. � � � � � ,, � � PART 2 - PRODUCTS i � � � B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric t ;� fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line � ` posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top rails. ; � � ' 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES � � � � A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with senriceable finishes, temperature � `' controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. � � � B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction � � personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: � � a � a ; � � TEMPORARY FACIUTIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � �:-Ty fi � ;•5 � ti � t. :� � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 TEMPORARY STORAGE AND STAGING AREAS A. Do not endanger public, workers, or adjoining property by illegal, improper, or otherwise unacceptable storage and placement of equipment and materials for the duration of Project. B. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction regarding: temporary use of streets or public property for storage or handling of materials; use and storage of equipment required for construction or demolition; and protection provided to the public. C. Do not store or place construction materials and equipment: where they obstruct access to fire hydrants, standpipes, fire or police alarm boxes, catch basins or manholes;within 20 FT of a street intersection; where they interFere with existing storm water conveyances; or where they interfere with normal operations of traffic controls. 2.4 EQU�PMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets.. Provide receptacle outlets equipped .with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment. C. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio. D. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent or fluorescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. E. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO . � � � r f C FIRST CHAIR PERMiT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 i' d f ' PART 3-EXECUTION � � � r ( 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL ' A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference �' 5 with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the f E Work. ( B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until �`' ; facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent �' � facilities. ' � � � ' � 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION �' � � � � A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. > � �. � 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be � interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. _ � S � B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. � 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having � " jurisdiction. � � 3 " C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate � � a � for construction. � � £ � :� E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of � � construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, 4 � location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. � ;� , � ' F. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying ;' � of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low � ; temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on � completed installations or elements being installed. � t ' G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction � � activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed � � construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a � � harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation i � requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. ; ; �` � I. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient � size,capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. F '_ �: ; 1. Install electric power service overhead , unless otherwise indicated. � .� , � � F J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination ; ,.� for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. � # � � � ` `= TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-4 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � .� � `� g R -� }. �, FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Install and o erate tem ora li htin that fulfills securi and rotection re uirement P P rY 9 9 tY P q S without operating entire system. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or -. adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. G. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs as indicated on Drawings. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. . I. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air,waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified in Division 2 Section "Erosion and Sedimentation Control." TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO _ � k FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ;' VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � D. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and G around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater ; from heavy rains. ' E. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Division 2 Sections. �: �; G. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction ; and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and � control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations ; lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. H. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin , furnish and install site � � enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site s except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations . J. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and `` lighting. = L. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection ofi construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. � 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, � insulate temporary enclosures. N. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types '` needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with b NFPA 241. �; � r 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. i 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for � personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post � warnings and information. f 4. Provide fire extinguishers, temporary standpipes and hoses, and other devices for fire t � protection as required by insurance requirements and authorities having jurisdiction. � Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with ` - suitable nozzles. E 3.5 OPERATION,TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL ` � A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and :: abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. � G ; . ; TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-6 # OZ Architecture Boulder,CO ; � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACIUTIES AND CONTROLS 01500-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO z � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � ; s k � # f €. $. � � ; — Y 3 i ! � TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-8 ;� OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; � � �: � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 01600-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 3. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.2 DEFINITIONS �� A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,""equipment,""system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project • or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words"basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1.3 SUBMITTALS � A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names � for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractors Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. ' b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 4. Completed List: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 `� copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. � Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided at end of this Section. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,as applicable: � a t a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. ; = b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to a other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. <` t c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples,where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. � g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting h test results for compliance with requirements indicated. � PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � ,' � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. I. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. ArchitecYs Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect does not make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. �� C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. ArchitecYs Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product � request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within [15] days of receipt of request, or [7] days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source. 1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not, or cannot, pro- duce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, con- sult with the Architect to determine the most important product qualities before pro- ceeding. Qualities may include attributes such as visual appearance, strength, dura- bility, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAiR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 sources producing products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possi- � ble. � B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting befinreen two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING � A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: � 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of r units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent t condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. � : 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of `- installation and concealment E: 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and n.in concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. � � 3 ; PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-4 ' OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. . 3. Owner reserves the right to limit se(ection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term"match sample,"sample to be matched is ArchitecYs. 6. Descriptive, perFormance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics"of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide � a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products"Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. s 8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, : dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply � with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. � � 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches ArchitecYs .. sample. ArchitecYs decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product � Substitutions"Article for proposal of product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected � from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. . � a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of ? colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattem, � density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and � premium items. ': 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS i A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. € B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractors request for substitution when one or more � of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If one or more of � the conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: � PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-6 �' OZ Architecture Boulder, CO E � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. � 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by authorities having jurisdiction, and the requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and the requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and the requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents, and the requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 11. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. ' 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will retum requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. I 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-7 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � [: PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) � � � � j .. � � � ' ; � t � � r f €. � k � PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-8 ; OZ Architecture Boulder, CO # � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST TO: PROJECT: SPECIFIED ITEM: Section Page Paragraph Description The undersigned requests consideration of the following: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: REASON FOR REQUESTING SUBSTITUTION: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request;applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a detailed description of changes to the Contract Documents which the proposed substitution wili require for its proper installation. The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs,unless modified by attachments,are correct: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. The undersigned further states that the function,appearance,and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted by: Signature For Use by the design consultant Firm [ ]Accepted [ ]Accepted as noted Address [ ]Not Accepted [ )Received too late BY — Date Date Telephone Remarks Attachments: PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-9 O rc itecture Boulder, CO � � PROJECT NAME PACKAGE DESCRIPTION LOCATION � DATE � END OF SECTION 01600 r � � � f: � �. S � r PRODUCT REGIUIREMENTS 01600- 10 '' _ OOZ Architecture Boulder, CO '' � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements goveming execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures"for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with � existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. � 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems ; ` are to be installed. > ;: ; 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. _ � 3.2 PREPARATION s B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field �' measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need � for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for �� changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation." � 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on � Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. � B. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted sunreying practices. ; , 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of f construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. � 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. � 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. '� 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard " ' established by authorities having jurisdiction. � � C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, ; fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. t fi i � '3 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � a � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer sunrey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from finro or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanEnt benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of finro permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. E. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor or professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site comer to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 5 � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. � 2. Where space is �imited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. { 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. _ � 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended � ceiling, unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacture►'s written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. � E Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. ; F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each `` component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. � '. � 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at = heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. '` 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Fumish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. � Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. + H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not �E indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. ' ; I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not t considered hazardous. k 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate ;; progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. f ; 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. � ; 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the � temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. ; EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-4 ` OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � > FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. Dunng handlmg and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operabiliry without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION � E�� F A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without 3 damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. " B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. r! � 3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. Y e C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. ; � t END OF SECTION 01700 i ;; ; � ;: � 4' j f E _ � 4 f EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-6 f OZ Architecture Boulder,CO j z FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 01731 -CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.2 DEFINITtOPJS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capaciry or load-deflection ratio. C. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.[ Operating elements include the following:] 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. D. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elemenis include the following: 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 4. Equipment supports. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO _ � F FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. � 6. Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems. E. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the � building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and ` � patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. � ; t 1.5 WARRANTY ¢ A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. ; PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when � � installed,will match the visual and functional perFormance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION � 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been � corrected. ; 3.2 PREPARATION Y A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. � r CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -2 :; OZ Architecture Boulder, CO t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ! �. s: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 Y floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve � uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken � surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even- plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. ; D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. � } END OF SECTION 01731 j � � f � t. � i: � i S i: z 9 � � e CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -4 £ OZ Architecture Boulder, CO G �: � t; � � � 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 01770 -CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning of Project site. 4. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 5. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 7. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit tesUadjusUbalance records. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-1 . rc itecture Boulder,CO f FIRST CH,41R PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, � f construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. _ 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Closeout Procedures: The following project closeout procedure defines responsibilities of the Contractor, Owner and Architect in closing out the Project: i 1. Step 1: The Contractor advises the Architect in writing that he/she has reached } "Substantial Completion" and provides a list of items to be completed or corrected. Closeout may be conducted by areas or portions of the Work if requested by the ; Owner. 2. Step 2: The Architect inspects the Work to determine if it is substantially complete and issues Certificate of Substantial Completion and a "Punch List° of items to be ? _ completed or corrected. 3. Step 3: The Contractor completes and/or corrects all punch list items and notifies the Architect, in writing, that the Work is ready for final inspection. At this time, final application for payment is submitted. a. Submit a certified copy of the ArchitecYs�final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, endorsed and dated by the Architect. The certified f copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise � resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Architect. b. Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment payment, complete the following: F 1) Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting € documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance . ;: certificates for products and completed operations where required. ;' 2) 2) Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional =: changes to the Contract Sum. `` c. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. d. Submit consent of surety to final payment. e. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement. f. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Step 4: The Architect makes final inspection. When the Work is found to be acceptable under the Contract Documents, and contract is fully perFormed, the Architect will issue final Certificate for Payment. 5. Additional inspection to the above MAY necessitate back charges to the Contractor ` for the ArchitecYs time. � �: CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ¢ � x FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. �� 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits � of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. • 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � ,. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of � designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during � a construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. ; C. Organize warranry documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, ; thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1l2-by-11- inch paper. � 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or instatlation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and ' telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title �'- � "WARRANTtES," Project name, and name of Contractor. � D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. ; PART2-PRODUCTS �. "s 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or � = fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use clearnng agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. � � � PART 3-EXECUTION = , 3.1 FINAL CLEANING � A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to � comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean 4 each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction � activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, � litter, and other foreign substances. � `; b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and z other foreign deposits. � : f' CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � f. L f i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-0bscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass,taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. I. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of inechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. ' p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-0ut bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not bum waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO £ FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 END OF SECTION 01770 � k �: ; � s Y t ,t S � � � S" :� F i T ' � ; i £ s` t � S' E # ; � t: � � CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-6 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO r �: � s ; � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � SECTION 01781 -PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for general closeout procedures. 3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. 1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be � difficult to identify or measure and record later. ; b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: F { a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. r � f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. I. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. k � 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, � show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. ° 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish ; between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. . 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. . ; . 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, altemate numbers, Change Order ; numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. � � E. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT `_ RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. � f 4 � 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into ; manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include 4 ';; identification on cover sheets. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. G b. Date. � c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." � d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. � � � ; � E � PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 -2 ; _' OZ Architecture Boulder, CO j" r: � � F � } � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment fumished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that �� cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for ArchitecYs reference during normal working hours. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 END OF SECTION 01781 � i ; ; r f fi s, t d 's, } � 3 ? , i. i' � I 3 (: � L: �[ t. � S. ` PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 -4 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � ; �: � f k FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 01782 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes and systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will retum one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. i 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of ArchitecYs comments. OPERATION AND MAINTENAN E DATA C - 17 2 1 0 8 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.4 COORDINATION � A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY � � A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. ` 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. � B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. r C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. ` For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and � maintenance manual. � ; E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance f manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation ' used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according �' `= to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for ; Building Systems." � {� � 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL ` � M A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: # 1. Title page. r 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following k information: � 1. Subject matter included in manual. e � 2. Name and address of Project. .} 3. Name and address of Owner. ? 4. Date of submittal. � %; 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. ; � - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. � 3. • Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � s FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET § ; VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � � B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include � instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and :i component: 1. Fire. ; 2. Flood. : 3. Gas leak. � 4. Water leak. � 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. � �� 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating r' personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. ` # D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. ' � 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS ,,,� � ,. 4 A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. � _ 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. E� 5. Operating logs. _ 6. Wiring diagrams. � 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. 9` B. Descriptions: Include the following: ti ' 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. � 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. ' 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. PerFormance curves. i 8. Engineering data and tests. � � ; OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � i' � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 9. Complete nomenciature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL �. A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross- reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattem, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. I 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO t � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ; F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances �� r and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. ' i ; 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, � include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranry and bond information, as described below. � ; ` B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in � manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For � ; each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in g Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation ' including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: � 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. � - 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including # disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. " 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. � � 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. t � � „ D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential ; maintenance procedures: � 4' ` 1. Test and inspection instructions. '' 2. Troubleshooting guide. °' � 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. _ 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. � 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. z E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of � required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine � maintenance and service with standard time allotment. � 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, � quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording ; maintenance. � � � F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with ;; parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and ' local sources of maintenance materials and related services. ` '� � � � � OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 -6 ; OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � 4 f f � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include co ies of maintenance a reements with name and P 9 telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validiry of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Com I with re uirements of newl re ared Record Drawin s in Division 1 Section PY 4 Y P P 9 "Project Record Documents." OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 4 �' r t � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for schedule for submitting operation � ;. and maintenance documentation. � i t'' S ' END OF SECTION 01782 � � � � z 4 S � s ,F F ` G } F- � 6 4 A5 £ � � � i �, � i (`. f � j S � .� �: � �. t 's { � 4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-8 � ; OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � ; t �: � ` � .l FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 02220-SITE DEMOLITION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Removal and satisfactory disposal of buildings, foundations, fences, signs, structures, pavements, traffic control devices, utilities, and other obstructions not designated or permitted to remain. B. Related Work: 1. Earthwork: Section 02300 3. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 02370 1.02 PERMITS A. Road Cut B. Stormwater Discharge Permit (CDPHE) 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Protection: Protect alt vegetation, utilities, structures, and other facilities to remain, from damage in manner acceptable to Engineer. Maintain designated temporary roadways, walkways, and detours. PART2 PRODUCTS None PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PAVEMENTS, CURBS, GUTTER, FLATWORK A. Remove all pavements, curbs, gutter, and flatwork not designated to remain. Where existing construction is to be partially removed, saw edges to remain in place on straight line with vertical face. 3.02 BRIDGES, SEWERS, CULVERTS, DRAINAGE STRUCTURES A. Do not remove structures in use until arrangements have been made to accommodate traffic. B. For structures removed down to natural stream bottom, remove those parts outside stream to 1' below ground. Remove all portions within limits of new construction as necessary to accommodate new work. C. Maintain satisfactory traffic bypass at all times. SITE DEMOLITION 02220-1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � E � ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 F �� 3.03 STRUCTURES �: t ` Remove structures within project limits or as shown on drawings. Protect portions to r remain from damage. Damage to be repaired at Contractor's expense. ` 3.04 UTILITIES �� Remove designated utility lines within project limits, properly capping or plugging existing � < lines to remain. � 3.05 DISPOSAL `" � r ' Remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. � �� 3.06 RESTORATION � F after removal of obstruction, fill and compact to finish gr�:,de in accordance with these = specifications. _' � � � END OF SECTION 02220 .3 i 5' I { i � � t. �- 1 i � . ¢ } t {, c { � $ � s � 6 p �' i � i � � SITE DEMOLITION 02220-2 � Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � ; � � � r q a FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 02300- EARTHWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation and borrow pits, removing and satisfactorily disposing of all materials taken from within work limits, dust control, including excavation for ditches and channels, inlet and outlet ditches for culverts and structures, all necessary shaping and sloping for the construction, preparation, processing soil to proper moisture content, and completion of all backfill,embankments,subgrade,shoulders,slopes and intersections,to required alignment, grade, and typical cross section shown on drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Site Demolition: Section 02220 2. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 02370 C. Definitions: 1. Suitable Material: Earth fill material consisting of on-site or similar non-organic sands, gravels, clays, silts and mixtures thereof with maximum size of 6". Bedrock that breaks down to specified soil types and sizes during excavation, hauling,and placement may be considered as suitable material. Rock fill material which consists predominantly of cobbles or boulder-sized pieces of blasted or broken rock with maximum size of 18". 2. Unsuitable Material: Any material containing vegetable or organic matter, muck, peat, excessive expansive materials, organic silt,topsoil,frozen materials,trees, stumps,certain manmade deposits,or industrial waste, sludge or landfill,or other undesirable materials. 3. Unclassified Excavation: Any and all materials, including surface boulders, � encountered during construction. Rock formations that can be removed by ripping with D-9 tractor in good repair with single tooth hydraulic ripper are considered as unclassified excavation. 4. Rock Excavation: Rock formations which cannot be excavated without blasting. Includes removal and disposal of all rock. 5. Backfill and Embankment: Embankments, including preparation of area upon which they are to be placed, dikes within or outside right-of-way. Placing and compacting approved material within areas where unsuitable materials have been removed. Placing and compacting of material in holes, pits and other depressions to lines and grades shown on drawings. Use only suitabte materials in construction of embankments and backfills. 6. Borrow: Backfill or embankment material which must be acquired from designated borrow areas to make up deficiencies which cannot be completed from excavation within work limits. Borrow material must be agreed to by Engineer. 7. Proof Rolling: Applying test loads over subgrade surface by means of heavy I pneumatic-tired roller of specified design, to locate weak areas in subgrade. 1.02 PERMITS A. Road Cut � B. Stormwater Discharge Permit (CDPHE) EARTHWORK 02300-1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO i �: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � PART2 PRODUCTS - 2.01 FILL AND EMBANKMENT MATERIAL � Any suitable material or borrow as defined above. Free-running water shall be drained from - materials before placement. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION WATER } Acceptable water shall be provided at Contractor's expense. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION :; Unclassified Excavation: All excess or unsuitable excavated materials, including rock and boulders, that cannot be used in backfill and embankments, shall be placed in designated disposal areas or disposed of off site. Where shown on drawings or considered necessary, construct intercepting ditches above top of cut slopes and carry to outlets near ends of cuts. To ¢ blend intersection of cut slopes with slope of adjacent natural ground surfaces in uniform manner, shape tops of all cut slopes, except those in solid rock,for flattening and rounding in accordance k with details shown on drawings. Treat earth overburden above solid rock cuts in same manner as earth cut. Engineer reserves the right to change cut slopes during progress of excavation. Scale all exposed rippable rock cuts of loose, potentially falling rock at Contractor's expense. f ¥ 3.02 PROOF ROLLING � � � � Proof rolling will be required to determine whether certain areas of subgrade meet compaction � and/or stable requirements. Proof roll designated areas with heavy rubber-tired roller approved by ` Engineer. Areas found to be weak or fail the test shall be repaired in accordance with recommendations by the Engineer. . � 3.03 SUBGRADE PREPARATION ; Adjust completed subgrade from slope or grade stakes to assure surface width conforms to rypical section, dimensions, lines, and grades on drawings. Compact subgrade in accordance with compaction requirements. 3.04 EMBANKMENT AND FILL CONSTRUCTION � A. Place earth fill materials for backfill or embankment in thin horizontal layers near optimum moisture content and compact as specified before next layer is placed. Use effective spreading equipment on each lift to obtain uniform thickness prior to compacting. As compaction of each layer progresses,continuously level and manipulate to assure uniform s density. Add or remove water as necessary to obtain uniform maximum density. Place embankment in uniform layers not greater than 8"which have been demonstrated to meet compaction standards. Occasional cobble and boulder-sized pieces of excavated rocks �: with sizes from 6"to 18", may be placed in earth fill if agreed to by Engineer. Space large ` rocks so compaction of earth fill will meet compaction requirements. � � < B. When embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or when new � embankment is to be compacted against existing embankments,or when embankment is ° ; built one-half width at a time, slopes which are steeper than 4:1 measured longitudinally ,,� $ EARTH WOR K 02300-2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO ' �` � s � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 or at right angles to roadway shall be continuously benched over as work is brought up in layers. Benching shall be well keyed into existing slopes a minimum of 8' wide. Begin each horizontal bench at intersection of original ground and sides of previous benches. Material benched shall be excavated and recompacted along with new embankment material at Contractor's expense. C. Rock fill embankment material consists predominantly of rock 6"to 18"in diameter placed in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer provided material is carefully placed, large stones well distributed, and voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer with suitable equipment, distributing soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. Embankments consisting predominantly of rock larger than 6"in greatest dimension,shall not be constructed above an elevation 2'below finished subgrade. Balance of embankment shall be composed of suitable material smoothed and placed in layers not exceeding 8"in loose thickness and compacted as specified. D. Remove all sod and vegetable matter from surface upon which embankment is to be placed. Completely break up cleared surface by plowing, scarifying, or stepping a minimum of 10"to insure a bond between embankment and original ground. Recompact to specifications. E. Frozen materials shall not be used in construction of embankments. F. During construction maintain area in such condition that it will be well-drained at all times. G. At the end of every construction day all fill areas must be flat rolled to provide proper drainage. 3.05 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. 3.06 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A. Thoroughly scarify surface upon which embankment is to be placed to depth of 10", moisture condition and compact per these specifications. B. Compact scarified materials and embankments and moisture control as follows: Soils that classify as GP,GW, GM,GC,SP, SW,SM or SC in accordance with the USCS classification system (granular materials)should be compacted to 95 or more percent of the maximum dry density at moisture contents within 2 percent of optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557,the"modified Proctor." Soils that classify as ML, MH, CL or CH should be compacted to 95 percent of the maximum density at moisture contents from 1 percent to 3 percent above the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D698, the "standard Proctor." Fill placed directly under a structure, at anv de�th, should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum drv densitv at moisture contents within 2 qercent of the optimum based on ASTM D1557, if aranular,or to at least 100 qercent of the maximum densitv at moisture contents from 1 percent to 3 qercent above the oqtimum moisture content based on ASTM D698, if finer qrained. I EARTHWORK 02300-3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO € � i � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � C. Where Engineer agrees to rock fill material embankments constructed without moisture � �° and density control, place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension not exceeding 18". Apply water as necessary to facilitate compaction. Route construction equipment, compactors, or both, uniformly over each lift prior to placing additional lifts. Apply sufficient compactive effort to each lift to achieve uniform, well-compacted rock filL t Distribute rocks throughout layer,spaced far enough apart to atlow compaction equipment to pass between and permit cross rolling. Place, move and compact embankment materials, and apply water to facilitate compaction and prevent voids in embankment. Number of passes required will depend on available compaction equipment to achieve � compactive effort agreed to by Engineer. 3.08 DUST CONTROL � Contractor shall take appropriate measures to minimize adverse impacts caused by dust by � � watering exposed surfaces and haul roads and by implementing other measures. � i � END OF SECTION 02300 � � � i ; i � � I € � h.: � _ # "} z � � > EARTH WOR K 02300-4 � Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � � r � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 02370- EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation,grading, and installation and maintenance of riprap,stabilized construction entrances, sediment ponds,filter material,jute netting, straw bale sediment barriers, and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Earthwork: Section 02300 2. Storm Drainage: Section 02630 1.02 SUBMITTALS 2. Test Reports: If requested, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory 1. Gradation and Soundness of Riprap. 2. Gradation of Filter Material. 1.03 PERMITS `'' A. Stormwater Discharge Permit (CDPHE) PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RIPRAP Hard,dense,sound, angular rough fractured stone meeting AASHTO T 85. Excavated shot rock � may be used if agreed to by the Owner's representative and the Engineer. Neither breadth nor thickness of single stone to be less than one-third its length. Nominal Size Min. Volume Min. Weight 9" 0.25 CF 30 Ibs. 12" 0.5 CF 75 Ibs. 18" 1.8 CF 250 Ibs. 24" 4 CF 600 Ibs. Size of stone and total thickness of riprap as shown on drawings. Stone well graded so voids can be filled, and at least 50%of mass equal to or larger than size called for on drawings. 2.02 FILTER MATERIAL Aggregate Filter: Conform to following gradation: Sieve Size Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves 3" 100 3/4" 20-90 No. 4 0-20 No. 200 0-3 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02370-1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ; VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � F � 2.03 FILTER FABRIC � Manufactured especially for stability of erosion control construction. Made from polyethylene and ':; polypropylene yarns, in accordance with following: R Weight 4.0 oz/yd ASTM D1910 Thickness 15 mils ASTM D1777 $ Grab Strength 130 Ibs. ASTM D1682 ; Elongation Break 62% ASTM D1682 F � Burst Strength 125 psi ASTM D7742 `� Trapezoid Tear Strength 70 Ib. ASTM 2263 Water Permeability 0.02 cm/se CFMC Water Flow Rate 4.80 gal/min/ft CFMC Equivalent Opening Size 70-100 U.S. Sieve ASTM D422 t 2.04 EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS AND TURF REINFORCEMENT MATS � A. Install Landlok 450 TRM, C2 Fabric or as shown on plans 2.05 EROSION LOGS � Erosion logs shall be curled aspen wood excelsior with a consistent width of fibers evenly distributed throughout the log. The casing shatl be seamless, photodegradable tube netting and shall have minimum dimensions as shown below, based on the diameter of the log called for in the plans. The curled aspen wood excelsior shall be fungus free, resin free and shall be free of growth or germination inhibiting substances. � E Nominal Dimensions of Erosion Logs Diameter Length Weight (min.) Stake Dimensions { 8 inch 7-10 feet 1.6 Ibs/ft 1.5 by 1.5 by 20 inches 12 inch 7-10 feet 2.5 Ibs/ft 1.5 by 1.5 by 24 inches 18 inch 7-10 feet 4 Ibs/ft 1.5 by 1.5 by 30 inches a 2.06 SILT FENCE , A. Silt Fence Fabric: The fabric shall meet the following specifications: Fabric Properties Minimum Acceptable Value Test Method Grab Tensile Strength (Ibs) 90 ASTM D1682 Elongation at Failure (%) 50 ASTM D1682 Mullen Burst Strength (PSI) 190 ASTM D3786 Puncture Strength (Ibs) 40 ASTM D751 (modified) Slurry Flow Rate (gal/min/sf) 0.3 Equivalent Opening Size 40-80 US Std Sieve CW-02215 €; Ultraviolet Radiation Stability % 90 ASTM-G-26 t } B. Fence Posts (for fabricated units): The length shall be a minimum of 36 inches long. > Wood posts will be of sound quality hardwood with a minimum cross sectional area of 3.0 square inches. Steel posts will be standard T and U section weighing not less than 1.00 �- pound per linear foot. � � } � EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02370-2 � '; Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � `� � � <a € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 C. Wire Fence (for fabricated units): Wire fencing shall be a minimum 14-1/4 gage with a maximum 6" mesh opening, or as approved. D. Prefabricated Units: Envirofence or approved equal may be used in lieu of the above method providing the unit is installed per manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FILTER FABRIC Place fabric over shaped surface loosely where,when large stones are placed,they will not cause stretching of fabric beyond elastic limits. Overlap joining sections 2'at edges. Secure overlapped edges to subgrade with cinch pins. If riprap is dropped, place aggregate bedding 2"thick over fabric. Place riprap in a manner that fabric will not be damaged by stretching, punching, or ripping. 3A2 RIPRAP A. Angular reasonably well-graded from smallest to maximum size specified. Stones smaller than 10%of smallest size not permitted. Control gradation of riprap by visual inspection to assure thickness of riprap conforms with drawings. B. Hand Placed: Rectangular to facilitate butt placement. Fill openings with loose, well- graded road aggregate base material. 3.03 FILTER MATERIAL Wet subgrade, reasonably shape, and compact prior to placing filter material. Filter material may be backdragged with loader bucket to a reasonably smooth surface for placement to lines and grades of drawings. 3.04 WATER BARS/INTERCEPTOR TRENCHES Construct ditch in accordance with drawings. Flow line of water bar not steeper than 1%. Discharge on existing vegetated slopes alternately to avoid erosion. 3.05 STRAW BALE SEDIMENT BARRIER Use straw bale barriers at storm drain inlets, across minor swales and ditches, and other applications where barrier is of temporary nature. Bind straw bales with nylon or baling wire,not twine. Anchor bales to ground with two posts per bale. 3.06 EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS AND TURF REINFORCEMENT MATS A. Site Preparation 1. Grade and compact area of installation and remove all rocks, clods, vegetation or other obstructions so that the installed blankeUmat will have direct contact with soil surface. 2. Prepare seedbed by loosening 2-3 in (50-75mm) of topsoil above final grade. 3. Incorporate fertilizer into soil. 4. Do not mulch areas where mat is to be placed EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02370-3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � � 4 € ' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 :� ? B. Seeding � � ? 1. Apply seed to the soil surface before installing blankeUmat, or after installation(TRM ; only) for enhanced performance (preferable) 2. When seeding prior to installation,all check slots and other areas disturbed must also � bereseeded. �� { 3. When using a TRM and soil filling, seed TRM and entire disturbed area after r installation, prior to filling mat with soil. � � � C. Installation on Banks and Slopes 1. Extended blanket/mat 2-3 ft(600-900mm)over crest of slope and excavate a 12x6 in � (300x150mm) terminat anchor trench. 2. Anchor blankeUmat in trench on 1 ft (300mm) spacings, backfill and compact soil. � 3. Unroll blankeUmat down slope with small netting on bottom, large netting on top. g 4. Overlap adjacent rolls at least 3 in(75mm), and anchor every 18 in(450mm)minimum = across the overlap. The higher elevation blankeUmat should be placed overthe Iower blankeUmat. � � � 5. Overlap blankeUmat edges approximately 2 in(50mm)and staple according to anchor pattern guide. Make sure that edge overlaps are shingled away from prevailing winds. E 6. Lay blanket/mat loose to maintain direct contact with soil. (Do not pull blankeUmat taut. This may allow bridging of soil surface.) � 7. Secure blankeUmat to ground surface using U-shaped wire staples (preferred) or geotextile pins. �. � 8. Refer to manufacturer's recommendation for appropriate number and pattern of anchors. 9. Place outer edge of blankeUmat in previously excavated longitudinal slots, anchor � _ using prescribed staple pattern, backfill and compact soil. � 10. Anchor, backfill and compact upstream end of blankeUmat in a 12x6 in(300x150mm) � terminal trench. � 11. Secure blanket/mat to ground surface using U-shaped wire staples(preferred) or � geotextile pins. 12. When using a TRM, seed and fill with soil for enhanced performance. 13. When using a TRM with a geotextile attached. Always seed after installing mat,then { fill with soil. � D. Installation in Storm Water Channels � � � 1. Excavate an initial anchor trench 12 in (300mm)deep and 6 in (150mm)wide across � the channel at the lower end of the project area. _' � 2. Construct check slots along the channel in the following manner: Excavate = intermittent check slots 6 in(150mm)deep and 6 in(150mm)wide across the channel ' at 30 ft (9.1 m) intervals. 3. Cut longitudinal channel anchor slots 4 in (100mm)deep and 4 in(100mm)wide along : both sides of the installation to bury edges of blankeUmat. Whenever possible extend ' mat 2-3 ft (600-900 mm) above crest of channel side slopes. ° 4. Beginning at the center if downstream end of the channel, pface the end of the first ` � roll in the anchor trench and secure with fastening devices at 1 ft(300mm)intenrals. � _ Note:blankeUmat will initially be upside down in anchor trench;smaller netting on top. E 5. In same manner, position adjacent rolls in anchor trench. Overlapping the preceding ; roll minimum of 3 in (75mm). ' 6. Again, staple at 1 ft (300mm) intervals, backfill and compact soiL ` ; 7. Unroll blankeUmat over the compacted trench with smaller netting on bottom, large � } netting on top. Stop at next check slot or terminal anchor trench. � � }, EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02370-4 � Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO �: .} ;; ; � a FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 8. Unroll adjacent rolls upstream in order to maintain a minimum 3 in (75mm) overlap. Anchor every 18 in (450mm) minimum across the overlap. 9. Fold and secure blankeUmat rolls snugly into intermittent check slots. Lay blanket/mat in the bottom and fold back against itself. Anchor through both layers of blanket or mat at 1 ft(300mm)intervals then backfill and compact soil. Continue rolling upstream over the compacted slot to the next check slot of terminal anchor trench. 10. Overlap roll ends a minimum of ift(300mm)with upstream blankeUmat on top. Begin all new rolls in a check slot. Anchor overlapped area by placing two rows of anchors, 1 ft (300mm) apart on 1ft (300mm) intervals. E. Soil Filling 1. If specified, soil filling is recommended for optimum performance. 2. After seeding, spread and lightly rake'h-3/a in(12-19mm)of fine topsoil into the TRM and completely fill the voids. Use backside of rake or other flat tool. 3. If equipment must operate on the TRM, make sure it is of the rubber-tired type. No tracked equipment or sharp turns are allowed on the mat. 4. Avoid any traffic over TRM if loose or wet soil conditions exist. 5. Use shovels, rakes or brooms for fine grading and finishing. 6. Smooth soils fill in order to just expose the top netting of matrix. Do not place excessive soil above the mat. 7. Broadcast additional seed and mulch above the soil-filled TRM. 8. Water as necessary to enhance growth. 9. Consult manufacturer's technical representative or local distributor for installation assistance. Particularly if unique conditions apply (i.e. fine sandy soils, infertile environment) 3.07 EROSION LOGS The Contractor shall maintain the erosion logs during construction to prevent sediment from passing over or under the logs or from sediment accumulation greater than two thirds of the original exposed height of each erosion log. Stakes shall be embedded to a minimum depth of 12 inches. At the discretion of the Engineer, a shallower depth may be permitted if rock in encountered. 3.08 CHECK DAMS Install bottom of check dam at least 6" below maximum depth of newly graded channel. Extend to 6" above maximum design water depth. Install materials in accordance with drawings. 3.09 SEDIMENT POND/TRAP A. Construct pond per plans and as directed by Engineer. B. The area under embankment shall be cleared, rubbed and stri ed of an ve etation 9 pp Y 9 and root mat. The pool area shall be cleared. C. The fill material for the embankment shall be free of roots or other woody vegetation as well as over-sized stones, rocks, organic material or other objectionable material. The embankment shall be compacted by traversing with equipment while it is being constructed. Maximum height of embankment shall be 4' measured at centerline of embankment. EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02370-5 Alpine Engineering,Inc. Edwards,CO - � � � i � �: E FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET = i VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 a � � D. All cut and fill slopes shall be 2:1 or flatter. « � � E. Geotextile Class C shall be placed over riser. Fabric shall be embedded at least 6" into r a existing ground at bottom of pond. � ' F. Outlet - An outlet shall include a means of conveying the discharge in a erosion free ? manner to an existing stable channel. Protection against scour at the discharge point £ shall be provided as necessary. '3 � ;Y ' G. Outlet channel must have positive drainage from the trap. � � ; � H. Sediment shall be removed and trap restored to its original dimensions when the � � sediment has accumulated to 'h of the wet storage depth of the trap (900 cf/ac). ; Removed sediment shall be deposited in a suitable area and in such a manner that it will �: not erode. E � = L The structure shall be inspected periodically after each rain and repaired as needed. � � � J. Construction of traps shall be carried out in such a manner that sediment pollution is � � abated. Points of concentrated inflow shall be protected. � � K. The structure shall be dewatered by approved methods, removed and the area stabilized F when the drainage area has been properly stabilized. � � # ; .. � 3.10 SILT FENCE `� � � � �� Install silt fence in accordance with drawings. � f � � END OF SECTION 02370 '� `; �: � , t k' ::� , � ti _, $. :{ � 'r 4 � � � � S z � t � S . �, s [ a j � � EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02370-6 { s Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � xi � � � � x r � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 02510 -WATER DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfill,bedding, and installation of pipe,valves,fittings, fire hydrants,vaults,service lines,curb stops,valve boxes,pressure reducing valves, meters, and all necessary appurtenances. B. Definition: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation; All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force of 35,000 Ibs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. C. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications for water lines as adopted by Eagle River Water and Sanitation District. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for: 1. Valves and Valve Boxes 2. Fittings 3. Fire Hydrants 4. Vaults 5. Senrice Lines 6. Meters � B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. D. Certificates: Submit copies of acceptance from Health Department prior to placing water system in senrice. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. I � WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � � ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET $ VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 ; �� PART 2 PRODUCTS—All materials shall conform to the local water district's specifications. � 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS ` a All ductile iron pipe and fittings used shall meet the latest AWWA Specifications. A. Pipe ; ; � 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, working pressure 350 psi, minimum ` thickness class 52, with cement-mortar lining, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick. Pipe joints, push-on type utilizing rubber ring � gasket, AWWA C111. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Couplings: AWWA C900,working pressure 200 t psi,with push-on joints ASTM D1869. six inch(6"),eight inch(8")and twelve inch (12") PVC water lines shall be Class 200 dimension ratio 14 (DR 14). ;, PVC pipe may be used only in corrosive areas and in the Edwards = ; Metropolitan District provided the static water pressure does not exceed 170 � psi. Installation of PVC pipe in corrosive areas must have prior written �` authorizations from the District. � 3. Steel Pipe: All steel pipe and fittings shall be fabricated in accordance with k AWWA C200 Standard for Steel Water Pipe-eight inches(8")and larger-and " AWWA M-11 Steel Pipe Manual. Working pressure shall be 350 psi. ? All material used shall be acceptable under ASTM A283 Standard � Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates of Structural Quality or ASTM A36 Standard Specifications for Structural SteeL ' For mill-type pipe, all material used shall be acceptable under ASTM � � A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated Welded and Seamless. ; All fittings shall be fabricated from tested pipe and dye checked in k accordance with AWWA C208. � All steel.pipe and fittings shall be prepared, primed, lined, coated, � , painted or wrapped as hereinafter specified: a. Exterior Surfaces—Tape coating system conforming to AWWA C209 and C214. b. Interior Surfaces—Cement-mortar lining conforming to AWWA C205. � 4. HDPE Pipe:With authorization from the engineer and approval bythe District, this pipe may be used as an alternative in those applications where"hot soils" F are determined to be found. 5. Fittings: Fittings shall be made of ductile iron and in accordance with the ; � requirements of AWWA C153, pressure rating 350 psi. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C111. Bolts and nuts shall be low-alloy steel. All fittings shall be cement-mortar lined, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside s coating shall be a minimum of one-mil (1) thick. _ 6. Joint Restraint Devices: Joint restraint devices shall be made of ductile iron. �' Twist-off nuts, sized the same as the tee-head bolts,shall be used to ensure ; proper actuating of restraining devices. Joint restraint devices shall be EBAA � Iron, Inc., Megalug Series 1100 or 1700 or Uni-Flange Corp. Series 1400 for � new pipe restraint and EBAA Iron Sales, Megalug Series 1100SD or 1100HD � 4: or Uni-Flange UFR1300-C or UFR1390-C for existing pipe restraint or � accepted equal. � { # WATER DISTRtBUTION 02510-2 � Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � ;a � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 7. Solid Sleeves: Solid sleeves shall be made of ductile iron, mechanical joint, long body. Sleeves shall have a minimum pressure rating of 350 psi. Where a solid sleeve is used to join two pieces of pipe of the same diameter, a "wedding band" is to be inserted between the two pipes inside of the solid sleeve. 8. Tapping Sleeves: Wet taps shall only be made with the use of a tapping sleeve. The District will allow epoxy-coated Smith Blair 620, Mueller H304, JCM 412 or equivalent. No tapping sleeves will be allowed for any application with a working pressure of 150 psi or higher. For those applications where working pressure exceeds 150 psi,the District will require the use of a tee. B. Fittings Fittings shall be ductile iron and in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C153, pressure rating 350 psi. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C111. Bolts and nuts shall be low-alloy steel. All fittings cement-mortar lined,AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick. 2.02 VALVES The valves shall be the same size as the main. A. Gate Valves Gate valves shall be Mueller A-2360,Waterous AFC-2500 or AVK Series 25 with an epoxy-coated interior and exterior cast iron or ductile iron body, pressure rating 250 psi, bronze-mounted, AWWA C509. Resilient seat (wedge) rubber encapsulated gate, flanged or mechanical joint as required. Valves with ring stem seal, two-inch (2")square operating nut,open left must be used. Resilient wedge gate valves on all pipe sizes up to and including 12 inches are required. � Direction of Opening: All valves are to open teft. Specifications: Gate valves in sizes through twenty-four inches (24") shall be of the iron body, non- rising bronze stem, resilient seated wedge type manufactured to equal or exceed ANSI/AWWA Standard C509-80 and the specific requirements outlined in these Special Provisions. Valves shall have a bottle-tight working water pressure of 250 psi with zero leakage and be capable of flow in either direction. End connections shall be mechanical joint and shall be furnished with all necessary joint materials. Valve openings shall be furnished and installed with valve stacks and covers in accordance with locate water district specifications. Valve body, bonnet,stuffing box and disc cast shall be manufactured of either grayor ductile iron. I WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � � � € j FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ' VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � ; The exterior of the valve shall have epoxy coating per AWWA standards, applied to � the ferrous parts of the valve, except for finished or seating surfaces. # � All internal ferrous metal surfaces shall be coated with a two-part thermosetting ; epoxy coating. The coating shall be non-toxic, impart no taste to water, protect all � g seating and adjacent surfaces from corrosion and prevent build-up of scale or r tuberculation. � ; � The valve shall be structurally designed so that if excessive torque is applied to the t stem in the closing direction, with the disc seated, failure of the pressure retaining % � parts does not occur. Stem failure under such conditions shall occur externally at ' such a point as to enable the stem to be safely turned in the opening direct by use of a pipe wrench. � � k B. Valve Boxes � � ' Valve boxes shall be Tyler 668-S, D&L M-9042 (with a M-9073 extension), or East � Jordan 8550 (with a 8560 extension). All buried valves shall be provided with a � 4 six-inch (6") cast iron, valve box, screw type. The valve box shall be of a design ° s which will not transmit shock or stress to the valve and which shall have enough ; extension capability to be raised to final street grade. The valve box shall be cast � iron, adjustable screw type, with minimum five-inch (5") diameter shaft provided = with cover, marked "Water". � f: C. Pressure Reducing Valves All pressure reducing valves shall be CLA-VAL 92G-01 ABXCKDS as appropriate and ` determined b the En ineer. In addition, the PRV is to have the followin features: � �: Y 9 9 � �' 1. Pressure reducing pilotry with pressure control ranges for correct valve � operation where installed. Pilot material shall be bronze body only,brass and stainless-steel trim. Tubing shall be copper. . 2. . Epoxy coated interior and exterior suitable for potable water contact. 3. Dura-clean stem design shall be installed. � 4. Valve opening shall be regulated by means of a"speed control valve"for flow � control. � � 5. Ductile iron, globe body, minimum 150-pound ANSI flanges or as may be required by system pressures, bronze trim. ; 6. Pilotry flow-clean strainer and minimum of three (3) pilot cocks. � D. Pressure Reducing Valves-Bypass Line ; The PRV shall be CLA-VAL 90-01 valve, sized appropriately to allow low flow to ` ;i bypass around the main PRV. The valve shall have a ductile iron globe body with � ' screwed ends. Pilotry is to be equipped with a flow wye strainer and isolation cocks. � � E. Air Release/Vacuum Valves � } Shall be an APCO air vacuum combination valve sized by the engineer as � manufactured by Valve and Primer Corporation or an equivalent valve that has been � approved by the local water district. The valve shall have a cast iron body,cover and � baffle with a stainless-steel float. The seat shall be fastened into the valve cover, �' without distortion and shall be easily removed, if necessary. Air release/vacuum �. valves shall be installed at all high points in the system on any main line extensions. � � � WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-4 ° Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � � � :� � � t: � € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 F. Check Valves Golden-Anderson Silent Check Valve(Figure 280). Bronze mounted,AWWA C508. High strength cast iron gate with bronze gate ring. Bronze, back-faced seat ring. Solid bronze Y-shaped hinge. 2.03 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Fire hydrants shall be Mueller Centurion A423 Mountain Hydrant which conform to AWWA Standard C502 with a working pressure of 250 psi. They also shall be six- inch (6") mechanical joint inlet, minimum 5Ya inches, compression-type main valve that closes with pressure, iwo 2Y2 hose nozzles, one 4'/rinch pump nozzle, nozzle threads ANSI 626. Nozzles must be easily replaceable in the field with standard tools. Operating and cap nuts must be 1 Yrinch, Number 17 National Standard hex main valve which open to the LEFT. An arrow cast on top of hydrant shall indicate direction opening. These shall be a breakable section that permits clean break at or near ground level, preventing water loss in case of breakage. Working parts must be removable for maintenance or repair without excavation. Also required are operating mechanism non-wetting, oil reservoir lubricated, with O-ring seals and barrel drain bronze mounted with at least two (2)outlets,which operate automatically with main valve. Fire hydrants must be installed at the end of all main lines. Finish grade of the fire hydrant shall be twelve inches (12") below the flange for final grade and paving inspection. B. Fire Hydrant Extensions New Installations: All new installations shall be installed at the standard 7-foot to 9- 1!2 foot of cover measured from the top of the pipe to finish grade. All fire hydrants shall consist of a single solid shaft. No fire hydrant extensions will be allowed. Any special circumstance will require written approval from the local water district priorto installation. Existing Fire Hydrants: No more than one (1), two-foot (2') long, fire hydrant grade extension (extension section) shall be used or installed on fire hydrant assemblies. All hydrants shall be installed with a guard valve to isolate the hydrant for repair while maintaining service to main. No senrice line taps will be allowed between the guard valve and hydrant. Guard valves shall be installed on the tee off of the water main. The maximum distance from the guard valve to the fire hydrant shall not exceed fifty feet (50') Fire hydrants shall be installed at the end of all dead-end mains. C. Fire Hydrant Marker Flags Install fire hydrant marker flags for all newly constructed fire hydrants. The required flat is a Nordic Flex Flag, FF2-72 inches. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � � :� � } p' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 s � ' � ` D. Fire Hydrant Depth of Bury ,.. < � Fire hydrant depth of bury will conform to Manufacturer's requirements. 2.04 SERVICE LINES A. Copper Tubing �; 5 Type "K", ASTM B88. Connections to be compression or silver soldered. } B. Corporation Stops Mueller 300 Ball Valve No. B-25008 or B25028, AWWA C800. All brass construction K with compression connection. � McDonald No. 4701 BT or 4704 BT, AWWA C800. Ford cc/comp FB-1000-G � Ford IPS/comp FB-1100-G C. Curb Stops -� Mueller 300 Ball Curve Valve No. 25209, Ford B44 with compression connections, AWWA C-800. McDonald Ball Curb Valve - 6100 T, AWWA C800. , D. Curb Boxes `"� : For curb stops up to 1": Mueller H10314 with 89982 lid or McDonald 5601 with � 5601 L lid. For curb stops larger than 1": Mueller H10314 with 89982 lid and Tyler 6500 Series Enlarged Base #144809 or McDonald 5603 with 5601 L lid. Shaft . :` diameter shall be 1" and the top of the shaft shall be a minimum of 18" from final grade and lid. §' ' E. Saddles � ` Ductile Iron Saddle: Mueller DE2A, JCM-402, Smith & Blair 313, Ford F202, ' ' McDonald 3825,3826 or equal and approved by the District. The saddle must have � a double flat strap design with ductile iron body. Said saddle must conform to `' ,. AWWA C800. � ¢ s x � 2.05 METERS � Rockwell SR Compound Meter A. All services are required to have a positive displacement Rockwell meter with : ECR touch-read pad. Conformance per AWWA C702 Standard for Cold Water 4 Meters - Compound Type. 1. SR � 2. SR2 � ; 3. Compound � � 4. Meter type wi►I be determined by the District. � ? � i , WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-6 � Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO fi � � � � f � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. installation must be in freeze-proof, accessible area. C. A telephone jack must be installed within five feet (5') of the meter to provide for future automated meter reading. D. Installation will be near floor level in a horizontal position. Isolation valves shall be located before the PRV and after the meter (i.e. valve, PRV, meter, valve). E. Customer shall install wire from meter location to touch-read pad prior to meter installation. F. Touch-read pad will be located on street side of building, five feet (5') above the ground in an accessible location free from snow. G. Master Meter Vaults: All master meter vaults will be required to have a six inch (6") Rockwell turbine meter with a two inch (2") positive displacement low flow meter. The Contractor will be required to submif a piping schematic to the District and Engineer prior to any installation. Refer to Details for additional information. 2.06 GRANULAR BEDDING A. Two types of bedding material are allowed: Screened rock and soil or select imported material, meeting the following gradation specification table: � Total Percent by Weight Passing Sieve Size Screened Rock Soil or Select Import 1-1/2 inch maximum, and maximum of 10%of pipe 100 100 diameter to '/2 inch No. 4 0 to 10 30 to 100 No. 200 � 0 to 5 0 to 50 Minimum Compaction Tamp to spring line to 90%of Standard Proctor Requirement fill voids below pipe placed at+/-3%of haunches Optimum Moisture The maximum particle size of pipe bedding should generally not exceed 1-1/2 inches or 10 percent of the nominal pipe diameter,whichever is less. Bedding for small pipe such as senrice lines should generally have a maximum particle size not exceeding 3/a inch. Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic material, frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious material. Screened rock used for waterline or sewer pipe bedding should be crushed,angular material that meets the requirements of ASTM D2321, Class IA bedding material. The material should have not more than 10 percent passing the No. 4 (4.75 millimeter) screen, and less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 (75 micrometer) screen. The bedding should be tamped under the haunches of the pipe to spring line. Where future excavation is anticipated the sloughing properties of screened rock when unconfined should be taken into consideration. The District or Engineer may require soil or select import. Where groundwater may be present, the use of screened rock for bedding is prohibited. 2 1 -7 WATER DI TRIB TI N 0 5 0 S U O Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � �' ; � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ` VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � Compacted pipe bedding should meet the requirements of ASTM D2321, Class IB, � Class II, or Class III bedding material. The material should have a minimum of 30 percent passing the No. 4 screen and less than 50 percent passing the No. 200 screen. Class 6 aggregate base course per CDOT Table 703.2 conforms to this gradation criteria. The bedding should be compacted to a minimum of 90 percent at ; +/- 3 percent of optimum moisture content, referencing Standard Proctor (ASTM D698,AASHTO T99). Material containing 10 to 30 percent passing the No.4 screen � can be used with the following considerations: materials in this range can be expected to possess properties similar to screened rock except that compaction will F be required and materials in this range may be too free-draining to be testable for compaction by ASTM D698. Flow-fill, a Y2 sack (50 pounds) per cubic yard lean concrete mix as defined in the � � CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section ; 206.02, may be used as bedding where a combination of ease of placement, low R permeability, and unconfined stability is desired. � Additional Requirements: ; 1. Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic materials, frozen matter, � debris, or other deleterious materials. � 2. Flow-fill as specified by CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications, Section 206.2, � may be used with District approval. '` 3. Ductile Iron Pipe may be required to be encased in loose polyethylene in � conformance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 installation methods,unless site ; soils and proposed bedding materials are determined to be non-corrosive to : iron pipe when evaluated according to Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5. � r 4. Materials not meeting these requirements shall be used only with priorwritten § approval of the District and Engineer. � r B. In specific areas, such as where access is extremely limited, the use of on-site materials may be allowed and when used, must be on-site 1 Y2 inches minus well- graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of•soil, frozen f material, debris or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written District and Engineer approval. ; z C. Senrice line bedding shall consist of 3/8 inch or 3/<-inch minus screened rock, select native or sand material free of any organic material. s 2.07 TRENCH BACKFILL Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No cobbles over E, four inches (4") in diameter in trench. s 2.08 NON-DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE � ' The installation of"blue"marking tape is required on all water mains and service lines. The s tape shall be installed approximately twenty-four inches(2')above the main or line. The tape ` shall meet the following specifications: � A. Four(4) mil thick PVC material. B. Solid "blue"color with black lettering ' � �: WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-8 > � Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � £ � ; ;. ; f ; E FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 C. Six inches (6") in width 2.09 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials shall be furnished from sources agreed to by the Engineer. B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.10 CONCRETE MIX I A. Design Mix 1. Proportions Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate - 43% Water- 5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate- 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5%- 7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready-Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. 2.11 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT Install polyethylene encasement on all Ductile Iron Pipe unless noted otherwise on plans. The polyethylene encasement material shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C105, with the following additional requirements. The raw material used to manufacture polyethylene film shall be Type 1, Class A, Grade E-1, in accordance with ASTM D-1248. 2.12 THRUST BLOCKS AND ANCHORS Concrete thrust blocks and anchors shall be sized for the internal pipe pressure and soil bearing capacity. Standard sizes and shapes of thrust blocks and anchors are shown on the details. No thrust block shall be smaller than that size required for an eight inch (8") main. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-9 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET t :� VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � Thrust reaction blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than 1 part cement to 2-1/2 � � x parts sand and 5 parts stone,and having a compressive strength of not less than 3000 P.S.I. �' � after 28 days. � C ; Megalug joint restraint devices shall be used in conjunction with thrust blocks. < � All thrust blocks shall be formed in accordance with the local water districYs specifications. � See detail. � The Water District shall inspect all thrust blocks. � ; 2.13 PRESSURE REDUCER VAULTS �� All proposed installations shall be"factory-builY'vault including the appropriately sized main a line inlet and outlet. � PRV installations shall include an appropriately sized manual bypass with an approved gate � � valve;two(2)appropriately sized CLA-VAL Model 90G-01 ABK pressure reducing valves with approved isolating gate valves. ; � All vault installations shall include a 120/240-volt power panel; all assembled, tested and painted. Minimum dimensions of the vault shall be 7' (H) x 8' (L) x 6' (W), skid— mounted $ capsule with Bilco Model MNB-50 access hatch, ladder, fluorescent light, gravity drain in sump, dehumidifier, 240 volt heater, exhaust fan and two (2)�rnagnesium anode packs. All �: proposed vault installations must be pre-approved by the local water district. � 2.14 CASING SPACERS � �_ �. � Carrier pipes to be installed inside casings shall be installed with self-restraining casing s spacers. Casing spacers shall provide axial thrust restraint to prevent pipe joint separation during and after installation. They shall also provide dielectric insulation between the carrier � � pipe and the casing and facilitate installation of the carrier pipe into the casing. � '; . PART 3 EXECUTION � � 3.01 TRENCHING = :$ $ _ A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. j � B. Rock Trench Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock i excavation. � £ C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit ` by the local authority having jurisdiction granted. All explosives and appurtenances ? t shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the = local, state and federal governments, as applicable. � f All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. � The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solelyon - the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall x 'r be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide � minimum 24-hour notification to Engineer. � � � � � WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-10 � � � Alpine Engineering, Ina Edwards, CO �' } .f '., � :a f � @ FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to existing utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATtON IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.03 BEDDING Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: Deliver, handle, store, and install in accordance with the pipe �� manufacturer's recommendations and the applicable paragraphs of AWWA C600, AWWA C603, and ASTM D2321. Carefully examine all pipe and fittings for cracks and other defects. Groove in bells of ductile iron pipe to be full and continuous or be rejected. Remove all I foreign matter from interior and ends of pipe and appurtenances before lowering into trench. Carefully lower all pipe, fittings, valves, and hydrants into trench piece by piece to prevent damage to pipe materials, protective coatings, and linings. Do not dump into trench. If pipe cannot be lowered into trench and into place without getting earth into it, place heavy, tightly woven canvas bag over each end and leave in place until joints are made. During pipe laying, place no debris, tools, � clothing or other materials in pipe. Keep trenches free from water during pipe laying and jointing. Dewatering of trench considered as incidental to construction an all costs included in contract prices. When pipe laying is not in progress, close open ends of pipe by watertight plug, or other means approved by Engineer. B. Deflection of Pipe: Pipe deflections are discouraged. Do not exceed 50% of the deflection limits for each type of pipe as recommended by pipe manufacturer. C. Pipe Jointing 1. General: Cut pipe for inserting valves, fittings,or closure pieces in neat and workmanlike manner with no damage to pipe or lining. Leave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. 2. Mechanical Joints: Thoroughly clean last 8" of spigot and inside bell to remove oil, grit, tar, and other foreign matter. Coat spigot and gasket with solution furnished by pipe manufacturer. Slip cast-iron gland on spigot end of pipe with lip extension of gland toward spigot end. Coat gasket with joint WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-11 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � a + � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET " :� VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � < � ' lubricant and place on spigot end of pipe to be laid, with thick edge toward � gland. Push entire section forward to seat spigot in bell of pipe in place. Press gasket into place within bell, even around entire joint. Move ductile-iron gland � along pipe into position for bolting all nuts with suitable torque wrench. n Alternately tighten nuts 180 degrees apart to produce equal pressure on all " parts of gland. � '� Pipe Size Bolt Size Range of Torque 4 Inches Inches Ft.-Lb. :� 3" 5/8 45 - 60 E 4"-24" 3/4 75-90 � 3. Push-on Joints: Thoroughly clean exterior 4"of pipe spigot and inside of adjoining bell to remove all oil, grit, tar, and other matter. Place gasket in r bell with large round side of gasket pointing inside pipe bell. Apply thin " film joint lubricant over gasket's entire exposed surface. Wipe spigot end of pipe clean and insert into bell to contact gasket. Force pipe into bell to ` manufacturer's jointing mark. _ 4. Flanged Joints:Thoroughly clean faces of flanges of all oil,grease,and other � material. Thoroughly clean rubber gaskets and check for proper fit. Assure �; proper seating of flanged gasket. Tighten blots so pressure on gasket is � � uniform. Use torque wrenches to insure uniform bearing. If joints leak when �. � hydrostatic test applied, remove and replace gaskets and retighten bolts. D. Thrust Restraint: Concrete thrust blocks are required. � � a ; 3.05 SANITARY SEWER CROSSING A. Normal Conditions: Whenever possible lay water mains over sanitary sewers to K � . provide vertical separation of at least 18"between invert of water main and crown of � sewer. B. Unusual Conditions: If above separation cannot be met, use foltowing: € 1. Sewer passing over or less than 18" under water main. Install continuous � $ watertight pressure pipe C900 PVC or Yelomine until the water and sewer � pipe are separated by more than 10 feet horizontally and or more than 18 � inches vertically transition couplings to be HARCO or equivalent. � � � 3.06 TAPPING PIPE � ,, � ; Use experienced workmen with tools in good repair and proper adapters for size of pipe z s being tapped. Drilling and tapping machines proposed for tapping directly into pipe agreed to � _ by Engineer. If tap is improperly installed with leakage around threads or, in opinion of � Engineer,connection is substandard,provide tap saddle at Contractors'expense. If damage � to pipe cannot be repaired by saddle, install approved repair sleeve over injured portion and retap at Contractor's expense. : } � � Install corporation stop and couplings, flanged coupling adapters, and service saddles to � provide clean seat. Wipe gaskets clean before installation. Flexible couplings and flanged � � coupling adapter gaskets may be lubricated for installation on pipe ends. Install in � � accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Tighten bolts progressively from '� WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-12 � � �{ Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � opposite sides until all bolts have uniform tightness. Use torque wrenches or other approved equipment. 3.07 SERVICE LINE Place true to line and grade in accordance with drawings, from main line to curb stop or meter, in shortest direct route by continuous section of pipe with no splices. Locate 10' horizontally from all sewer lines. Terminate near center of each lot or as shown on drawings. 3.08 VALVES AND HYDRANTS Carefully inspect valve and hydrant before installation. Clean interior. Operate valve and hydrant to determine parts in proper working order, with valves seating and drain valve operating properly. Set plumb and securely braced into place. Set hydrant with bury line at finish grade, with hose nozzles parallel to and pumper nozzle facing pavement, at least 6"behind curb or sidewalk and 18"from property line or as shown i on drawings. Provide drainage pit having 9 square feet of surface area and 2'of depth below seep hole. Backfill pits with 1-1/2"washed rock to 6"above barrel drain hole. Provide thrust blocking at bowl of each hydrant as shown on drawings. Do not obstruct barrel drain hole. Hydrants and valves backfilled by installing 1-1/2"aggregate road base to subgrade. Valve boxes centered and plumb over the operating nut. Valve boxes supported by bricks or other means to prevent any shock or stress transmitted to pipe or valve. Set valve box covers to just below subgrade level to prevent damage during construction of surfacing if applicable. Adjust to grade of surfacing. �� 3.09 PLUGGING DEAD ENDS Install standard plugs or caps at dead ends of alt fittings and pipe in accordance with � drawings. If dead end is not to be extended, place water service line as near dead end as I practical. �� 3.10 VAULTS � Ij Construct vaults to line and grade shown on drawings. 3.11 CONCRETE WORK �� A. Placement: Place to re uired de th and width conformin to drawin s. Place q p 9 9 concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. I B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement,aggregate,or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, from rain, and � flowing water for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing,cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing I treatment. i WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-13 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO i � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � 3.12 BACKFILL � F A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use bedding material for cover material and backfill by r approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil,free from organic f materials,chunks of soil,frozen material,debris or other unsuitable materials. Place '' and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1' above top of pipe. Place in lifts to a density of 85 to 90%, AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work Iimits unless � unsuitable. No cobbles over 4" in diameter in trench. 3.13 COMPACTION � A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods � until acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in � soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches above the pipe bedding zone shall be ° conditioned to a uniform moisture content, placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 8"in � loose thickness, and compacted as specified below: k Backfill materials should be thoroughly mixed to achieve a uniform moisture content, _ � placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness and properly ;`. compacted. Soils that classify as GP, GW, GM, GC, SP, SW, SM or SC in accordance with the USCS classification system (granular materials) should be compacted to 95 or more percent of the maximum dry density at moisture contents � within 2 percent of optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557, the "modified Proctor." Soils that cfassify as ML, MH, CL or CH should be compacted to � 95 percent of the maximum density at moisture contents from 1 percent to 3 percent above the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D698, the "standard ` Proctor." Backfill placed directiv under a structure, at anv depth, should be t com�acted to at least 95 percent of the maximum drv densitv at moisture contents within 2 percent of the optimum based on ASTM D1557, if qranular,or to at least 100 percent of the maximum densitv at moisture contents from 1 percent to 3 percent above the optimum moisture content based on ASTM D698, if finer Qrained. ` 3.14 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT � Score existing surface with a cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose F: of existing surface and aggregate base course. Leave 6"undisturbed subgrade lip on each � side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate r base course in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 96%AASHTO T180. Replace pavement �r in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these Specifications. � Compact asphalt to 95%ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. � � � � � . WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-14 ; Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO � ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Hydrostatic Testing 1. General: Make pressure and leakage tests on all newly laid pipe. Test two or more valved sections not to exceed 1000 feet. Test first section of pipe laid to verify if watertight. Lay no additional pipe until first test section has passed tests. Furnish the following equipment and materials for tests, unless otherwise directed by Engineer: 2 Graduated containers 2 Pressure gauges 1 Suitable hose and suction pipe as required 2. Testing Procedure: Test each 1000 feet of line installed while trench is j partialty backfilled and joints are left exposed for examination for leaks. Do not conduct pressure tests until 48 hours after placement of concrete thrust blocks. After pipe has been partially backfilled, slowly let water into line. Vent to allow air in line to be released. Flush line as necessary for cleaning. I Leave water in line for 24 hours prior to pressure test. Test at 1-1/2 times ; working pressure, calculated for low point of test section, or 150 psi, � whichever is greater. Valve off pump and hold pressure in line for test. Test for two hours or as agreed to by Engineer. At end oftest,operate pump until test pressure is again attained. Calibrate container of water for pump suction to determine amount of water to replace leakage. � 3. Leakage Allowance: Leakage is quantity of water necessary to refill line at end of test period. No installation will be accepted until leakage is less than: !I ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE PER 1000'OF PIPE IN GPH � Avg. Test Nominal Pipe Diameter- in. Pressure � psi 6 8 10 12 18 200 0.64 0.85 1.06 1.28 1.91 �� 175 0.59 0.80 0.99 1.19 1.79 150 0.55 0.74 0.92 1.10 1.66 Ilj 125 0.50 0.67 0.84 1.01 1.51 ; 100 0.45 0.60 0.75 0.90 1.35 'For pipe with 18' nominal lengths. To obtain recommended allowable leakage for pipe with 20' nominal lengths, multiply the leakage calculated from the table by 0.9. If pipeline under test contains sections of various diameters,allowable leakage will be sum of computed leakage for each size. Reduce allowable leakage proportionately for sections less than 1000 ft. 3.16 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING A. General: In accordance with AWWA C601. Acceptable chlorine disinfectants are I'� calcium hypochlorite granules and sodium hypochlorite solutions. I � WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-15 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Chlorine-water solution method: � � Chlorine Required to Produce 25 mg/L Concentration in 100 feet of Pipe- by Diameter Pipe 100 Percent 1 Percent Diameter Chlorine Chlorine Solution In. Lb. Gal. 4 .013 .16 6 .030 .36 8 .054 .65 10 .085 1.02 ; 12 .120 1.44 16 .217 2.60 � Induce chlorine solution into pipeline at a continuous feed rate to attain a concentration of 25 Mg/L free chlorine. C. Chlorination Test: Assure valves are closed on existing system to prevent chlorine solution flowing into existing system. Retain 25 mg/L chlorinated water in pipeline for minimum of 24 hours. During retention period operate all valves and hydrants to disinfect. At end of 24 hour period, chlorine in system to be no less than 10 mg/L throughout length tested. When section being tested meets 10 mg/L chlorine after 24 hours, flush main. Water samples taken shall show no coliform organisms. If water in pipe does not meet the governing health agency requirements, repeat disinfection procedure, at Contractor's expense, until requirements are met. Furnish k acceptance forms from governing agency to Engineer. ` 3.17 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION � � Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. f END OF SECTION 02510 � � � `s WATER DISTRIBUTtON 02510-16 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO # � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 02518- INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY � A. This section includes concrete paver units. [Concrete paver edge units.] I B. Bedding and joint sand. � �� 1.2 REFERENCES �I A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C 33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. �� 2. C 136, Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregate. 3. C 140, Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 4. C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 5. C 936, Specification for Solid Interlocking Concrete Paving Units. 6. C 979, Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 7. D 698, Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a 5.5-Ib (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 in. (305 mm) drop. .. 8. D 1557 Test Methods for Moisture Densit Relations of Soil and Soil A re ate , Y 99 9 Mixtures Using a 10-Ib (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) drop. Ij 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE �� A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of concrete interlocking pavers for a minimum of three (3) years. . B. Installation shall be by a contractor and crew with at least one (1) year of experience in placing interlocking concrete pavers on projects of similar nature or dollar cost. C. Installation Contractor shall conform to all local, state/provincial licensing and bonding requirements. � 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product drawings and data. B. Submit full size sample sets of concrete paving units to indicate color and shape selections. C. Submit sieve analysis for grading of bedding and joint sand. D. Submit test results from an independent testing laboratory for compliance of paving unit requirements to ASTM C 936. E. Indicate layout, pattern, and relationship of paving joints to fixtures and project formed �i detaifs. INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518- 1 Mac Design Avon, CO ; - � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.5 MOCK-UPS � ' A. Install a 7 ft. x 7 ft. (2 m x 2 m) paver area (for each paver pattern/type) as described in Article 3.02. This area will be used to determine surcharge of the bedding sand layer, joint sizes, lines, laying pattern(s), color(s), and texture of the job. This area shall be the standard from which the work will be judged. Consideration shall be given with regard to differences in age of materials from time of mock-up erection to time of actual product delivery. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic wrapped cubes capable of transfer by fork lift or clamp lift. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product. L, Sand shall be covered with waterproof covering to prevent exposure to rainfall or removal by wind. The covering shall be secured in place. C. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of ' buildings adjacent to paving. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install sand or pavers during heavy rain or snowfall. B. Do not install sand and pavers over frozen base materials. � � C. Do not install frozen sand. PART 2 - PRODUCTS i 2.1 CONCRETE PAVERS � A. Concrete pavers and associated edge restraint shall be supplied by Pavestone Company. Denver, CO: (800) 289-2562. See Sheet L2.2 for paver types, colors, and patterns. s B. Pavers shall meet the following requirements set forth in ASTM C 936, Standard Specification for Interlocking Concrete Paving Units: E 1. Average compressive strength of 8,000 psi (55 MPa) with no individual unit under 7,200 psi (50 MPa). ; 2. Average absorption of 5% with no unit greater than 7% when tested in accordance ' with ASTM C 140. 3. Resistance to 50 freeze-thaw cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C 67. � f C. Pigment in concrete pavers shall conform to ASTM C 979. D. Material shall be manufactured in individual layers on production pallets. E. Materials shall be manufactured to produce a solid homogeneous matrix in the produced unit. � INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518-2 Mac Design Avon,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.2 VISUAL INSPECTION A. All units shall be sound and free of defects that would interfere with the proper placing of unit or impair the strength or permanence of the construction. B. Minor cracks incidental to the usual methods of manufacture, or chipping resulting from customary methods of handling in shipment and delivery, shall not be deemed grounds for rejection. 2.3 SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Manufacturer shall provide access to lots ready for delivery to the Owner or his authorized representative for testing in accordance with ASTM 936-82 for sampling of material prior to commencement of paver placement. B. Manufacturer shall provide a minimum of three (3) years testing backup data showing I . manufactured products that meet and exceed ASTM 936-82 when tested m compliance with ASTM C-140. C. Sampling shall be random with a minimum of nine (9) specimens per 20,000 sq. ft. per product shape and size with repeated samples taken every additional 20,000 sq. ft. or a fraction thereof. D. Test units in accordance with ASTM for compressive strength, absorption and dimensional tolerance. A minimum of three (3) specimens er test re uired for an average value. p q Testing of full units is preferred. 2.4 REJECTION A. In the event the shipment fails to conform to the specified requirements, the manufacturer may sort it, and new test units shall be selected at random by the Owner from the retained lot and tested at the expense of the manufacturer. If the second set of test units fails to conform to the specified requirements, the entire lot shall be rejected. 2.5 BEDDING AND JOINT SAND A. Bedding and joint sand shall be clean, non-plastic, free from deleterious or foreign matter. The sand shall be natural or manufactured from crushed rock. Limestone screenings or stone dust shall not be used. When concrete pavers are subject to vehicular traffic, the sands shall be as hard as practically available. B. Grading of sand samples for the bedding course and joints shall be done according to ASTM C136. The bedding sand shall conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 33 as shown in Table 1. Table 1 Grading Requirements for Bedding Sand ASTM C 33 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518-3 Mac Design Avon,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 �- Sieve Size Percent Passing � 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) 100 � No. 4 (4.75 mm) 95 to 100 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 85 to 100 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 50 to 85 No. 30 (600 µm) 25 to 60 No. 50 (300 µm) 10 to 30 No. 100 (150 µm) 2 to 10 ' C. The joint sand shall conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 144 as shown in �, Table 2 below: Table 2 Grading for Joint Sand ASTM C 144 Natural Sand Sieve Size Percent Passing No. 4 (4.75 mm) 100 No. 8(2.36 mm) 95 to 100 � �� No. 16 (1.18 mm) 70 to 100 No. 30 (600 µm) 40 to 75 No. 50 (300 µm) 10 to 35 � No. 100 (150 µm) 2 to 15 No. 200(75 µm) 0 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION � A. Verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and elevations conform to the specifications. B. Compaction of the soil subgrade to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density per ASTM D 698 is recommended. Higher density, or compaction to ASTM D 1557 may be necessary for areas subject to continual vehicular traffic. Stabilization of the subgrade and/or base material may be necessary with weak or saturated subgrade soils. The ArchitecUEngineer = should inspect subgrade preparation, elevations, and conduct density tests for conformance to specifications. C. Verify that geotextiles, if applicable, have been placed according to civil engineer details sheets C1.08 and C1.09. D. Verify that aggregate base materials, thickness, compaction, surface tolerances, and elevations conform to civil engineer details sheets C1.08 and C1.09. E. Verify location, type, installation and elevations of edge restraints around the perimeter area to be paved. � INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518-4 Mac Design Avon, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 F. Verif that base is d , uniform, even, and read to su ort sand, avers, and im osed � Y rY Y PP P p loads. G. Beginning of bedding sand and paver installation means acceptance of base and edge restraints. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Spread the sand evenly over the base course or concrete sub-slab per civil engineering details sheets C1.08 and C1.09 and screed to a nominal 1 in. (25 mm) thickness, not exceeding 11/2 in. (40 mm) thickness. The screeded sand should not be disturbed. Place sufficient sand to stay ahead of the laid pavers. Do not use the bedding sand to fili depressions in the base surface. B. Install edge restraint where indicated per civil engineering details, per manufacturers recommendations. C. Ensure ihat pavers are free of foreign materials before installation. D. Lay the pavers in the pattern(s) as shown or indicated on sheet L2.2. Maintain straight pattern lines. E. Joints between the pavers on average shall be between 1/16 in. and 3/16 in. (2 mm to 5 mm) wide. F. Fill gaps at the edges of the paved area with cut pavers or edge units. G. Cut pavers to be placed along the edge with a double blade paver splitter or masonry saw. H. Use a low amplitude, high frequency plate vibrator to vibrate the pavers into the sand. Use Table 3 below to select size of compaction equipment: Table 3 Minimum Centrifugal Paver Thickness Compaction Force 60 mm 3000 Ibs. (13 kN) 80 mm 5000 Ibs. (22 kN) I. Vibrate the pavers, sweeping dry joint sand into the joints and vibrating until they are full. This will require at least two or three passes with the vibrator. Do not vibrate within 3 ft. (1 m) of the unrestrained edges of the paving units. J. All work to within 3 ft. (1 m) of the laying face must be left fully compacted with sand-filled joints at the completion of each day. K. Sweep off excess sand when the job is complete. INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518-5 Mac Design Avon, CO � F: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 L. The final surface elevations shall not deviate more than 3/8 in. (10 mm) under a 10 ft. (3 � m) long straightedge. M. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. (3 to 6 mm) above adjacent drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels. N. The resanding as necessary of paver joints shall be accomplished by contractor for a period of 90 days after completion of work. ` 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After removal of excess sand, check final elevations for conformance to the drawings. � END pF SECTION 02518 � � INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518-6 Mac Design Avon, CO ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 02530-SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM I PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfill, bedding,and installation of pipe, manholes,service wyes, service lines, force mains and all necessary appurtenances. B. Definitions: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a CAT 375 backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket, and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications for sewer lines as approved by the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction � materials for pipe, fittings, and manholes; or certifications that products conform with specifications. � B. Test Re orts: Submit laborato radation tests for beddin and trench stabilization P rY 9 9 materials, concrete mix desi n, and com ression test. 9 P 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when � descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat, falls below 35 degrees F, and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather,temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): 4"-15", ASTM D3034, Type PSM, SDR 35; 18"-27", ASTM F679. Push-on joints and molded rubber gaskets. Maximum pipe length 13'. B. Ductile Iron: AWWA C151,Class 52. Push-on joints. Poly-lined or Griffin"Sewper CoaY' ASTM A746. C. Yelomine: Restrained joint PVC pressure pipe and fittings. Conform to ASTM D2241 "Standard Specifications for PVC, pressure rated pipe (SDR Series)". SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 D. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Couplings: AWWA C900, working pressure 200 psi with � push-on joints ASTM D1869. Transition coupling from SDR35 to C-900, pressure pipe shall be Harco Manufacturing 337-080, Class 150 and ASTM3139. All spigot ends shall be beveled to manufacturer's specifications. 2.02 MANHOLES A. Manhole bases: Precast concrete ASTM C478. B. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. Precast concrete (wetcast) with the lip outside with minimum wall thickness 1/12 of internal diameter. Cones eccentric. C. Manhole Rings and Covers: Cast iron,ASTM A48 with a flat lid with the lettering"Sewer" cast on the cover. Ring and cover combined weight greater than 255 Ibs., machined to fit securely. Non-rocking cover. Hot dipped in asphalt. HS20 traffic loading. D&L A-1043 or accepted equaL D. Manhole Grade Rings: Precision Cover Systems, Inc. (PCSI) fully adjustable manhole covers with variable grade rings that adjust to meet different roadway heights and grades will be installed where required by District. E. Manhole Steps: Two non-skid grooves in surface of step and capable of a vertical load of 800 pounds and a pullout load of 1500 pounds(ASTM-C478),six inches(6")from face of manhole. The steps shall meet industry standards or equal and be plastic coated. F. Manhole Joint Sealant: Double Rub-R-Nek with primer. One inch (1") on 48"-inch diameter manholes; 1�/r inch on all larger numbers. � 2.03 GRANULAR BEDDING A. Two types of bedding material are allowed: Screened rock and soil or select imported material, meeting the following gradation specification table: Total Percent by Weight Passing Sieve Size Screened Rock Soil or Select Import 1-1/2 inch maximum, and maximum of 10%of pipe 100 100 diameter to '/z inch No. 4 0 to 10 30 to 100 No. 200 0 to 5 0 to 50 Minimum Compaction Tamp to spring line to 90%of Standard Proctor Requirement fill voids below pipe placed at +/- 3%of haunches Optimum Moisture The maximum particle size of pipe bedding should generally not exceed 1-1/2 inches or 10 percent of the nominal pipe diameter,whichever is less. Bedding for smatl pipe such as service lines should generally have a maximum particle size not exceeding 3/4 inch. Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil,organic material,frozen matter,debris,or other deleterious material. � SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 Screened rock used for waterline or sewer pipe bedding should be crushed, angular material that meets the requirements of ASTM D2321, Class IA bedding material. The material should have not more than 10 percent passing the No.4(4.75 millimeter)screen, and less than 5 percent passing the No.200(75 micrometer)screen. The bedding should be tamped under the haunches of the pipe to spring line. Where future excavation is anticipated the sloughing properties of screened rock when unconfined should be taken into consideration. The District or Engineer may require soil or select import. Where groundwater may be present, the use of screened rock for bedding is prohibited. II Compacted pipe bedding should meet the requirements of ASTM D2321, Class IB,Class II, or Class III bedding material. The material should have a minimum of 30 percent passing the No.4 screen and less than 50 percent passing the No. 200 screen. Class 6 aggregate base course per CDOT Table 703.2 conforms to this gradation criteria. The bedding should be compacted to a minimum of 90 percent at +/- 3 percent of optimum moisture content referencin Standard Proctor ASTM D698 AASHTO T99 . Material I , 9 ( , ) , containin 10 to 30 ercent assin the No. 4 screen can be used with the following 9 p P 9 considerations: materials in this range can be expected to possess properties similar to screened rock except that compaction will be required and materials in this range may be too free-draining to be testable for compaction by ASTM D698. Flow-fill a'/2 sack 50 ounds er cubic ard lean concrete mix as defined in the CDOT , ( P ) p Y 1999 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 206.02,may be '� used as bedding where a combination of ease of placement, low permeability, and unconfined stability is desired. .. Additional Requirements: 1. Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic materials, frozen matter,debris, or other deleterious materials. 2. Flow-fill as specified by CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications, Section 206.2, may be used with District approval. 3. Ductile Iron Pipe may be required to be encased in loose polyethylene in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 installation methods,unless site soils and proposed bedding materials are determined to be non-corrosive to iron pipe when evaluated according to Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C10'5/A21.5. 4. Materials not meeting these requirements shall be used only with prior written approval of the District and Engineer. B. In specific areas,such as where access is extremely limited,the use of on-site materials may be allowed and when used, must be on-site 1 Y2 inches minus well-graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written District and Engineer approval. C. Service line bedding shall consist of 3/8 inch or 3/a-inch minus screened rock,select native or sand material free of any organic material. ' T MATERIAL 2.04 CONCRE E � A. General: All materials furnished from sources agreed to by the District. �III SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET i VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement,Type II. Cement which has become partially � set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. � C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard � Coarse aggregate - 43% Water- 5.5 gallons per sack � Maximum size aggregate - 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5%- 7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform � mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than ten (10) minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready-Mixed Concrete � _ Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. 2.06 TRACER WIRE Tracer wire shall be ten (10) gauge insulated copper wire and be required on all curve-linear applications. � 2.07 MARKETING/LOCATING DISK The District will provide 3M"Green"marking disks to the contractor. The contractor shall ensure their correct installation. � 2.08 NON-DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE The installation of "green" marking tape is required on all sewer mains and senrice lines. The tape shall be installed approximately two feet(2')above the main or line. The tape shall meet the following specifications: 1. 4-mil thick PVC material 2. Solid green color with black lettering 3. Six inches (6") in width � SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-4 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO FIRST CHAIR • PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.09 CASING SPACERS Carrier pipes to be installed inside casings shall be installed with self-restraining casing spacers. Casing spacers shall provide axial thrust restraint to prevent pipe joint separationduring and after installation. They shall also provide dielectric insulation between the carrier pipe and the casing and facilitate installation of the carrier pipe into the casing. Restrained casing spacers shall be provided at all pipe joints. In addition, casing spacers shall be installed every ten feet (10') of the pipeline to support the pipe barrel and the weight of its contents. Restrained casing spacers shall be Uni-Flange Series UFRCS1300 or URFCS1390,or an approved equal restrained joint device and Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing Company, Model CCM casing spacers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blastin : In eneral, blastin will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by � 9 9 9 the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall 'i be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state j � and federal governments, as applicable. �i All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The i protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24- hour notification to Engineer. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted bythe Occupational Safery and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety,to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to existing utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the District. 3.03 BEDDING Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO 4 - FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.04 UNDERDRAIN � ( � A. Water seeping from trench banks, but not flowing in trench bottom: Install gravel � underdrain in accordance with drawings. B. Water flowing in trench bottom: Install underdrain pipe in addition to gravel where water volume will fill a 4" pipe 1/4 full. Cleanouts at each manhole in conformance with drawings. C. Daylight all underdrains as shown on drawings or as directed by Engineer. r 3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION � A. Construct pipe accurately to line and grade shown on drawings. Pipe installation may be lamped daily by Engineer. Remove and replace pipe not conforming to line and grade at Contractor's expense. B. Install to manufacturer's recommendations, continuously upgrade. Bell ends face upgrade. Prior to making joints, clean and dry all surtaces. Use lubricants in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations for insertion of pipe in joint. Set pipe x in position and check line and grade. Keep dirt from entering all exposed pipe ends. Joints watertight. - C. Wyes and Risers for Service Connections: Angle upward so 1/8 bend connected to fitting will make service line invert equal to inside crown of sewer main. Where elevation of top of service is more than 12'below finished grade, install riser pipe as directed by Engineer. 3.06 WATER LINE CROSSING � A. Normal Conditions: Whenever possible, lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18" between invert of water main and crown of sewer. . B. Unusual Conditions: If above separation cannot be met, use following: - 1. Sewer passing over or less than 18" under water main. Install continuous watertight pressure pipe C900 PVC or Yelomine until the water and sewer pipe are separated by more than 10 feet horizontally and or more than 18 inches vertically transition couplings to be HARCO or equivalent. 3.07 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION � A. Manhole: Construct in accordance with drawings. Extend concrete manhole base at ; least 8" below pipe barrel. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to maximum of 2" above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert when manhole is set. Construct side branches with as large radius of curvature as possible to connect to main invert. Inverts shall be smooth and clean with no obstructions, allowing insertion of an expandable plug in pipe. Place complete and continuous roll of joint sealant on base ring in sufficient quantity so there will be no spaces allowing infiltration. Join each succeeding manhole section in similar manner. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. Turn eccentric cone and steps away from roadway ditch. ' i ; � z SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-6 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Manhole Ring and Cover: Install at grade of finished surface. Where surface will be completed after manhole construction, set top of cone so maximum of six, two-inch reinforced concrete rings will adjust ring and cover to final grade. 3.08 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE Make connections to existing manholes,where no pipe is stubbed out, in similar manner as new manhole. Break small opening in existing manhole as necessary to insert new pipe and attain �!, watertight seal. Chip existing concrete bench inside manhole to provide enough thickness for mortar bed to make new smooth continuous invert. Place expandable waterstop around portion of sewer pipe inserted into existing manhole. Use expandable grout to completely fill hole in manhole to create watertight repair. 3.09 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LINES Place true to line and grade in accordance with drawings, from main line to house service, in shortest direct route. Locate 10'from all water lines. Terminate 5'from lowest corner of lot or as shown on drawings. Where wyes have not been installed in main sewer,tap by machine drilling hole in main, sized to fit saddle for service line. Each wye or drilled tap and saddle shall be inspected prior to backfilling. Service line minimum grade of 1/4"per foot. If service line is to be stopped at property line,place 6-foot steel fence post at end, extending 2'above finished ground. Place watertight plug in end of service line. 3.10 CONCRETE WORK .. A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids,honeycomb,or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Ftetempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate or water. Provide concrete in such � quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, and flowing water,for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surtace with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs exposed by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.11 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use bedding materials for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil,frozen material, debris,or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1'above top of pipe for entire trench width. Place in lifts to a density of 90%AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 4" in diameter in trench. SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-7 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO ff F FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.12 COMPACTION � , A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches above the pipe bedding zone shall be conditioned to a uniform moisture content, placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 8"in loose thickness, and compacted as specified below: Backfill materials should be thoroughly mixed to achieve a uniform moisture content, ; placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness and properly compacted. r Soils that classify as GP,GW,GM,GC, SP, SW, SM or SC in accordance with the USCS classification system (granular materials)should be compacted to 95 or more percent of the maximum dry density at moisture contents within 2 percent of optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557,the"modified Proctor." Soils that classify as ML, MH, CL or CH should be compacted to 95 percent of the maximum density at moisture contents from 1 percent to 3 percent above the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D698, the "standard Proctor." Backfill qlaced directiv under a structure, at anv depth, should be comqacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum drv densitv at moisture contents within 2 qercent of the optimum based on ASTM D1557 if qranular or to at least 100 percent of the maximum densitv at moisture contents from 1 percent to 3 percent above the oqtimum moisture content based on ASTM D698 if finer qrained 3.13 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dis ose of � p existing surtace and aggregate base course leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements, or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ; A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no ' pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Testing 1. General: Conduct infiltration or exfiltration test for each section between manholes. Test first section of pipe laid to verify if watertight. Testing may be required during course of work where infiltration appears to be grater than maximum allowable, or quality of work is questionable. No sewer line will be accepted where water tightness tests show leakage exceeding 200 gallons per inch diameter per mile per day. Flush and clean sewer line prior to testing, wetting pipe, and cleaning out debris. Plug all pipe outlets to resist test pressure. 2. Infiltration Test: In high ground water table installation only. Plug upper manhole to determine leakage in section of line between consecutive manholes. Record quantity of water collected in time period to calculate infiltration rate. 3. Exfiltration Test by Air: Test each section of pipe between consecutive manholes � SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-8 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 to determine test duration for section by computation from Air Test Tables. Pressure-holding time is based on an average holding pressure of 3 psi gauge or a drop from 3.5 psi to 2.5 psi gauge. Add air until internal air pressure of sewer line is raised to approximately 4.0 psi gauge. After internal pressure of approximately 4.0 psi is obtained, allow time for air pressure to stabilize. Pressure will normally show some drop until temperature of air in test section stabilizes. When pressure has stabilized and is at or above starting test pressure of 3.5 psi gauge, commence test. Before starting test, pressure may be allowed to drop to 3.5 psi. Record drop in pressure for test period. If pressure has dropped more than 1.0 psi gauge during test line has failed. Test may be discontinued when prescribed test time has been completed even though 1.0 psi drop has not occurred. ASTM C828 "Low Pressure Air Test for Sanitary Sewers". Pipe Size Time Inches Minutes 4 2-1/2 6 4 8 5 10 6-1/2 12 7-1/2 15 9-1/2 18 12 21 14 24 15-1/2 3.15 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements,curbs,gutters, utilities,fences, irrigation ditches,yards,lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-9 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIALLY LEFT BLANK END OF SECTION 02530 ,`: � � SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-10 ` � Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 02580- ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION, CONDUITS, AND GAS SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, rock excavation, blasting, rock disposal,dewatering,backfill, bedding, compaction, installation of conduits, vaults, pads and all necessary appurtenances and coordination with the telephone, cable television, electric and gas companies. B. Definitions: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force 35,000 Ibs each, and requiring drilling and blasting. C. Utility Company Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications of the telephone company,the cable television company,the electric company and the gas company. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the systems they install by each of the respective utility companies. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for pipe, fittings, and vaults; or certifications that products conform with specifications. B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat,falls below 35 degrees F,and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather,temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC): 2"-8", Schedule 40 PVC. Electric rated for electric application. B. Electric primary conduit supplied by Holy Cross Energy. C. Gas pipe to be supplied and placed by gas company. ELECTRIC,COMMUNICATION,CONDUITS AND GAS SYSTEMS 02580-1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 2.02 VAULTS � All switchgear,transformer, splice vaults, pads, and bases to be supplied by Holy Cross Energy. 2.03 BEDDING A. Granular material -3/4" screened rock. B. On-site 1-1/2"minus well graded screened material,free from organic materials,chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding � material must have prior written approval of the utility company and Engineer. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIAL � A. General: All materials furnished from sources agreed to by the Utility Companies. fl B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement,Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, r salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. x 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix � 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard = Coarse aggregate - 43% Water- 5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate -3/4" . 2. Slump: 4" maximum � 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days ; 4. Air Content: 5% - 7% ` B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than ten (10) minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. � $ £ ELECTRIC,COMMUNICATION,CONDUITS AND GAS SYSTEMS 02580-2 ': Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � � € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24 hour notification to Owner, Engineer and Fire Department. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety,to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, �� to existing utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure,then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. � 3.03 BEDDING Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 3" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 UNDERDRAIN A. Water seeping from trench banks, but not flowing in trench bottom: Install gravel underdrain in accordance with drawings. B. Water flowing in trench bottom: Install underdrain pipe in addition to gravel where water volume will fill a 4" pipe 1/4 full. Cleanouts at each manhole in conformance with drawings. C. Daylight all underdrains as shown on drawings or as directed by Engineer. ELECTRIC,COMMUNICATION,CONDUITS AND GAS SYSTEMS 02580-3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION � A. Construct pipe accurately to line and grade shown on drawings. Remove and replace pipe not conforming to line and grade at Contractor's expense. B. Install to manufacturer's recommendations, continuously upgrade. Bell ends face upgrade. Prior to making joints, clean and dry all surfaces. Use lubricants in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations for insertion of pipe in joint. Set pipe in position and check line and grade. Keep dirt from entering all exposed pipe ends. Joints watertight. ' 3.06 PADS AND VAULTS Install pads and vaults to line and grade shown on drawings. 3.07 PULL STRING ° Pull string shall be labeled to identify which utility company or spare conduit the use of the conduit is intended for. 3.08 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb,or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by � remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, and flowing water,for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs exposed by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.09 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3/4"screened rock or on-site screened material(if approved by Engineer) for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to above top of pipe for entire trench width. Place in lifts to a density of 90%AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 4" in diameter in trench. � ELECTRIC,COMMUNICATION,CONDUITS AND GAS SYSTEMS 02580-4 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO 6 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.10 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches above the pipe bedding zone shall be conditioned to a uniform moisture content,placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 8"in loose thickness, and compacted as specified below: Backfill materials should be thoroughly mixed to achieve a uniform moisture content, placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness and properly compacted. Soils that classify as GP,GW, GM,GC, SP,SW,SM or SC in accordance with the USCS classification system (granular materials)should be compacted to 95 or more percent of the maximum dry density at moisture contents within 2 percent of optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557,the"modified Proctor." Soils that classify as ML, MH, CL or CH should be compacted to 95 percent of the maximum density at moisture contents from 1 percent to 3 percent above the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D698, the"standard Proctor." Backfill placed directiv under a structure, at anv depth, should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum drv densitv at moisture contents within 2 percent of the optimum based on ASTM D1557, if qranular,or to at least 100 qercent of the maximum densitv at moisture contents from 1 percent to 3 percent above the optimum moisture content based on ASTM D698, if finer qrained. 3.11 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements, or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 96%AASHTO T180 moisture content shall be within 3%of optimum. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate'concrete with vibrators. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Testing 1. General: Conduct testing in accordance with procedures approved by the appropriate utility company or as directed by engineer. 3.13 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements,curbs,gutters, utilities,fences, irrigation ditches,yards, lawns,and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. ELECTRIC,COMMUNICATION,CONDUITS AND GAS SYSTEMS 02580-5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIALLY LEFT BLANK � END OF SECTION 02580 i s 4 � 'i a � } T ELECTRIC,COMMUNICATION,CONDUITS AND GAS SYSTEMS 02580-6 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO i it FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 02630-STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, manholes, catch basins, inlets, outlets, underdrains, irrigation ditches, channelization, detention storage, siphons and all necessary appurtenances. B. Definition: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force of 35,000 Ibs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. 1.02 SUBMITTAL A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for: 1. Precast Manholes �� 2. Precast Catch Basins 3. Frames, Grates, Covers B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when � descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F. and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather,temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F. at time of placing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C14 B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76, circular;ASTM 506, arch;ASTM 507,vertical or horizontal elliptical. Class pipe as shown on drawings. C. Concrete End Section: Same ASTM specification as pipe. Equivalent in area as circular pipe. STORM DRAINAGE 02630-1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Corrugated Steel Pipe and Arches: AASHTO M36,gauge as shown on drawings. Bands � shall conform to following: Pipe Size Corrugations Number Bolts Inches 2-2/3" x 1/2" 3"x 1" 6-30 7" - 2 ea 36-60 12" 14" 3 ea 66-120 24" 20" 5 ea Thickness of band one gauge less than pipe but not less than 16 gauge. E. Corrugated Steel Pipe End Section: Siies and dimensions shown on drawings. Materials same as corrugated steel pipe. � F. Bituminous Coating: Where required on corrugated steel pipe and fittings, AASHTO M190, Type A, with minimum thickness of 0.03". Coupling bands fully coated. G. HDPE Pipe: Pipe shall have a smooth interior and annular corrugations. AASHTO M294, € Type S or ASTM F2306. Class pipe as shown on drawings. H. HDPE Pipe End Sections: Sizes and dimensions shown on drawings. Materials same as HDPE pipe. � 2.02 UNDERDRAIN PIPE � ' A. Corrugated Steel: AASHTO M36 Type III. Holes 3/8"double row each side of pipe for 6"- " 10" size pipe. Triple row each side of pipe for 12"-21" pipe. Spaced in center of each � depressed corrugation nearest to center pipe. Install hole row each side of pipe for 6"-10" pipe;triple row each side of pipe for 12"-21" pipe. B. Rigid PVC Schedule 40. � C. Flexible Polypropelene or Polyethylene/Hancor. 2.03 PREFABRICATED INLETS AND OUTLETS z A. Corrugated Steel Units: Conform to drawing dimensions, AASHTO M36. Bituminous coating when specified, AASHTO M190, Type A. Steps fabricated into units. B. Precast Concrete Units: In accordance with drawings, ASTM C478 and C789, wall "B", wall thickness 1/12 internal diameter. Steps precast into units. 2.04 MANHOLE A. Manhole Bases: Precast concrete. Manhole base and first barrier section cast monolithic per ASTM - C478. � B. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. Precast concrete with minimum wall thickness 1/12 of � internal diameter. Cones eccentric. � C. Manhole Ring and Cover: Cast iron, ASTM A48. Ring and cover combined weight greater than 400 Ibs., machined to fit securely. Non-rocking cover. Hot dipped in asphalt. � _ z STORM DRAINAGE 02630-2 ` Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 D. Manhole Steps: Two non-skid grooves in the surface of step and capable of carrying load of 1,000 Ibs. 6" from face of manhole. E. Manhole Joint Sealant: RubberNek. 2.05 SLOTTED DRAIN AASHTO M36 with grate assembly, ASTM A123. Joint and couplers of ring compression type. Where required, expanded wire mesh attached across top of drain opening. Fittings provided with annular ends for hugger-type bands. 2.06 FRAMES, GRATES, COVERS, AND STEP Metal units conform to drain dimensions and to following for designated material. A. Gray Iron Castings: AASHTO M105. B. Carbon-Steel Castings: AASHTO M103. C. Ductile Iron Castings: ASTM A536. D. Structural Steel: AASHTO M183 and ASTM A283, Grade B. Galvanizing, where specified, AASHTO M111. 2.07 BEDDING �� A. Pipe and culvert- roadbase, percent by weight passing square mesh sieves: 3/4", 100; No.4, 30-65; No. 8, 25-55; No. 200, 3-12. B. Underdrain-washed gravel: percent by weight passing square mesh sieves: 1", 100%; 3/4", 95-100%; No.4, 0-5%. � 2.08 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General: All materials furnished from sources approved by Engineer. B. Cement: ASTM C150 for Portland Cement,Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps,caked cement and have been exposed to inclement weather shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.09 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix: 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate 43% Water 5.5 Gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum STORM DRAINAGE 02630-3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days � 4. Air Content: 5%-7% B. Job Mixed Concrete: Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer ; Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement,and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready Mixed Concrete: Proportioned, mixed,and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit bythe local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for btasting shall be placed solely on the � person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24 hour notification to Engineer. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM, EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL . If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. f 3.03 BEDDING OTHER THAN UNDERDRAINS F A. Pipe: Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for full width of trench. B. Culvert: Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 6"below bottom of pipe to centerline of pipe for entire width of trench. 3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION s � A. General: For new embankments, place fill so width each side of pipe is at least five (5) times pipe diameter. After embankment is placed, proceed with trenching. � % i STORM DRAINAGE 02630-4 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 Begin all pipe installation at downstream end. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduit and outside circumferential laps of flexible conduit facing upstream. Place flexible conduits with longitudinal laps or seams at sides. B. Corrugated Steel Pipe: Remove atl loose excavated materials from bottom of trench and install bedding to required thickness. Install pipe true to line and grade. Install remaining bedding material along sides of pipe to avoid any voids. Repair bituminous coating damage using similar coating material. Lubricate coupler bands. Vertical elongation caused by backfill operation shall not exceed 3%of pipe diameter. Compact backfill to 90%AASHTO T99 and continue to 1'over top of pipe. C. Concrete Pipe: Extend bedding around bell where bell and spigot pipe is used. Place pipe on bedding as shown on drawings. Place remaining bedding along pipe sides with no voids. Compact backfill to 95%AASHTO T99 and continue to 1' over pipe. D. HDPE Pipe: Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and ADS recommended instatlation guidelines, with the exceptions that minimum cover in traffic areas for 24-inch through 48-inch shall be one foot and for 60-inch diameters, the minimum cover shall be 2-feet in single run applications. Backfill for minimum cover situations shall consist of ADS Class 1 or Class 2 (minimum 98% SPD) material. E. Underdrain Pipe: 1. General: Install to lines and grades shown on drawings. Extend underdrain material a minimum of 6" over top of pipe. Cover underdrain material for entire width of trench with filter fabric. Line trench with fabric before installing pipe and underdrain material. 2. Concrete Pipe: Install with bell resting on trench bottom facing up grade, with underdrain material supporting pipe. 3. Corrugated Steel or PVC Pipe: Holes or perforations placed down with maximum 1" underdrain material under pipe. Joint according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 SLOTTED DRAIN INSTALLATION Install in accordance with drawings. Trench as narrow as possible and backfill to create uniform foundation side support. Install true to line and grade. 3.06 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. Manhole: Construct in accordance with drawings. Extend concrete manhole base at least 8"below pipe barrel. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to maximum of 2" above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert after manhole is set. Construct side branches with as large radius of curvature as possible to connect to main invert. Inverts shall be smooth and clean with no obstructions, allowing insertion of expandable plug in pipe. Place complete and continuous roll of joint sealant on base ring in sufficient quantity, so there will be no spaces allowing infiltration. Join each succeeding manhole section in similar manner. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. Turn eccentric cone and steps away from roadway ditch. B. Manhole Ring and Cover: Install at grade of finished surface. Where surface will be completed after manhole construction,set top of cone so maximum of six-two inch thick reinforced concrete rings will adjust ring and cover to final grade. STORM DRAINAGE 02630-5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.07 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE ,� ; Make connections to existing manholes,where no pipe is stubbed out, in similar manner as new manhole. Break small opening in existing manhole as necessary to insert new pipe and attain watertight seal. Chip existing concrete bench inside manhole to provide enough thickness for mortar bed to make new smooth continuous invert. Place expandable waterstop around portion of sewer pipe inserted into existing manhole. Use expandable grout to completely fill hole in manhole to create watertight repair. 3.08 CONCRETE WORK t A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb,or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate,or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. � C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change,rain,or flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing,cover concrete surtace with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved �� by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.09 BACKFILL � A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3/4" road base for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean,free from organic materials,chunks of soil,frozen material,debris or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1' above top of pipe. Place in lifts to a - density of 95% AASHTO T99, at a point 6" above top of pipe. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 4" in diameter in trench. 3.10 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until = providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change � in soils occurs, or required compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. s B. Compaction requirements for all trenches above the pipe bedding zone shall be > conditioned to a uniform moisture content, placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 8"in loose thickness, and compacted as specified below: 3 Backfill materials should be thoroughly mixed to achieve a uniform moisture content, placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness and properly compacted. F Soils that classify as GP,GW,GM, GC, SP, SW,SM or SC in accordance with the USCS classification system (granular materials) should be compacted to 95 or more percent of the maximum dry density at moisture contents within 2 percent of optimum moisture � STORM DRAINAGE 02630-6 c Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � a FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 content as determined by ASTM D1557,the"modified Proctor." Soils that classify as ML, MH, CL or CH should be compacted to 95 percent of the maximum density at moisture contents from 1 percent to 3 percent above the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D698, the"standard Proctor." Backfill placed directiv under a structure, at any depth, should be comqacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum drv densitv at moisture contents within 2 qercent of the optimum based on ASTM D1557, if qranular,or to at least 100 qercent of the maximum densitv at moisture contents from 1 percent to 3 percent above the optimum moisture content based on ASTM D698, if finer qrained.: 3.11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES A. General: Cast-in-place concrete conforming to dimensions shown on the drawings and accurate to tolerances of 1/4". Install forms so all finished lines will be true and straight. Install reinforcing steel with the spacing between the forms and between bars as shown on drawings. Keep excavation dry during construction. Compaction requirements same as above. B. Inlets and Outlets: Either cast-in-place or precast units, in accordance with drawings. When required, set castings accurately to grade with adjustment courses of brick in full mortar beds. Construct pipe inverts or smooth concrete inverts same size as pipe up to centerline of pipe, with bench to stand on. C. Frames, Grates, Covers, and Steps: Install accurately according to drawings. Anchor castings in place and set in adjustment mortar to assure firm foundation. D. Trash Guards: Install in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.12 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course. Leave 6"undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and�properly compacted, place aggregate base course in ' accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 96%AASHTO T180 moisture content shall be within 2%of optimum. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95%ASTM D1559;consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. 3.14 TESTING For HDPE and concrete pipe perform an exfiltration test. Plug pipe outlets and fill the system with water from structure to structure and allow system to stabilize for 24 hours and measure the water level. Then measure the water level again in 24 hours. 200-gal/in. dia./mi./day is acceptable. STORM DRAINAGE 02630-7 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.15 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION � - Restore all pavements,curbs,gutters, utilities,fences, irrigation ditches,yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equat to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction � of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. � END OF SECTION 02630 3 _ � � ; � STORM DRAINAGE 02630-8 � Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO { f _ % FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 02720- UNBOUND BASE COURSE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Preparing surface of subgrade including proofrolling immediately prior to paving, repair of areas showing excess deflection during proofrolling, and furnishing and placing one or more courses of aggregate in conformance with lines, grades, and typical sections shown on drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Earthwork: Section 02300 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish proposed source of materials and copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Sieve analysis - ASTM C136 2. Wear Abrasion - ASTM C131 3. Liquid Limit- AASHTO T89, T90 4. Moisture Density Curves - AASHTO T99 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE A. Aggregate shall conform to following gradation: Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing square Mesh Sieves � Size � Class 2 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6 4" 100 - - - 3" 95-100 - - - 2" - 100 - - 1-1/2" - 90-100 - - 1" - - 100 - 3/4" - 50-90 - 100 No. 4 - 30-50 30-70 30-65 No. 8 - - - 25-55 No. 200 3-15 3-12 3-15 3-12 Liquid limit not greater than 35 for Class 2; 30 for Class 4, 5, or 6. Plasticity Index not exceeding 6. B. Requirements for this Project: Furnish Class 6 aggregate for this Project. UNBOUND BASE COURSE 02720-1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART 3 EXECUTION � 3.01 PREPARATION A. Staking: Owner shall provide slope stakes every 50 foot station. Contractor will provide at his expense all additional staking necessary to ensure work conforms with drawings. B. Subgrade Preparation: Scarify to a depth of 10 inches, moisture condition, shape and compact to crown, line, grades, and typical cross section shown on drawings and recompact in accordance with the specifications in Earthworks Section 02300 before placing base material. 3.02 MIXING The Contractor shall mix the aggregate by methods that insure a thorough and homogeneous mixture. 3.03 PLACEMENT If required compacted depth of aggregate base course exceeds 6", construct in two or more � layers of approximately equal thickness. Maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed 6". When vibratory or other approved types of special compacting equipment are used, compacted depth of single layer may be increased to 8" upon approval of Engineer. 3.04 SHAPING AND COMPACTION Compact each layer to 96%AASHTO T180. Maintain surface of each layer during compaction so � that uniform texture is produced and aggregates are firmly keyed. Apply water uniformly during compaction so moisture content is within 3%of optimum. END OF SECTION 02720 t 1 � i UNBOUND BASE COURSE 02720-2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO >' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 02740- FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnishing, laying, and compacting hot-mixed asphaltic concrete pavement in conformance with lines, grades, and typical cross-sections shown on the drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Unbound Base Course: Section 02720 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress. B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement, temperature, and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to Engineer. C. Owner will arrange and pay for all field tests to determine compliance of base course and pavement materials and compaction with the specification and the approved design mix formula. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: If requested, provide samples of proposed materials. B. Test Reports: If requested, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Aggregate-AASHTO T96, CP-45, AASHTO T304,AASHTO T176,AASHTO T89, AASHTO T90 2. PG Graded Binders, use PG�4-�� 58-28-AASHTO T48, TP48,TP5 AND T51 3. Liquid Asphalt -AASHTO M81, M82; ASTM D2026 4. Emulsified Asphalt - AASHTO M140 or M208 5. Compaction-Colorado Procedure 51, CP44 or CP81 C. Job Mix Formula: The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer. 1. A proposed job-mix gradation as required by the contract,which shall be wholly within the Master Range Table of Table 703 - 3 of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (CDOT Specifications)before the tolerances shown in Table 401 - 1, of the CDOT Specifications, are applied. The job - mix formula shall establish a single percentage of aggregate passing each required sieve size. A single percentage of bituminous material to be added to the aggregate and a single temperature for the mixture at the discharge point of the plant. FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740-1 Alpine Engineering,Inc. Edwards,CO j FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING � A. Trucks used for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight, clean, smooth metal beds thinly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime solution, or other approved release agent. Petroleum distillates such as kerosene or fuel oil will not be permitted. - Each truck shall have a cover of canvas or other suitable material to protect the mixture from the weather. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Bituminous plant mix shall be placed only on properly constructed surfaces that are free from water, snow, or ice. The bituminous mixtures shall be placed in accordance with the temperature limitations of Table 401-3 "of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction" and only when weather conditions permit the pavement to be properly placed and finished, as determined by the Engineer. B. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphaltic concrete pavement until cooled and hardened. Provide barricades,flagmen,and warning devices as required to protect pavement. Maintain pedestrian and vehicular traffic as required. ; Cover openings of structures in paving until permanent coverings are placed. C. Confirm in writing, aggregate base course constructed by others has been compacted to requirements of these specifications. Use any means necessary to proof roll or test to confirm aggregate base is satisfactory to receive asphaltic concrete. Notify in writing to �� Owner any deficient areas so they may be brought into conformance with specifications prior to placement of asphaltic concrete. j PART 2 - PRODUCTS � 2.01 AGGREGATE . Clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed gravel, natural gravel, or crushed.slag with not more than 45%of wear, AASHTO T96. Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves Grading SX 1-1/2" - 1" - 3/4" 100 1/2" 90-100 3/8" - #4 - #8 28-58 #30 - #200 2-10 Sizes#8 and larger, tolerances+8%;#30+6%;#200+3%;where 100%passing, no tolerance. ; Use Grading SX for this project. `w� z FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740-2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO : FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 2.02 ASPHALTIC CEMENT A. Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M226, Table 2. B. Superpave Performance Graded Binders shall conform to AASHTO Provisional Standard MP1 for PG�� 58-28 Performance Graded Binders 2.03 TACK COAT One of the following, grade and type as recommended by supplier: A. Emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M140 B. Cationic emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M208 2.05 MIX DESIGN A. Use Grading SX, 75 Design Gyrations, PG&4-�� 58-28 Binder. 1. Job—Mix Formula as defined in the Submittal Section (02740—3, Part 1.03 C). B. Furnish aggregate gradation. C. Accepted design mix shall meet�compaction requirements of these specifications. 2.06 MIXING � A. General: Comply with ASTM D995 for material storage, control, mixing, and plant equipment and operation. B. Aggregates: Keep each component of various-sized combined aggregates in separate stockpiles. Maintain so separate aggregate sizes will not be intermixed and to prevent segregation. Heat-dry aggregates to reduce moisture content to not more than �2%. Deliver dry aggregate to mixer at recommended temperature to suit penetration, grade, and viscosity characteristics of asphaltic cement, ambient temperature, and workabilityof mixture. C. Asphaltic Cement: Heat bitumen to viscosity at which it can be uniformly distributed throughout mixture. Select temperature range of 275 degrees F to 350 degrees F to suit temperature -viscosity characteristics of asphalt. Do not exceed 350 degrees F. D. Mixing: Accurately weigh or measure dry aggregates and weigh or meter asphaltic cement to comply with job-mix formula requirements. Mix aggregate and asphaltic cement to achieve 95% minimum coated particles for base mixtures in accordance with AASHTO T195 and 85-90% coated particles for surface mixtures when tested in accordance with ASTM D2489. FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740-3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 PART 3 EXECUTION � 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Base Course: Blade, shape, and smooth aggregate base course to uniform section in accordance with the technical specifications for Unbound Base Course Section 02720. Remove loose materials. Clean the surface to be paved by mechanical sweepers, blowers, or hand brooms, until surface is free from dust. B. Existing Surfaces: Clean of all foreign materials. Fill holes and low places with levelling courses and compact prior to surface placement. Tack coat existing surfacing at 0.1 gallon per square yard. Apply only to areas on which surfacing is to be placed ; immediately. Do not extend more than 2000' ahead of paving equipment. Prevent traffic from travelling on tack coat. ' 3.02 FRAME ADJUSTMENTS t Set frames of structures to final grade. Place compacted asphaltic concrete to top of frame. If f permanent covers are not in place, provide temporary covers over openings until compaction is complete. Where frames and covers are paved over, mark so crews can find on emergency basis until cut out and adjusted to final surfacing. 3.03 SPREADING AND FINISHING ` A. Place at temperatures of not less than 275 degrees F, or more than 350 degrees F. If t temperature is below 50 degrees F and falling, asphaltic concrete mix shall not be less than 300 degrees F, while on trucks just prior to laydown. Mechanical, self-powered � pavers shall be capable of spreading mix within specified tolerances, true to line,grade, and crown as indicated on drawings. Road grader equipped with automatic blade control ' may be used for levelling courses. Pavers shall be equipped with hoppers and distribution ' screws which place mix evenly in front of adjustable screeds. Screed shall be adjustable r for height and crown,equipped with controlled heating device for use as required. Screed shall strike off mix without tearing,shaving or gouging surface,to depth and cross-section specified, without aid of manual adjustment during operation. Paver shall be capable of placing courses in thicknesses from 1/2" to 4" and from widths of 8' to 15'. Extensions and cut-off shall permit changes in widths by increments of 6". - B. Strike finish surface smooth; true to cross section; uniform in density and texture; free from hollows, transverse corrugations, and other irregularities. Paint contact surfaces between gutters, manhole rings, catch basins, and other similar structures with thin, uniform coating of tack coat. Final surface shall be 1/4"above all structures and gutters sloping away from paving, flush with gutters sloping towards paving. C. Hand Placement: Where certain areas because of irregularity, inaccessibility, or unavoidable obstacles, do not lend themselves to machine placement, Engineer may agree to hand placement. Spread and compact to same finish and compaction tolerances of these specifications. D. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavement,or between successive days work,to insure thorough bond between old and new surfaces. Clean surfaces free of sand, dirt, dust,or other materials, and apply tack coat. Construction joints must have same texture, � density, and smoothness tolerances as other surfacing. V� ;. FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740-4 Alpine Engineering, Ina Edwards,CO ' � s � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Construct transverse joints to existing material by cutting material back to expose full depth edge. Paint thin uniform tack coat on joint and place new asphaltic concrete. 2. Prepare longitudinal joints by overlapping screed 1"on existing surface. Deposit sufficient material to complete joint. Push excess by hand rake 1/2"on new mat leaving vertical uncompacted face approximately 1" high. Compact against joint by rolling equipment. No depression allowed exceeding 1/8"for width of 6", after final compaction. E. Finish Tolerance: Place levelling courses within 1/2"of design grade. Finished surfaces will be tested with 10' straight edge, parallel to center line at location of wheel paths for each lane. Straight edge will be advanced 5' and space under straight edge shall not exceed 1/4". Correct areas deficient in smoothness by completely removing surface material and replacing. Overlay corrections may be made only if approved by Owner. F. Thickness Tolerance: Compacted thickness shall be no less than that shown on drawings. Any surfacing which does not meet minimum thickness shall be removed and replaced. 3.04 COMPACTION A. General: Provide rollers to obtain required density,surface texture, and rideability. Begin rolling operations immediately following ptacement of asphaltic concrete. Do not permit heavy equipment, rollers,etc.to stand on finished surface where deformation may occur. End each pass of roller in different place. �� B. Rollers 1. Steel-wheel rollers self-propelled,developing contact pressure under compression wheels of 250 to 350 psi per inch of width of roller wheel. Rollers equipped with adjustable scrapers and means for keeping wheel wet to prevent mix from sticking. 2. Pneumatic-tired rollers self-propelled,developing contact pressure under each tire � of 85 to 110 psi. Wheels so spaced that one pass will accomplish one complete coverage equal to rolling width of machine. Wheels oscillate but not wobble. Remove and replace immediately any tires picking up fines. C. Compaction Procedures 1. Compact longitudinal joints and edges first,starting at outside edge and gradually progress towards center of pavement. Begin superelevated cunres rolling on low side on previously transversely compacted material. Successive passes should overlap by one half width of roller. Mat temperature must not be below 185 degrees F. 2. Immediately follow rolling of longitudinal joint and edges with breakdown rolling. Place drive wheel nearest paver and pull roller towards paver. Return roller to existing surface and make gradual shift to overlap previous pass by half roller width. Operate pneumatic-tired rollers as close to paver as necessary to obtain density required. Make enough passes for reasonably smooth surface. 3. Final rolling by a combination of steel and pneumatic rollers to obtain density, surface texture, and surface tolerances required. FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740-5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 D. Pavement shall be compacted to a density of 92% to 96% of the maximum theoretical � density,determined according to Colorado Procedure 51. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with Colorado Procedure 44 or 81. 3.05 PATCHING Cut out and fill with fresh, hot asphaltic concrete. Remove deficient areas for full depth of surface ; and base course. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel,and perpendicular to direction of traffic to extent of failure. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new pavement. Compact ; and tinish to specification. ; 3.06 CLEAN UP After completing operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess paving materials, and clean work area. ` ENC► OF SECTION 02740 � ; � t FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740-6 ti Alpine Engineering,Inc. Edwards,CO f � r r � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 02750- RIGID PAVEMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnishing, forming,jointing, placing and curing of concrete pavement, curbs and gutters, sidewalks, pans, in conformance with lines,grades, and typical cross sections shown on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork: Section 02300 B. Unbound Base Course: Section 02720 C. Concrete Paving Joints: Section 02751 D. Concrete Paving Curing: Section 02752 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress. B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement, temperature, and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to Engineer. C. Installers: 1. All work in this section to be accomplished under direct on-site supervision of � thoroughly trained and experienced journeymen who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work and the recommendations contained in the reference standards. Unless otherwise specified, hand finishing methods will be permitted only when performed under the direct supervision of a Craftsman holding the following certificate: ACI Concrete Flatwork Finisher and Technician (ACICFFT)or other Flatwork Finisher certification program approved by CDOT.A minimum of one certified Craftsman is required at each finishing operation. A minimum of one certified Craftsman is required for each three or fewer finishers (non-certified ACICFFTs) at each operation 2. In acceptance of the finished work, allowance will not be made for lack of skill on the part of the workers. D. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly adhered to concerning both methods and materials. Where surrounding conditions or base materials are not compatible with manufacturer's recommendations,notify Engineer in writing prior to bidding. E. Design Criteria: See Part 2 Products F. Testing Agency: All testing, with the exception of slump tests, shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory and paid by the Owner. RIGID PAVEMENT 02750- 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � G. Source Quality Control:The Engineer or his representative shall be offered uninterrupted access to the ready-mix batching plant at all times that the work is in progress. H. Record of Work: Keep record listing time, location and date of placement of concrete for structure. Keep such record until completion of project and make available to Engineer for examination at any time. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Reinforcement, precast sections. B. Manufacturers Data: Additives,joint materials, curing compounds, sealant with 10-year manufacturer warranty, fly ash. C. Mix Design: Proportions of fine and coarse aggregate, water, cement, air content, admixtures, fly ash. If required, a laboratory trial mix shall be prepared and test results submitted. D. Placement: Method proposed, if requested. E. ACI certified finishers must be on-site during finishing in accordance with requirements of 1.02.C.1 of this specification section. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Hauling Time: � 1. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. When air temperature is above 85° F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is above 90° F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Excessive slump or delivery time will be considered as a basis for rejection of the concrete placement. . B. Extra Water: 1. Deliver concrete to site in exact quantities required by design mix. 2. Should extra water be required before depositing concrete, the General Contractors Superintendent shall have sole authority to authorize addition of water. Any additional water added to mix after leaving batch plant shall be indicated on truck ticket and signed by person responsible. 3. Where extra water is added to concrete it shall be mixed thoroughly for 40 revolutions of drum or 3-1/2 minutes at mixing speed, whichever is greater. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Placement: a. When placing concrete after first frost or when mean daily temperatures are below 40°F., follow recommendations of ACI 306. b. Maintain concrete temperature at minimum of 50°F for not less than 72 � hours after depositing. � : RIGID PAVEMENT 02750-2 £ Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO { E { FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 c. Maintain forms in place for minimum of 72 hours after de ositin concrete, P 9 subject to approval of the Engineer. d. High early strength Type III cement may be used when approved by the Engineer. e. Do not place concrete without acceptance of Engineer on days when temperature at 9:00 AM is below 40°F until, in opinion of Engineer, the General Contractor has taken all necessary precautions and supptied all necessary equipment to prevent concrete from freezing. 2. Hot Weather Placement: a. When depositing concrete in hot weather,follow recommendations of ACI 305. b. Optimum temperature of concrete at time of placement shall not exceed 85 F. c. When air temperatures are expected to exceed 90° F., the General Contractor shall obtain approval from Engineer on procedures to be used in protecting, depositing, finishing and curing of concrete. Pozzolith Retarder, as manufactured by Master Builders Company,Cleveland,Ohio or approved equal may be used upon approval of the Engineer. d. Protect to prevent rapid drying. Start finishing and curing as soon as possible. Use of continuous fog sprays may be required by Engineer for 24 hours after depositing or work restricted to evening or nights,especially in times of low humidity. B. Protection: Protect newly finished slabs from rain damage. Cover masonry walls,glazing and other finish materials with polyethylene or otherwise protect from damage due to pouring slabs, sidewalks, or other concrete. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 READY-MIXED CONCRETE AASHTO M157 � 2.02 CEMENT Portland Cement ASTM C 150, TYPE I/tl. 2.03 CONCRETE Use CDOT Concrete Class�-P 2.04 AGGREGATES A. Fine Aggregate -AASHTO M 6. 1. Fineness Modulus (FM)—AASHTO T 176, 2.50< FM < 3.50 B. Coarse Aggregate-AASHTO M80. Course Aggregate shall conform to the requirements of CDOT Class � P concrete. For curb and gutter, curbs, sidewalk and pans use AASHTO M43 course aggregate gradation #467. RIGID PAVEMENT 02750-3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO ; i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2.05 WATER -AASHTO T26 � A. Slump 1"to 4" B. Water cement ratio - 0.44 maximum � 2.06 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entraining Agent-AASHTO M154. For CDOT Class� P concrete, �--�'-�4 -8%total air content for 3/a" and 1"aggregates. B. Chemical-Admixtures AASHTO M194 � 2.07 QUALITY A. Provide approved mix design B. Conform to applicable requirements of ACI 301 C. Field cylinders shall produce 28-day minimum compressive strength of 4�9A 4200 psi. Cement content 660 Ib/cy minimum. 2.08 REINFORCEMENT A. Deformed and plain billet-steel bars AASHTO M31 B. Fabricated steel bar rod mats, steel wire fabric AASHTO M54 ,� ; 4 ' 2.09 JOINT MATERIAL AASHTO M173 2.10 CURING MATERIALS • A. Burlap cloth from jute or kenaf - AASHTO M182 � B. White liquid membrane- AASHTO M148, 1 gal/150 SF C. Sheet Materials -AASHTO M171, 4 mil 2.11 SEALANTS A. Euclid Baracade Silane 100 High Performance Water Repellent or Symons Silane 40% ; 2.12 WATER: CLEAN AND POTABLE ' 2.13 FLY ASH: A. ASTM C 618. Use Class F fly ash only.The amount of fly ash shall conform to the percentages allowed in CDOT Class B P concrete. Fly ash shall be from a source listed on CDOT's Approved Products List (APL). Verification from the supplier shall be submitted, confirming the fly ash is currently on CDOT's APL. RIGID PAVEMENT 02750-4 � Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO ; S FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2.14 DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS: A. Dowel bars for transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 254 for the coating and to ASTM A615, Grade 60 for the core material and shall be epoxy coated, smooth and lightly greased for their full length. Dowel bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M Standards B. Tie bars for longitudinal and transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 284 and shall be grade 40, epoxy coated, deformed steel bars. Tie bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M Standards. When tie bars are required between concrete pavement and adjacent curb and gutter, the gutter thickness shall be increased to match the pavement thickness. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBGRADE/BASE COURSE A. Check for soft spots by proof-rolling prior to setting forms. Remove soft yielding material and replace. Compact to specification. Wet to optimum moisture to 10"deep, not more than 12 hours prior to placement so subgrade will not absorb moisture from concrete. B. Test for crown and/or elevation by subgrade planer to assure specified thickness. If additional material used to bring subgrade to correct elevation,compact to specification. Before placing concrete, clean subgrade of all loose materials. No disturbance inside forms after fine grading subgrade. 3.U2 INLETS, MANHOLES AND SIMILAR STRUCTURES CAST IN PAVEMENT: Thicken pavement and install joints and bond breaker at inlets, manholes and similar structures according to the current CDOT M Standards. Smaller structures such as valve and monument boxes do not require a bond breaker. 3.03 FORMS � A. Capable of supporting loads imposed by construction equipment, with maximum deflection of 1/4". Straight and free from warp, with maximum surface deviation of 1/8". In good condition, clean, and strong enough to resist pressure of concrete when placed. Joined neatly and accurately to line and grade, and mechanically tamped to assure firm placement. Oil prior to concrete placement. B. Set dowels if required and expansion joints, preformed construction joints, and header boards in accordance with current CDOT M Standards. Securely stake preformed baskets to prevent movement. Lightly grease dowels full length. C. Backfill behind forms as required to prevent water from entering subgrade. RIGID PAVEMENT 02750-5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.04 REINFORCEMENT � When indicated, place wire mesh as shown on drawings. If required for this project, place dowels and tie bars in accordance with current CDOT M Standards. Hold all tie and marginal bars in proper position by sufficient supports or pins. If center longitudinal joint sawed in lieu of placing metal or plastic strip,bars may be mechanically installed or placed on supports. Where rebar,rod mats or steel wire mesh is required, support with bar chairs. Where two layers of inesh are required, support bottom layer by bar chairs with separators for top mesh. 3.05 PLACEMENT ` Deposit near final position on grade with minimum segregation and without damage to subgrade. Operate transit mixer outside forms at all times,except in locations agreed to by Engineer. Place f concrete on subgrade in successive batches for full width between forms in manner requiring as little rehandling as possible. Spread mechanically to prevent segregation and separation of materials. Additional spreading may be by hand shovels. Deposit excess concrete to provide roll ahead of strike off screed for full length of screed. Consolidate concrete with vibrators and spade ` next to forms, so final surfaces will not have holes or honeycombs. 3.06 FINISHING A. Use equipment designed to spread,consolidate, screed and float freshly placed concrete in one pass, providing well consolidated, homogenous mixture, requiring minimum of hand finishing to meet surface tolerances. Stri4�e hand finished surfaces to tolerances by a methods agreed to by Engineer. B. Finished surfaces will be tested with 10'straight edge parallel to centerline immediately � following first floating of surface. Straight edge will be advanced 5' and space under straight edge shall not exceed 3l16". ' A C. Final finish pavements after floating and straight edging. Curbs, gutters, pans, and sidewalks shall be broom finished unless otherwise indicated. D. Finish: Broom finish unless otherwise indicated. Finish edges with a slightly rounded edging tool. � € " E. ACI certificated finisher(s) must be on-site during finishing. 3.07 CURING (See Section 02752 Concrete Pavinq Curinq for detailed specifications) Apply curing compounds, sheets, or burlap immediately after finishing and water film has ; evaporated from surface. Do not mark or mar finished surface. Coat sides within one hour after form removaL � 3.08 PROTECTION A. Have plastic sheeting or other suitable materials available at all times to protect fresh uncured surfaces from rain. = B. Provide full protection from freezing. Admixtures(calcium chloride)are not acceptable for freeze protection. RIGID PAVEMENT 02750-6 � � Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 C. For hot weather, use fog spray or water retarding additives. Do not throw water directly on surface. D. When indicated, apply two (2) coats deep penetrating sealant. E. Conform to ACI 102.2R-09 "Guide to Durable Concrete" 3.09 JOINTS (See Section 02751 Concrete Pavinq Joints for detailed specifications) A. Contraction joints. For concrete pavement and concrete pans, depth 1/3 the thickness of concrete. For sidewalks, depth 1/4 the thickness of concrete. For curb and gutter,depth 1/4 the thickness of the gutter concrete. If curb and gutter is poured monolithically with concrete pavement, transverse joints shall be to the same depth as the pavement. 1. Hand formed with tool, header board, or trowel pushed into surface to move all aggregate from joint. 2. Saw joints as soon as concrete can support equipment without marring and cutting can proceed without chipping, spalling or tearing, no later than 12 hours after placement. Saw as soon as possible to prevent erratic or uncontrolled cracking and prior to the development of shrinkage cracking.Transverse joints to be perpendicular to centerline. First joints sawed approximately 60 feet apart, intermediate joints sawed after initial joints. Suitable guidelines shall be provided to ensure joint is straight and true to line. 3. Curb and gutter, sidewalk and pan joints shall have tooled radii per current CDOT M Standards. 4. Longitudinal joints, including tie bars if required,shall conform with current CDOT M Standards. 5. Fabricated steel or plastic strip held rigidly in place. C. Construction joints shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards and, if required, use tie bars shall be installed.Transverse construction joints shall be planned to coincide with a contraction joint location. � 1. Joints constructed by forms, with tie bars. D. Expansion joints with preformed joint filler in a vertical position, deviating not more than 1/4"from a straight line. Install at all existing and proposed structures projecting through, into, or against pavement, in accordance with current CDOT M Standards. E. Install joint sealant in all joints, at temperatures above 50 degrees F., in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clean all dust, debris and water from joint. 3.10 THICKNESS Remove and replace work less than 95% of thickness according to drawings at Contractor's expense. 3.11 CLEANUP After completing concrete operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess materials, and clean work area. RIGID PAVEMENT 02750-7 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.12 OPENING TO TRAFFIC � Pavement shall not be opened to traffic until 14 days after the concrete was placed and the _ concrete has achieved a compressive strength of 4200 psi. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: All testing,with the exception of slump tests,shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory. The following tests and procedures are subject to change during construction at the discretion of the Engineers. B. Testing Laboratory: The selection of a testing laboratory for any of the following tests shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. k � C. Testing Priority: Control tests shall be used to determine the concrete quality throughout the project, however, special tests shall have precedence over control tests, and core tests shall have precedence over all previous tests. D. Slump Tests: Provide all necessary equipment and make tests in conformity with ASTM C143 at a minimum frequency as indicted by CDOT specifications,with additional testing as needed or as directed by the Engineer. Provide for tests to be made by a person thoroughly familiar with the requirements specified. Reject batch if slump excess the limits specified. Keep accurate record of time, location in the work, and the results of all slump tests. Make available for inspection by the Engineer. �� E. Control Tests: Control tests of concrete work shall be made at such times and in such manner as indicated by CDOT specifications, with additional testing as needed or as � directed by the Engineer at the expense of the Owner. Each test shall consist of 6 standard 6"test cylinders cast and cured in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C172. Two cylinders shall be broken at the end of 7 days after placing; two cylinders shall be broken 28 days after placing and the remaining two cylinders shall be stored until their disposition is determined by the Engineer. The two remaining cylinders will be broken only when the previous test reports indicate unsatisfactory results. The Engineer reserves the right to stop all future concrete work when the 7 or 28 day tests indicate unsatisfactory results; until, in his opinion,proper corrective measures have been taken to assure quality concrete in future work. Tests shall be made at the time test cylinders are taken, and recorded on the reports to determine the slump,air content, unit weight,and temperature of the concrete. All tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C39, ASTM C138 or ASTM C231. Cylinders used to establish the compressive strength versus maturity relationship shall be cast and cured in the field in conditions similar to the project. 3.14 PROTECTION General: Protect all exposed surtaces of concrete from premature drying and frost. Protect freshly placed concrete against rain damage. Protect all concrete surfaces from staining, cracking,chipping and other damage during progress of work, and leave in good condition upon s completion. END OF SECTION 02750 RIGID PAVEMENT 02750-8 � Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards,CO f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 02751 -CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION Work of this section generally includes provisions for joints for concrete paving; concrete sidewalks;curbs, pans, stairs and curb and gutter; and saw-cutting existing concrete or asphalt pavements for new joints. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork: Section 02300 B. Flexible Pavement: Section 02740 C. Rigid Pavement: Section 2750 D. Concrete Paving Curing: Section 02752 1.03 MEASUREMENT A. No measurement will be made for street pavement load transfer expansion joints. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. B. No measurement will be made for saw-cutting existing concrete or asphalt pavement or concrete curbs for new joints. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. C. No measurement will be made for formed, tooled or sawed street pavement contraction joints; construction joints and non-load transfer expansion joints regardless of material. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. � D. No measurement will be made for jointing in concrete paving; concrete sidewalks; curbs, pans, stairs and curb and gutter. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving; concrete sidewalks;curbs, pans, stairs and curb and gutter. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet—Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ASTM D994—Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fitler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). C. ASTM D1751 —Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). D. ASTM D6690— Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02751-1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � ` E. ASTM D5893—Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements. F. AASHTO M 254 -Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant Coated Dowel Bars { { { G. AASHTO M 284 -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars ` 1.05 SUBMITTALS ; A. Submit product data and samples in accordance with requirements of Section 01300 � —Submittals. � B. Submit product data for joint sealing compound and proposed sealing equipment for approval. C. Submit samples of dowel cup, metal supports, and deformed metal strip for approval. D. If tie bars are required, submit method of tie bar placement. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Board Expansion Joint Material: Filler board of selected stock. Use wood of density ; and type as follows: � $ 1. Clear, all-heart cypress weighing no more than 40 pounds per cubic foot, after being oven dried to constant weight. 2. Clear, all-heart redwood weighing no more than 30 pounds per cubic foot, � after being oven dried to constant weight. � B. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Bituminous fiber and bituminous composition ` material conforming to ASTM D994 and ASTM D1751. � C. Joint Sealing: Silicon based mastic, color to match paving, conforming to ASTM D5893 or Hot Applied conforming to ASTM D6690. All joint sealing to conform to manufacturer's recommendations and requirements. D. Dowel Bars and Tie Bars (if required) � 1. Dowel bars tor transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 254 for the � coating and to ASTM A615, Grade 60 for the core material and shall be epoxy coated, smooth and lightly greased for their full length. Dowel bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in ihe current CDOT M Standards 2. Tie bars for longitudinal and transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 284 and shall be grade 40, epoxy coated, deformed steel bars. Tie bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M Standards. When tie bars are required between concrete pavement and adjacent curb and gutter, ; the gutter thickness shall be increased to match the pavement thickness. � 4 � � CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02751-2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO � # � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 E. Metal Supports for Reinforcing Steel and Joint Assembly: Employ metal supports of approved shape and size that will secure reinforcing steel and joint assembly in correct position during placing and finishing of concrete. Space supports as directed by the Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Concrete jointing shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards. If the contractor proposes variations from the CDOT M Standards, or the project has unusual or irregular conditions not covered by the CDOT M Standards, the contractor shall prepare a pavement jointing plan for approval by the Engineer. B. When new work is adjacent to existing concrete, place joints at same location as existing joints in adjacent pavement. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Place transverse construction joint wherever concrete placement must be stopped for more than 30 minutes, but in no case shall a transverse construction joint be constructed within 2 feet of another transverse joint. If 2' long slab cannot be provided, remove concrete back to preceding joint and place standard transverse construction joint bulkhead. Transverse construction�)oints, and tie bars if required, shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards. B. Place longitudinal construction joints at interior edges of pavement lanes. Place longitudinal construction joints at the exterior edge of pavement lanes where pavement is placed adjacent to concrete pans or curb and gutter. Longitudinal construction joints, and tie bars if required, shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards. 3.03 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Place Yrinch preformed joint filler expansion joints at locations indicated in the current CDOT M Standards and at all existing or proposed structures and features projecting through, into or against the pavement, or as located in adjacent pavement. For concrete pavement, use boards no shorter than 6 feet. When pavement is 24 feet or narrower, use no more than 2 lengths of board. Secure pieces to form straight joint. Shape board filler accurately to cross-section of concrete slab. Thicken pavement and provide jointing around inlets, manholes and other fixed structures per current CDOT M Standards. Seal joint in conformance with current CDOT M Standards. 3.04 CONTRACTION (WEAKENED PLANE)JOINTS A. Place transverse contraction joints at locations and spacing indicated in the current CDOT M Standards. Joints for concrete pavement and pans shall be tooled or sawed to a depth of 1/3 the concrete thickness. Additional joint depths are as specified below. If dowel bars are required, they shall be installed within the tolerances and of the size, spacing and locations as indicated in the CDOT M Standards. Dowel bars shall be furnished in a rigid welded assembly securely fastened to the sub-base and CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02751-3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � constructed to firmly hold all the dowel bars at the specified depth and parallel to � each other and pavement grade and alignment. Seal joints. k B. Place longitudinal contraction joints at locations and spacing indicated in the current CDOT M Standards. Joints shall be tooled or sawed to the depth specified. If tie bars are required, they shall be installed to the size, spacing and location as indicated in the CDOT M Standards. Seal joints. 3.05 SAWED JOINTS A. Contractor may use sawed joints as an alternate to tooled joints. Circular cutter shall be capable of cutting straight line joint a minimum of 1/8 inch wide. Commence x sawing as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling or tearing and prior to initiation of cracks. Saw joints at required ; spacing in sequence with concrete placement. The time of sawing shall be `: determined by the Contractor to prevent random cracking and raveling from the sawing. If uncontrolled cracking begins during or prior to joint sawing, the Contractor shall move sawing operations ahead, and if necessary, provide additional sawing units to prevent uncontrolled cracking. If concrete is snowmelted, care shall be taken F to not damage any snowmelt tubing or heat trace. � B. Concrete Saw: Provide sawing equipment adequate in power to complete sawing to required dimensions and within required time. Provide at least one standby saw in good working order. Maintain sawing operations. Sawing equipment shall be on job ' at all times during concrete placement. � 3.06 JOINTS FOR CURB, CURB AND GUTTER, AND PANS � � � A. Place '/rinch preformed joint filler expansion joints through curb and gutters at = locations of adjacent expansion joinis in pavement;at locations and spacing indicated in the current CDOT M Standards and between concrete curb or pan and any fixed � structure or bridge. Provide 1/8-inch wide joints on 10-foot centers, or, if curb or curb and gutter is poured adjacent to a concrete sidewalk, provide joints at every sidewalk ,=. joint (maximum spacing of 12-feet). Joint depth shall be 1/4 of the gutter thickness. If curb and gutter is poured monolithically with concrete pavement, transverse joints shall be to the same depth as the pavement. 3.07 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE SIDEWALKS r A. Provide Yr inch preformed joint filler expansion joints at intenrals of not more than 500 feet and between sidewalk and any fixed structure, including utility penetrations. Extend the expansion joint material full depth of the sidewalk. Provide 1/8-inch wide joints, extending Y4 the depth of the sidewalk, at intenrafs approximately equal to the width of the sidewalk. 3.08 JOINT SEALING Lall ioints shall be sealed) 5 = � A. Seal joints only when surface and joints are dry, ambient temperature is above 50 � degrees F and less than 85 degrees F, and weather is not foggy or rainy. � B. Joint sealing equipment shall be in first class working condition, and be approved by � the Engineer. Use concrete grooving machine or power-operated wire brush and � CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02751-4 � Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO E � � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 other equipment such as plow, brooms, blowers or hydro or abrasive cleaning as required to produce satisfactory joints. C. Thoroughly clean joints of loose scale, dirt, dust, residue, curing compound and other foreign material that will prevent bonding of the joint sealant. Compressed air, if used, shall be free of oil. The term joint includes wide joint spaces, contraction joints, construction joints, expansion joints, dummy groove joints or cracks, either preformed or natural. Remove loose material from concrete surfaces adjacent to joints. D. Install backer rod and fill joints neatly with joint sealer per the current CDOT M Standards. Provide sufficient joint sealer so that, upon completion, surface of sealer within joint will be '/a inch below level of adjacent surface or at elevation as directed. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Maintain joints in good condition until completion of work. B. Replace damaged joint material with new materials as required by this Section. CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02751-5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET �� VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIALLY LEFT BLANK .� # END OF SECTION 02751 � � ; � � ; � � CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02751-6 � Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO : € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 02752-CONCRETE PAVING CURING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this section includes curing of Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork—Section 02300 B. Rigid Pavement—Section 02750 C. Concrete Paving Joints—Section 02751 1.03 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M 171 —Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. B. AASHTO M 148—Standard Specifications for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. C. AASHTO M 182 -Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01300-Submittals. B. Submit manufacturer's product data for cover materials and liquid membrane-forming compounds. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. If concreting occurs during cold weather as defined in ACI 306, concrete curing shall conform to the recommendations of ACI 306. 2. If concreting occurs during hot weather as defined in ACI 305, concrete curing shall conform to the recommendations of ACI 305. PART 2 PRODUCTS, CURING MATERIALS SHALL CONFORM TO ONE OF THE FOLLOW ING: 2.01 COVER MATERIALS FOR CURING A. Polyethylene Film: Opaque pigmented white film conforming to requirements of AASHTO M 171 B. Waterproofed Paper: Paper conforming to requirements of AASHTO M 171 CONCRETE PAVING CURING 02752-1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Cotton Mats: Single layer of cotton filler completely enclosed in cover of cotton cloth. � Mats shall contain not less than 3/a of a pound of uniformly distributed cotton filler per square yard of mat. Cotton cloth used for covering materials shall weigh not less than 6 ounces per square yard. Mats shall stitched so that mat will contact surface of pavement at all points when saturated with water. 2.02 LIQUID MEMBRANE— FORMING COMPOUNDS A. Liquid membrane-forming compounds shall conform to AASHTO M 148. Membrane M shall be Type 2 for non-colored concrete and Tvpe 1 for colored concrete and shall restrict loss of water to not more than 0.55 Kg/m of surface in 72 hours. PART 3 EXECUTION 1.02 GENERAL � A. Concrete pavement shall be cured by protecting it against loss of moisture for period of not less than 72 hours immediately upon completion of finishing operations. Do not use membrane curing for concrete pavement to be overlaid by asphaltic concrete. i B. Where curing requires use of water, curing shall have prior right to all water supply or supplies. Failure to provide sufficient cover material shall be cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations. 1.03 POLYETHELENE FILM CURING A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply � water in the form of a fine spray. Cover surface with polyethylene film so film will rt remain in intimate contact with surface during specified curing period. B. Cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab. Joints in film sheets shall . overlap minimum of 12 inches. Immediately repair tears or holes occurring during ` curing period by placing acceptable moisture-proof patches or by replacing. ; 1.04 WATERPROOFED PAPER CURING ; A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply water in form of fine spray. Cover surface with waterproofed paper so paper will i remain in intimate contact with surface during specified curing period. B. Prepare waterproofed paper to form blankets of sufficient width to cover entire ` surface and both edges of pavement slab, and not be more than 60 feet in length. Joints in blankets caused by joining paper sheets shall lap not less than 5 inches and shall be securely sealed with asphalt cement having melting point of approximately 180 degrees F. Place blankets to secure an overlap of at least 12 inches. Tears or holes appearing in paper during curing period shall be immediately repaired by cementing patches over defects. � a : CONCRETE PAVING CURING 02752-2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO i i � i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.05 COTTON MAT CURING A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, completely cover surface with cotton mats,thoroughly saturated before application, in such manner that they will contact surface of pavement equally at all points. B. Mats shall remain on pavement for specified curing period. Keep mats saturated so that, when lightly compressed, water will drip freely from them. Keep banked earth or cotton mat covering edges saturated. 1.06 LIQUID MEMBRANE— FORMING COMPOUNDS A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply liquid membrane-forming compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. CONCRETE PAVING CURING 02752-3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO 1 V FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ` VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 s � � THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIALLY LEFT BLANK END OF SECTION 02752 � ; x � } > ; t � ? f CONCRETE PAVING CURING 02752-4 z Alpine Engineering, Ina Edwards, CO � � f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 02810— UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications Install work using skilled persons proficient in the trades required in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with recognized industry standards of workmanship. Installer shall have not less than five years successful experience with installation of similar work. Contractor to submit a list, to owner, of three projects completed in the last two years of similar complexity to this project with name and location of project, owner's name and telephone number, name of project Owner's representative and telephone number. B. Special Requirements 1. Contractor shall familiarize himself with the site conditions prior to bidding the irriga- tion work proposed in this section. �� 2. Work involving substantial plumbing for installation of copper piping and related work shall be executed by licensed and bonded plumber(s). Secure a permit as necessary at least 48 hours prior to start of installation. 3. Tolerances - Specified depths of mains and laterals and pitch of pipes are minimums. Settlement of trenches is cause for removal of finish grade treatment, refilling, com- paction, and repair of finish grade treatment through entire length of warranty period. 4. Coordination With Other Contractors - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other Section. 5. Damage To Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grad- ing, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during Work associated with installation of irrigation system at no additional cost to Owner. C. Performance Requirements 1. Coordination With Other Contractors - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other Sections. 2. Damage To Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grading, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during Work associated with installation of irrigation system at no additional cost to Owner. D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies Work shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of: 1. Uniform Plumbing Codes published by Western Plumbing Officials Association. 2. Town of Vail Building Department Code. 3. Eagle River Water& Sanitation District Standards & Criteria. UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810- 1 Mac Design Avon,CO [ 4 5 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � E. Reference Standards 1. UBC: Uniform Building Code, current edition. 2. NEC: National Electrical Code, current edition. 3. NSF: National Sanitation Foundation, current requirements. 4. ANSI: American National Standards Institute, current requirements. 5. ASTM:American Society of Testing & Materials, current requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS � ' A. Operation and Maintenance Data Deliver the following items to the owner at or before time of substantial completion. 1. Record Drawings - Irrigation contractor shall record as-built changes made to drawings and deliver to Owner's representative on or before time of final acceptance. a. Three copies of data assembled in three-ring notebook with project name on cover to include: �� 1. Manufacturer's technical data and parts catalog for all equipment; I. Operating and maintenance instructions including winterization and spring start-up procedures; ,,� II. Precipitation rate per control valve, verified by field tests; III. Schedule showing length of time each control valve is to be open to provide proper amount of water; and IV. Description of area being watered by each zone. B. Instruct owner's designated maintenance personnel in proper operation of system including adjustment of controller and distribution heads; winterization and spring start-up procedures. � t C. Maintenance Materials Deliver the following items to the owner at or before time of final acceptance and obtain receipt � 1. Two manual drain valve keys with tee handles and key end to fit drain valves. � 2. Two quick coupler keys and two matching hose swivels for each type of quick ' coupling valve installed. 3. Two sets of special tools required for removing,disassembling and adjusting each ' type of distribution head and valve installed. ; 4. Two keys for each automatic controller installed. � � �: t, � �: x UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810-2 �: Mac Design Avon, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver, unload, store and handle materials in manner to prevent damage or deterioration. B. Deliver and store packaged materials in original, unopened, labeled containers. Remove and replace cracked, broken or contaminated items. C. Transport and store all pipe in a manner to prevent damaging or weakening by bending or concentrated external loading. Discard pipe that has been dropped/cracked, dented or damaged. D. Store materials in a manner to prohibit theft, which could cause installation delays. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Do not assemble pipe fittings when temperatures are below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Do not backfill when soil is frozen. B. Protection 1. Preserve and protect structures and paved areas from damage due to irrigation construction. In the event damage does occur, repair darriage to original condition with no cost to owner. 2. Locate all underground utilities and protect from damage. 3. Do not allow trenches to remain open longer than 72 hours. 1.5 INSPECTIONS A. Walk-Through for Substantial Completion: 1. Arrange for Owner's representative's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Entire system shall be operational prior to scheduling of walk-through. 3. Operate each zone in its entirety for Owner's representative at time of walk-through and additionally, open all valve boxes if directed. 4. Generate a list of items to be corrected prior to Final Completion. 5. Furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct all inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from Coniract Documents. 6. During walk-through, expose all drip emitters under operations for observation by Consultant to demonstrate that they are performing and installed as designed, prior to UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810-3 Mac Design Avon, CO � ! FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 placing of all mulch material. Schedule separate walk-through if necessary. � B. Walk-Through for Final Completion: 1. Arrange for Owner's representative's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Show evidence that Owner has received all accessories, charts, record drawings, and equipment as required before Final Completion walk-through is scheduled. 3. Operate each zone, in its entirety for Owner's representative at time of walk-through to insure correction of all incomplete items. 4. Items deemed not acceptable by Owner's representative shall be reworked to complete satisfaction of Consultant. 5. If after request to Owner's representative for walk-through for Final Completion of irrigation system, Owner's representative finds items during walk-through which have not been properly adjusted, reworked, or replaced as indicated on list of incomplete items from previous walk-through, Contractor shall be charged for all subsequent walk-throughs. Funds will be withheld from final payment and/or retainage to Contractor, in amount equal to additional time and expenses required by Owner's t representative to conduct and document further walk-through as deemed necessary to insure compliance with Contract Documents. � 1.6 WARRANTY A. Trench Settlement ` � � Warrant all trenching for a period of one year after date of final acceptance against any settlement greater than 1/2" below finish grade. Make corrections required to meet this specification including repair of planting, sodding and pavement areas. � B. Irrigation System 1. Warrant new irrigation systems for a period of one year after date of final acceptance against needed repairs or replacements due to defective materials or workmanship. Promptly remove and replace any materials or parts found to be defective during warranty period. 2. Owner reserves right to make temporary repairs during warranty period as necessary to maintain system in operating condition without voiding the warranty or responsibilities of the irrigation installer. 3. Damage as a result of vandalism or others' actions are not covered under this warranty. 4. Notify owner in writing if maintenance instructions are not being followed properly or if any damage occurs. PART2- PRODUCTS i 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' � , 4 A. Provide equipment and materials as manufactured by companies indicated within the UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810-4 ± Mac Design Avon,CO � � z FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 irrigation plans and specifications. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General Provide only new materials without flaws or defects and of the highest quality of their specified class and kind. Supply manufacturers standard of type and size shown on the drawings. B. Sleeve Pipe Use Schedule 40 under roads and driveways and Class 200 under sidewalks; sleeve size to be 2x the diameter of pipe being sleeved. Control wires to be installed in separate sleeve with 0-20 wires provided in 2" sleeve, 20-40 wires provided in 3" sleeve, over 40 wires provided in 4" sleeve. C. Backfill 1. Backfill shall be excavated material free of all debris, rocks and wood greater than 1" in size. �� 2. If excavated material is not acceptable to the Owner's representative for backfill, provide imported material as required to complete the work. Obtain rights and pay all costs for imported materials. D. Water Water shall be supplied from meter and backflow preventer assemblies. Irrigation contractor to be responsible for backflow preventer assembly. Irrigation Contractor shall . coordinate all irrigation hook-ups with General Contractor/authorized Owner's Representative. E. Pipe and Fittings 1. General: a. Pipe sizing shall be determined based upon combined GPM of all down stream irrigation heads. Each section of pipe shall be adequately sized so that velocity of water in pipe does not exceed 5 feet per second. b. Provide pipe continuously and permanently marked with manufacturer's name or trademark, size schedule, type of pipe, and working pressure at 73r-F NSF approval. 2. Mainline Pipe (pressure pipe) and Fittings: a. Mainline Pipe:ANSI/ASTM D2241, rigid, unplasticized PVC-Class 200. b. Mainline Fittings: (1) ANSI/ASTM D2241, schedule 40 PVC molded fittings suitable for solvent UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810-5 Mac Design Avon, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 weld/slip joint, ring tight seal, or screwed connections. � (2) Solvent weld/slip joint connections shall be sized to permit a dry unsoftened pipe end to be inserted no more than halfway into the socket. (3) Solvent weld/slip joint connections shall use ASTM D2564 solvent cement. (4) Schedule 80 PVC pipe may be threaded. 3. Lateral Pipe (downstream from control valves) and Fittings: a. Lateral Pipe: ANSI/ASTM D2241, rigid unplasticized PVC-Class 200 or Class 100 NSF3408/ASTM D2239 Polyethylene Irrigation Pipe. b. Lateral Fittings: ASTM D2241, Schedule 40 PVC molded fittings suitable for solvent weld/slip joint, ring tight seal, or screwed connections. (1) Solvent weld/slip joint connections shall be sized to permit a dry unsoftened pipe and to be inserted no more than halfway into the socket. (2) Solvent weld/slip joint connections shall use ASTM D2564 solvent cement. (3) Schedule 80 PVC pipe may be threaded. F. Valves � 1. Manual Drain Valves: Manual drain valves shall be installed at all low points along mainline. 2. Quick Coupling Valves: Quick coupling valves shall be installed as per plan along mainline for incidental watering and maintenance purposes. Spacing may vary to ' allow quick couplers to be installed into planting beds or suitable perimeter areas, � coordinate with Owner's Representative. 3. Electric Control Valve Assembly: Electric control valves shall be Rainbird PEB series � and/or approved equal, shall be sized according to manufacturer's recommendations and valve's zone GPM. Zone GPM shall be dictated by tap size, mainline size, and water schedule - see Section 2.2-D. Water. 4. Pressure Reducing Valves: Pressure reducing valves, if needed, shall be by Watts Industries, Inc. or approved equal and consist of a brass body with steel watering { parts. Pressure reducing valves shall be preset to system design pressure per manufacturer's recommendation. 5. Drip Valve Assemblies: Drip valve assemblies shall be Rainbird XCZ-100 COM or approved equal and selected/designed to insure optimum performance of drip zones and be sized/preset to zone's required PSI/GPM. Drip valve assemblies shall include Y strainer/filter (with 150 minimum mesh stainless steel screen) and pressure regulator. ' 6. Isolation Valves: Isolation valves shall be installed at all mainline intersections to allow individual zones or areas of system requiring repair to be isolated from rest of system. G. Distribution Heads � 1. Drip Emitters: Drip emitter body shall be constructed of UV and chemical resistant, non-corrosive material. Drip emitter diaphragm shall be constructed of a silicone < elastomer material. The emitters inlet barb shall be a self piercing type and the emitter shall be color coded to identify the flow rate of the units as follows: 0.5 GPH - " green, 1.0 GPH - blue, 2.0 GPH - red. Drip emitters/drip irrigation shall be used in all � planting beds, except for flower/groundcover areas. � i � UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810-6 Mac Design Avon, CO F r � € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2. Pop-up Spray Heads: Pop up spray heads shall be Rainbird 1800 series or approved equal and shall be used in small to medium sized turf areas. 3. Impact Rotor Heads: Impact rotor heads shall be Rainbird 3500 series or approved equal and shall be used in native grass areas. H. Electric Control System 1. Controller: Irritrol MC Plus-E series controller or approved equal. Size controller to allow a minimum of three spray zones for future irrigation system expansion or modification. Controller enclosure shall be steel, locking, and shall be wall or pedestal mounted (as determined by Owner's Representative). 2. Control Wiring and Connectors: a. Electric control and ground wire shall be type UF600 volt AWG control cable #12 gauge or larger, UL approved. b. Provide control or "hot" wires either black or red in color. Provide common or "ground"wires white in color. Provide spare wires green in color. c. Provide socket seal type wire connectors and waterproof sealer for all wire connections. I. Valve Boxes 1. All valve boxes to be by Carson-Brooks with T-cover tops. 2. Use standard valve boxes for all turf irrigation control valves and jumbo valve boxes for all drip assemblies. 10" circular valve boxes shall be used for quick couplers, isolating valves, and drain valves. PART 3 - EXECUTION � 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify size and location of pipe sleeves at paving, connection to existing irrigation mainline, connection for controller electrical service, and coordination with other site work. Notify Owner's representative of any discrepancies between field conditions and irrigation plans as drawn or specified that may prevent installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Layout and Staking Design location and layout may be modified, if necessary, to obtain coverage, to suit manufacturer's recommendations, and to avoid plantings and other obstructions. Do not alter spacing or decrease the number of heads indicated on the approved drawings unless otherwise acceptable to the Owner's representative. UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810-7 Mac Design Avon, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.3 INSTALLATION � A. General Unless otherwise indicated, comply with requirements of UBC, manufacturer's instructions, and applicable regulatory agencies. Notify the Owner's representative if contract documents are in conflict with any of these requirements. B. Sleeve Pipe } Sleeve pipe to be installed at or below minimum cover specified for each type of pipe (see 2.2-B). Sleeve pipe to extend 12" beyond all sides of surface being sleeved. Sleeve to be sloped to one end to prevent standing water within sleeve. Exposed sleeves to be duct taped or closed to prevent debris getting into sleeve prior to use. � C. Excavation and Backfilling 1. Excavation� a. All excavation shall be considered unclassified excavation and include all materials encountered. b. Trench straight and true with bottom uniformly sloped to low points. Trench ' bottom shall be clean and smooth with all rock and debris removed. Minimum � earth cover for pipe shalt be: (1) Mainline- 24" (2) Spray head laterals - 12" (3) Drip laterals (shrub beds) -4" (4) Drip laterals (turf areas) - 12" � ' (5) Control wiring - 24" c. Excavate to depths required to provide a 2" depth of earth fill or sand bedding for piping when rock or other unsuitable bearing material is encountered. 2. Backfill: a. Do not backfill in freezing weather or leave trenches open for a period of more than 48 hours. b. Fill to match adjacent grade elevations with approved earth fill material. Place and compact fill in layers not greater than 4" in depth and compact by puddling, ponding or mechanical tamping. No wheel rolling shall be allowed. c. Provide approved backfill to a minimum 4" above the top of pipe. d. Fill to final grade with approved excavated or borrow fill materials. 3. Piping Under Existing Paving: PVC sleeving, if required, under existing paving to be { installed by boring. Coordinate with owner prior to start of boring operations. � � UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810-8 Mac Design Avon,CO f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � D. Pipe and Fittings 1. General: a. Do not assemble and install plastic pipe when temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Allow all joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperature above 40 degrees Fahrenheit before testing, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. b. Install plastic pipe in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions on solid sub base. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction. c. Provide a minimum 6" clearance between lines. d. Make plastic joints with plastic male adapters. Maintain pipe interiors free of dirt and debris. Close open ends of pipe by acceptable methods when pipe installation is not in progress. 2. Mainline Pipe and Fittings: a. Saw cut plastic pipe. Use a square-in-sawing vice to ensure a square cut. Remove burrs and shavings at cut ends prior to installation. b. Make plastic joints with solvent weld joints or slip seal joints. Use only solvent recommended by the pipe manufacturer. c. Allow joints to set up at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system. 3. Lateral Pipe and Fittings: a. Uncoil polypipe and insert fittings full depth. Secure polypipe to insert fittings with stainless steel clamps. E. Valves . All valves to be installed per approved construction details, as submitted to Owner's representative by contractor, and per manufacturer's specification. 1. Manual Drain Valves. 2. Quick Coupling Valves. 3. Electric Control Valves and Drip Valve Assemblies: a. seal threaded connections on pressure side of control valves with Teflon tape or approved plastic joint type compound; and b. install one valve per valve box arranged for easy adjustment and removal. Allow minimum 12" between valves. Adjust valves to provide the proper operating pressure required for each lateral. Valve boxes shall be neatly and uniformly arranged within planting beds or perimeter areas. 4. Pressure Reducing Valves. 5. Isolation Valves. F. Distribution Heads All sprinkler heads and drip emitters to be installed per approved construction details, as submitted to Owner's representative by contractor, and per manufacturer's specification. UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810-9 Mac Design Avon, CO €,, FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. General: .,,� a. Fabricate double swing joint risers of Schedule 80 PVC nipples and Schedule 40 PVC elbows. b. Set heads perpendicular to finished grades unless otherwise indicated. Locate heads approximately 4"from walls and walks. ; 2. Drip Emitters: a. Install distribution tubing below grade in all bed areas. b. Stake all distribution tubing. '' 3. Pop-up Spray Heads. 4. Impact Rotor Heads. G. Electric Control System � 1. Controller: a. Irrigation contractor to coordinate with General Coniractor proper location for each electric controller. General Contractor is responsible for supplying electric power to the system. !� b. Connect control wiring to controller in numerical sequence. c. Final electrical connection to controller is the responsibility of the irrigation �� installer. � 2. Control Wiring and Connectors: ` a. Bundle wires at 15"-20" intervals and, if in pressure line trenches, lay to one � � side of trench. b. Install a minimum of two spare control wires from controller(s) along entire Y pressure line for future use. Install electric control wire in the piping trenches wherever possible. Place wire in trench adjacent to pipe. Install wire with slack � , � to allow for thermal expansion and contraction. Expansion joints in wire shall be ' provided at 100' intervals by making 5-6 turns on the wire around a piece of 3/4" x pipe (pigtail) instead of slack. c. Provide sufficient pigtails at remote control valves in control boxes and at all wire splices to allow raising the valve bonnet or wire splices 12" above the surface without disconnecting the wires when repair is required. ? d. Connect each remote control valve to one station of the controller except as ` otherwise indicated. e. Connect control valves to common wire systems. f. Make wire connections to control electric valves and splices of wire in the field using wire connectors and sealing cement in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Splices between the controller and each electric valve must be approved by the Owner's representative. H. Accessories _ ' 1. Valve Boxes and Covers: install one box and cover for each valve installed. Place w top even with finish grade. All valve boxes to be neatly and uniformly arranged within � = � � UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810- 10 � Mac Design Avon, CO ` � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 planting beds or perimeter areas. Brand controller letter and station number on lid of each valve box. Letter and number size shall be no smaller than 1 inch and no greater in size than 1 Yz inches. Depth of branding shall be no more than c inch into valve box lid. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Hydrostatic Test Test pressure pipe and valves by filling pressure pipe with water pressure of not less than 150 psi for a two-hour period. Prior to test, backfill trenches except leave joints exposed. Piping may be tested in sections to expedite the work. Remove and repair piping, connections and valves which leak. B. Flushing After hydrostatic testing, flush lines thoroughly to remove all foreign matter before distribution heads are set. Flush from dead end fittings for minimum of 1 minute under full head of pressure. C. Adjustments Upon completion of installation, "fine-tune" entire system by regulating valves, adjusting patterns and break-up arms, and setting pressure reducing valves at proper and similar pressure to provide optimum and efficient coverage. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings. Heads of same type shall be operating at same pressure +/- 7%. 1. If it is determined that irrigation adjustments will provide proper coverage, and . improved water distribution as determined by Owner's representative, contractor shall make such adjustmenis prior to Final Acceptance, as directed, at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes, degrees of arc, and control valve throttling. 3. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade unless otherwise designated. 4. Areas, which do not conform to, designated operation requirements due to unauthorized changes or poor installation practices shall be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Test Controller Test the controller by operating appropriate day, hour and station selection features as required to automatically start and shut down irrigation cycles to accommodate plant requirements and weather conditions. UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810- 11 Mac Design Avon,CO i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ; VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.5 MAINTENANCE � A. Maintain the irrigation system until 60 days after project installation or until the project is ; accepted by the Owner, whichever is the longer. 3.6 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. At the end of the 60 day maintenance period,the Owner's representative will, upon request, ' review the landscape and irrigation work to determine final acceptance. Demonstrate to � Owner's representative by an operational test that system meets coverage requirements and electric controller functions properly without excessive over spray onto pavement areas and building. Where reviewed work does not comply with the requirements, replace t rejected work and continue specified maintenance for a minimum of 60 days until reviewed : again by the Owner's representative and found to be acceptable. � � ' 3.7 FALL TURN-OFF AND SPRING TURN-ON A. Fall Turn-off � Winterize system at.the conclusion of the first irrigation season within five days of � notification by Owner. Shut-off system with stop and waste valve, drain complete system with air pressure by cycling through all stations of controller, and open all manual drain valves and cycle through all stations on controller. � ° � B. Spring Turn-on ; Tum-on system at the beginning of the following irrigation season within five days of � notification by Owner. Close manual drain valves and open stop and waste valve. Operate all control valves and adjust system malfunctions and heads as necessary for � proper coverage. ; END OF SECTION 02810 � k ( � � ` UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810- 12 Mac Design Avon, CO � , � f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 �SECTION 02840-PARKING ACCESSORIES 2 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Nonilluminated wall-and post-mounted signs denoting accessible parking spaces. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"for concrete foundations and concrete fill. 2. Division 10 Section"Signage"for code-required and miscellaneous interior plaques. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data, specifications, and installation instructions for each product specified. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural PerFormance: Provide signs capable of withstanding the effects of wind,gravity,and other loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. B. Thermal Movements: Provide signs that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following mabmum change(range)in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling,opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,available manufacturers include but are not limited to the following: 1. Allen Industries Architectural Signage. 2. APCO Graphics, Inc. 3. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 4. Best Sign Systems Inc. 5. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 6. Charleston Industries, Inc. 7. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 8. Signature Signs, Incorporated. 9. Supersine Company(The). PARKING ACCESSORtES 02840-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ( �' �� FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 ! 10. Vomar Products, Inc. � $ ' B. Accessible Parking Sign: ; 1. Size: 12 inches x 18 inches unless othervvise indicated. 2. Material:0.080 inch reflectorized aluminum. 3. Design: As indicated;symbol and lettering silk-screened on blank. 4. Finish: Baked enamel. �� 5. Lettering Design: Helvetica Medium. � 2.2 POSTS a A. General: Fabricate posts to lengths required for mounting method indicated. F 1. Direct-Burial Method: Provide posts 36 inches longer than height of sign to permit direct � embedment in concrete foundations. 2. Baseplate Method: Provide posts with baseplates,flanges,or other fittings,welded to bottom °' a of posts. Drill holes in baseplate for anchor-bolt connection. ` F a. Provide anchor bolts of size required for connecting posts to concrete foundations. t B. Steel Posts: Fabricate from 0.120-inch-thick,square steel tubing. Include post caps,fillers,spacers, junction boxes,access panels, and related accessories required for complete installation. Hot-dip galvanize post assemblies after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Post Size: 2 inches square. 2.3 ACCESSORIES � � A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for e�derior ' installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead x e�ansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. � PART 3- EXECUTION � r ; 3.1 EXAMINATION � A. Examine substrates,areas,and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements � � for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify that items,including anchor inserts,are sized and located to accommodate signs. ' C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. � " 3.2 INSTALLATION r ' A. Excavation: Excavate for sign foundation to elevations and dimensions indicated. Reconstruct " subgrade that is not firm, undisturbed, or compacted soil, or that is damaged by freezing � � temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities by excavating a further 12 � inches, backfilling with satisfactory soil,and compacting to original subgrade elevation. � PARKING AC ESSORIES 02840-2 � � C � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � F � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Where baseptate mounting method is indicated or required for post-mounted signs,set anchor bolts and other embedded items required for installation of signs. Use templates furnished by suppliers of items to be attached. 1. Protect portion of posts above ground from concrete splatter. C. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation,clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 02840 PARKING ACCESSORIES 02840-3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO i k. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ' VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � i ;; t t � � � � � � r � � F � i E � � � 9 f � � # PARKING ACCESSORIES 02840-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � i � � ; � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 02920—SOIL PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The extent of soil preparation work is shown on the drawings and includes soil amendments, soil preparation, and fill soil for all new planting and sodding areas. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications Install work using skilled persons proficient in the trades required in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with recognized standards of workmanship. Installer shall have not less than five year's successful experience with installation of similar work. Contractor shall submit list, to owner, of three projects completed in the last two years of similar complexity to this project with name and location of project, owner's name and telephone number, name of project landscape architect and telephone number. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples, Product Certification and Test Results Submit to the Owner's representative not less than 14 days prior to scheduled delivery of these materials. 1. Samples: . 2. Soil Amendments: one cubic foot. 3. Product Certification: fertilizer manufacturer's statement of analysis. B. Delivery Tickets Submit delivery tickets of following materials to the Owner's representative within seven (7) days after delivery of materials. 1. Soil Amendments: a. Soil Amendment Material. SOIL PREPARATION 02920- 1 Mac Design Avon, CO s' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver, handle and store materials in manner to prevent damage or deterioration. Deliver and store packaged materials in original, unopened, labeled containers. Wet, moldy, opened or broken packages will not be accepted. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' ; � A. Environmental Requirements No soil work shall occur when soil is in a frozen or wet condition causing it to clump and become nonfriable. ` B. Sequencing Soil preparation work shall occur after installation of underground irrigation piping and before planting. � ; ; E y � F ; � f SOIL PREPARATION 02920—2 � � Mac Design Avon, CO � � � � r FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Soil Amendments Soil Amendment Material: soil amendment material to be "EKO ComposY' soil amendment free from stones, lumps, plants, or their roots, sticks, weed stolons and seeds, high salt content and other material harmful to plant life. Minimum 80% organic matter with a pH range of 6.0-7.0. Maximum salt content, as measured by specific conductance, of all areas receiving soil amendment shall be no greater 4 mmhos per centimeter after soil amendment is thoroughly incorporated. B. Fertilizer Biosol Organic Fertilizer. Commercial product of uniform composition, free flowing and conforming to applicable State and Federal laws. Deliver in original, unopened containers. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect planting and sodding areas and verify rough grades, subsoils, drainage and compaction. Start of this work constitutes acceptance of these conditions. SOIL PREPARATION 02920-3 Mac Design Avon,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Soil Preparation for Plantings and Sod 1. Subgrade: loosen subgrade of all areas to a minimum depth of 4". Remove stones over 3/4" size and sticks, roots, debris and other materials. Limit subgrade - preparation to areas to be promptly planted or sodded. 2. Soil Amendments and Fertilizer: spread 4 cubic yards soil amendment material and 10 pounds of fertilizer per 1000 square feet. Immediately incorporate materials into soil with rototiller to a 6"depth. Discing or ripping is not acceptable. 3. Finish Grade: bring to minimum depth required to meet lines, grades and elevations shown on drawings, after light rolling and natural settlement. Allow for mulch and sod thickness. Grade sod areas to smooth even surface with a loose uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake to remove ridges and fill depressions as required meeting finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas to be promptly planted or sodded. t END OF SECTION 02920 � i { � � SOIL PREPARATION 02920-4 � { Mac Design Avon, CO � � t t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 02950- PLANTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The extent of planting work is shown on the drawings and includes trees, shrubs, perennials, annuals, and groundcover ptanting, edging and mulching. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications Install work using skilled persons proficient in the trades required in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with recognized standards of workmanship. Installer shall have not less than five year's successful experience with installation of similar work. Contractor shall submit a list, to owner, of three projects completed in the last two years of similar complexity to this project with name and location of project, owner's name and telephone number, name of project landscape architect and telephone number. B. Inspection Plant Materials - The Landscape Architect shall inspect plant materials at site before planting for compliance with requirements for name, variety, size and quality. Do not install plants that have not been inspected. Landscape architect may agree to inspect plants at nursery prior to delivery to site. Notify Landscape Architect 48 hours prior to inspection of materials. C. � Reference Standards 1. AAN-ASNS: American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. "American Standard for Nursery Stock" - 1990 Edition. 2. CNA: Colorado Nursery Act of 1965. 3. AJCHN-SPN: American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature "Standardized Plant Names", Second Edition 1942. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Delivery Provide quality plant material direct from nursery. Do not prune prior to delivery. Provide adequate protection of root systems and balls from drying winds and sun. Do not bind or tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to injure plants or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Deliver plants after planting preparation has been completed and plant immediately. PLANTINGS 02950- 1 Mac Design Avon, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Handling � Handle plants by ball or container only. Do not drop plants. Do not lift plants by the trunk, stems, or foliage. All balled plants with balls broken or trunks loose in ball will be rejected. C. Storage If planting is delayed more than four hours after delivery, set plants in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist by setting balled stock on ground and covering ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust or other acceptable materials. Do not remove container grown stock from containers before time of planting. Periodically water root systems of all plants stored on site using a fine mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root system in a moist condition. ; s 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements : ; Install frost-tender plants only after danger of frost is past or sufficiently before frost season : to allow for establishment before first frost. Do not install plants in frozen soiL � B. Protection € Determine location of all underground utilities prior to installation of plants. Avoid damage to utility lines by hand excavating in close proximity to lines. � C. Sequencing Coordinate installation of plants with irrigation and sodding work to ensure that damage will not occur. Install plants after final grades are established and prior to sodding. 1.5 INSPECTIONS/MAINTENANCE PERIOD A. Pre-planting Inspections e All plant material must be inspected at the site before planting commences. Any materials planted prior to approval are subject to rejection. Inspection of materials may be � sequenced by major planting areas to accommodate efficient planting operations. All ± rejected materials musi be removed from the site, replaced and re-inspected before any £ additional inspections are made. The Landscape Architect may agree to select plants at the nursery prior to delivery. 1. If in the opinion of the Landscape Architect there is probable cause to suspect root 4 damage, root binding, or disease conditions in the container stock plants, the � contractor will remove the container for the Landscape Architect's inspection before ` planting. PLANTINGS 02950-2 � � Mac Design Avon,CO � ; � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Planting Ins ections P 1. Landscape Architect shall inspect the staked location of all trees before digging for those trees occurs. 2. Landscape Architect shall inspect container stock with said plants set on the ground at the proposed locations before digging commences. 3. Landscape Architect shall inspect all staked planting bed locations and layout prior to installation. C. Pre-maintenance Inspection 1. At the completion of all planting operations under this contract and prior to the beginning of the maintenance period, the pre-maintenance inspection shall be performed. 2. At the time of pre-maintenance inspection, the Contractor shall have all planting areas free of weeds and neatly cultivated. All plant basins shall be in good repair. Irrigation systems shall be fully operational with all heads properly adjusted. All debris and litter shall be cleaned up, and all walkways and curbs shall be cleaned of soil and debris left from planting operations. The inspection shalt not occur until these conditions are met. 3. If after the inspection the Landscape Architect is of the opinion ihat all work has been performed as per the contract documents, and that all plant materials are in satisfactory growing condition, he will give the Contractor written notice of acceptance and commencement of the formal maintenance period. 4. Work requiring corrective action in the judgment of the Landscape Architect shall be performed within the first ten (10) days of the maintenance period. Any work not performed within this time will necessitate an equivalent extension of the maintenance period. Corrective work and materials replacement shall be in accordance with the contractor documents and shall be made by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner, including any additional inspection costs incurred by Landscape Architect. � D. Planting and Tree Maintenance 1. New and relocated plantings and seed shall be protected and maintained until 60 days after the installation of planting is complete, or until the project is accepted by the Owner, whichever is the longer. Maintenance shall include watering, pruning, weeding, mowing, cultivating, mulching, tightening and repairing of guys, replacement of unhealthy or dead plants, resetting plants to proper grades or upright position, restoration of planting saucer, and all other care needed for proper protection. Any damage resulting from planting operations shall be repaired promptly. 2. Provide all equipment and means for proper application of water to planted areas not provided with an irrigation system. Protect all planted areas against damage, including erosion and trespassing by proper safeguards. 3. During the maintenance period, should the appearance of any plant or seeded areas indicate weakness and probability of dying, immediately replace that plant or seeded area with a new and healthy plant or seed of the same type and size without additional cost to the Owner. At the end of the maintenance period, all plant material shall be in a healthy growing condition. PLANTINGS 02950-3 Mac Design Avon,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 4. Continue the maintenance eriod at no additional cost to the Owner until all `� p ; previously encountered deficiencies have been corrected, at which time schedule the final inspection. E. Finallnspection � � 1. At the completion of the maintenance period, the final inspection shall be performed. "` 2. If after the inspection the Landscape Architect is of the opinion that all work has been � performed as per the contract documents, and that all plant materials are in ' satisfactory growing condition, he will give the Contractor written notice of final s acceptance and completion of the formal maintenance period. ` t 3. 3. Final acceptance will not be given until all deficiencies are corrected. � e ;: 1.6 WARRANTY � A. Warrant all plantings for a period of 1 year from Date of final acceptance against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth except for defects resulting from neglect by owner, abuse or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents which are beyond ; the landscape installer's control. B. Remove and replace all plants found to be dead or in an unhealthy condition during the � warranty period. Replacement plantings and installation shall comply with specifications for e original plants. � � t PART 2 - PRODUCTS i, 2.1 PLANTS � A. Plant Quality ; Provide plants grown in a recognized nursery except as otherwise indicated in accordance � with proper horticultural practice. Provide healthy, well-branched vigorous stock with a ; growth habit normal to the species and variety and free of diseases, insects and injuries. All plants shall conform to standards for measurements, grading, branching, quality, ball and burlapping as stated in the AAN-ASNS and CNA. All trees shall have been grown in € areas of a Zone 4 hardiness or colder. No trees shall have broken or pruned terminal = ; leaders. � B. Identification Label each plant species (ID one plant per each grouping) with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name in accordance with AJCHN-SPN. f C. Plant Size Sizes specified in plant list on the drawings are minimums and all plants shall equal or f exceed measurements. See plant list for additional plant specifications. � ; ` PLANTINGS 02950-4 ` Mac Design Avon, CO � S 4 t _ � Y FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Measurements Measure plants before pruning and with branches, trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6" above ground for trees up to 4" caliper size and 12" above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of ptant for height and spread dimensions;do not measure from branch or root tip-to-tip. E. Substitutions Provide plants as specified on drawings. No substitutions will be permitted without approval of Landscape Architect. F. Balled and Burlapped Plants Where indicated to be balled and burlapped (B&B), provide plant dug with firm natural ball of soil in which plant was grown. G. Container Grown Plants Where indicated to be container plant, provide established container stock that has been transplanted and grown in container for a length of time sufficient to develop new fibrous roots so that the root mass will retain its shape and hold together when removed from container. Use rigid containers that will hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping. 2.2 FERTILIZER A. Trees, shrubs and groundcovers: none required. 2.3 WATER - A. Supplied and distributed from irrigation system. 2.4 GUYS, STAKES AND WRAPPING A. Guys: provide 14-gauge metal wire. B. Stakes: provide metal stakes as shown on details. C. Straps: provide 1-1/2" wide nylon straps with metal grommets at each end of adequate length for proper assembly. D. Wrapping: provide tree wrap material, 4" wide, bituminous impregnated tape, corrugated or crepe paper, brown in color, specifically manufactured for tree wrapping. E. Turnbuckles: 6" long, metal. F. Class 200 PVC Pipe: 1" dia., 1'-6" long for guy wires. PLANTINGS 02950-5 Mac Design Avon, CO � ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 t' 2.5 EDGER � Y i A. Commercial type factory painted steel, green in color, with tapered steel stakes as manufactured by Pro-Steel Edging, 4"wide x 1/8"thick. � €: 2.6 MULCH { A. Pre-emergent Herbicide: Dacthal (DCPA). B. Tree and shrub areas within planting beds, and tree saucers in native areas: Wood Mulch- shredded cedar mulch, fibrous and capable of matting together when moistened and settled. C. Perennial Flower and groundcover areas within planting beds: "Soil Pep" Soil Conditioner. D. River Rock Cobble: Clean, unbroken river rock, 4"-6" in diameter. � G E. Weed Barrier: Typar 3301, or approved equal, for use under river rock cobble. { � � 2.7 LANDSCAPE BOULDERS f A. Boulders to be used for individual boulder placement to range in size from 3' — 6' in � diameter. Boulders to be Cordillera/Red Skv Yellow, or approved equal. Boulders to � be apqroved bv Landscape Architect and Owner's representative prior to installation. � � � � ; PART 3 - EXECUTION F � � r 3.1 PREPARATION � . z A. Soil Preparation � Complete work specified prior to planting installation. � , z � B. Layout and Staking � Landscape Architect will review layout and staking of all plant locations, edging lines, and � boulder placement prior to any planting or boulder placement, or as requested by Owner. ;' ;: 3.2 PLANTING � � A. Excavating ° � Excavate plant pits with vertical sides and flat bottoms to dimensions shown on drawings. ; Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of plant pii. F k. B. Setting �: `? K � � ; PLANTINGS 02950-6 �; Mac Design Avon,CO �; ; t S � � �, p. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 Set lant lumb in center of it and ositioned to offer best a earance or relationshi to p P P P pp P adjacent area. Set at depth shown on drawings. Prune all broken and damaged roots. C. Backfilling Backfill after plant is properly set. During backfilling as plant becomes secured, remove all wire baskets, burlap, rope and wire binding from top and sides of ball. Do not remove materials from under ball. Puddle with water to settle backfill and eliminate air pockets. Form saucer around each plant. After settling, continue backfilling to finish grade elevations. D. Mechanical Spade Planting Plants may be planted by means of inechanical spade equipment at landscape installer's option. Use equipment that will dig, carry and replant with the same unit. Equipment size must be adequate for size of plant and not less than 8" of spade diameter at 15" depth per caliper inch of trunk diameter. E. Pruning Perform following work in accordance with standard horticultural practices: remove all dead or broken branches; remove all live branches that interfere with structural strength and healthful development of plant. All work shall be done to retain natural character of plant; �� retain specified height and spread; avoid damage to terminal leaders. Paint pruning cuts and wounds with standard tree paint or compound at landscape installer's option. F. Guying, Staking and Wrapping Guy, stake and wrap plants immediately after backfilling as shown on drawings. Set stakes vertically and avoid penetrating root ball. Guys to tree trunk shall be connected to straps to prevent injury to tree trunks. Guys shall be tightened by twisting guys together or adjusting turnbuckles. Attach white PVC pipe to guy wires. Wrap deciduous trees by starting at � ground and covering trunk to height of first branches. Secure end of wrap with tape. Before wrapping inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation and take corrective measures in accordance with standard horticultural practice. Remove afl guys and stakes at end of one-year warranty. Owner will remove guys, stakes and wrap from replacement plants. 3.3 EDGING A. Install edging where shown on drawings. Anchor with steel stakes spaced not more than 3' on center and driven at least 1" below top elevation of edging. 3.4 MULCHING A. Pre-emergent Herbicide Apply to soil surface prior to mulching where shown on drawings. Install according to manufacturer's recommended rate of application and application procedures. PLANTINGS 02950-7 Mac Design Avon, CO f l FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 F B. Wood Mulch-tree and shrub areas. � Place evenly within planting beds and within all tree wells in grass areas at a depth of 3". C. "Soil Pep" Soil Conditioner-perennial/groundcover areas Place evenly within planting beds at a depth of 1". � D. Weed Barrier Lay on soil surface, prior to mulching, at all rock/cobble mulch areas. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations and carefully place around plants. Barrier shall not be exposed to view from any location. � E. Cobble Mulch � Place layer of River Rock cobble, where shown on plan, evenly over weed barrier fabric so i that no weed barrier is exposed. 3.5 BOULDER PLACEMENT � fi A. Install individual boulders where shown on ptan. Boulders within boulder groupings to be tightly fitted and placed so as to minimize gaps between boulders. Individually placed � boulders shall be buried a minimum of Y4 their width into grade. � 3.6 MAINTENANCE � A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting and continue until final acceptance. � 4 3.7 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION ` � A. During planting work, store materials and equipment where directed. Keep pavements � clean and work areas in an orderly condition. Protect planting work and materials from damage due to landscape and other contractor operations or trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. ; � 3.8 FINAL ACCEPTANCE � A. At the completion of the 60-day maintenance period, the Owner's representative will upon � request review the landscape work to determine final acceptance. Where reviewed work � does not comply with the requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reviewed again by the Owner's representative and found to be ' acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from the project site. END OF SECTION 02950 �� F � � P PLANTINGS 02950-8 � ` Mac Design Avon, CO � i€ t ' f � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 02960—SEEDING AND SODDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUWIMARY A. This section includes sodding and seeding work as shown on the drawings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications Install work using skilled persons proficient in the trades required in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with recognized standards of workmanship. Installer shall have not less than five year's successful experience with installation of similar work. B. Reference Standards 1. ASPA: American Sod_Producers Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples and Product Certification Submit to Landscape Architect and Owner's representative not less than 14 days prior to scheduled delivery of these materials: 1. Samples: a. Sod:one 18"x6' roll of sod and name and address of supplier. b. Mulch (for seeding): 1 cubic foot of each specified mulch type. 2. Product Certification: a. Fertilizer: manufacturer's statement of analysis for each specified fertilizer type. b. Seed: supplier's statement of analysis stating for each seed type; name and address of seller, lot number, test date, seed type and variety, purity and germination percentage, noxious weeds by name and number per pound. B. Delivery Tickets Submit delivery tickets to Landscape Architect within seven (7) days after delivery of these materials: 1. Fertilizer 2. Seed 3. Seed Mulch SEEDING AND SODDING 02960- 1 Mac Design Avon, CO � � ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET £ VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE � R � A. General 1. Seed: Deliver in original unopened containers. Protect materials from animals and moisture. Wet, moldy, open or broken packages will not be accepted. Non-flowing � materials will be rejected. ; 2. Sod: Deliver properly loaded on vehicles and protected from exposure to sun, wind � and heat. Do not drop sod from loading carts, trucks or pallets. g � � 4 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 A. Environmental Conditions £ � No work shall occur when soil is in a frozen or wet condition causing it to clump and � become non-friable. B. Sequencing ; Sodding and seeding work shall occur after installation of irrigation system, soil preparation � � and planting. t: € � 1.6 INSPECTIONS/MAINTENANCE PERIOD ' See Section 02950 - 1.5. � � 1.7 WARRANTY t � A. Sodd�d Areas #' 1. Warrant all sod for a period of 60 non-dormant days from Date of Final Acceptance f against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from neglect by owner, abuse, or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or ;` incidents which are beyond the landscape installer's control. ` 2. Remove and replace all sod found to be bare or with dead grass, larger than 4 square ; inches in area, or where there is not a healthy, green, well-rooted stand of grass. ;. Replace immediately as sod is removed as many times as necessary to provide an acceptable sod through the duration of the warranty period. Replacement sod and = installation shall comply with specifications for original sod. 3. Warrant all replacement sod for 60 non-dormant days following replacement. { ; � � SEEDING AND SODDING 02960-2 � _ Mac Design Avon, CO = t f i: � s � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Seeded Areas 1. Warrant all seed for a period of 60 non-dormant days from Date of Final Acceptance against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from neglect by owner, abuse, or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents which are beyond the landscape installer's control. 2. Remove and reseed all seeded areas found to be bare or with dead grass, larger than one (1) square foot in area or where there is not a satisfactory stand of grass. A satisfactory stand shall be defined as a minimum of 12 grass seedlings per square foot. Replacement seed and installation shall comply with specifications for original seeding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Sod Provide sod consisting of 100% Bluegrass. Sod shall be strongly rooted and free of diseases, insects, stones and other plants. Sod shall be capable of growth and development when planted and shall not be dormant. All yellow areas without normal green color will be rejected. Cut sod using an approved method in accordance with local governing American Sod Producers Association. Cut sod in strips not more than 18" wide , by 6' long (1 sq. yd.) with a thickness of 3/4 to 1-1/4". Height of grass blades to be 1-1/2 - 2". B. Seed Mix Multi-Color High Altitude Mix 30% Ephraim Crested Wheatgrass 25% Sheep Fescue 15% Perennial Rye 15%Chewings Fescue 10% Kentucky Bluegrass 5% Rocky Mountain Wildflower Mix Hydroseeded at 50 Ibs/acre Seed Mix available through; Arkansas Valley Seed 4625 Colorado Blvd. Denver, CO 80216 (877) 957-3337 www.avseeds.com or approved equal. SEEDING AND SODDING 02960-3 Mac Design Avon, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 C. Fertilizer � Biosol Organic Fertilizer. Commercial product of uniform composition, free flowing and ; conforming to applicable State and Federal laws. Deliver in original, unopened containers. D. Mulch Hydraulic Mulching— 100%virgin wood cellulose fiber mulch shall be; 1. Free of growth or germination inhibiting ingredients. 2. Specially manufactured for use in hydraulic seeding and mulching equipment. 3. Minimum organic matter content of 95%. 4. Minimum moisture content of 12%. 5. Water absorption potential of 800-900%for wood cellulose fiber mulch. E. Tackifier t StarTak 600 Organic Tackifier, or approved equal. F. Water z Supplied and distributed from irrigation system. Owner shall pay for cost of water after water meter is installed. ,; PART 3 - EXECUTION ' � 3.1 EXAMINATION ;: � Examine all areas to verify conditions are acceptable for proper installation of sod or seed. f � ; • � 3.2 PREPARATtON � A. Soil Preparation � Complete work specified prior to sod and seed installation. } f 3 � � SEEDING AND SODDING 02960-4 � Mac Design Avon, CO } f � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Sodding 1. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of cutting. Do not plant if sod is dormant or ground is frozen. 2. Lay sod on a firm moist sub grade. 3. Lay sod parallel to contours to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips. Do not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. 4. Roll or tamp thoroughly to bond sod to sub grade. Place sifted soil into minor cracks between sod strips. Remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent grass. 5. On slopes greater than 25% (4:1), secure strips to sub grade with wood pins 1" in diameter by 6" long. Place a minimum of 5 pins along the side of each strip (minimum of 10 pins per sod strip). 6. Spread fertilizer over all sodded areas at a rate of 25 pounds per 1000 square feet. 7. Water thoroughly until moisture permeates to 4-6"depth. B. HYDRO-SEEDING and Mulching 1. Equipment. Equipment used and methods for hydraulic seeding and hydraulic mulching must meet the following criteria: a. Equipment shall include a pump capable of being operated at one hun- �� dred (100) psi. b. Equipment shall have an acceptable gauge and nozzle adaptable to hydraulic seeding and mulching requirements. c. Storage tanks shall have a means of agitation and a means of estimation used or remaining in the tank. d. Hydraulic hydro-seeding and hydro-mulching equipment shall apply slurry mixture uniformly at optimum angle of application. Re-apply � slurry mixture where application is not uniform. e. Use proper nozzles for application and provide hose extensions to propel mulch slurry to inaccessible areas. Agitate slurry mix con- stantly during spraying to keep it homogeneous and avoid blockage to pipes. 2. HYDRO-SEEDING a. Proceed with hydro-seeding only after final grade has been approved by Owner's Representative. b. Seeding Season: seeding shall occur after spring thaw and before consistent ground freeze. "Spring thaw"shall be defined as the earliest date in a calendar year in which seed can be buried Y2" into the surface soil (topsoil) through normal seeding methods. "Consistent ground freeze"shall be defined as that time during the fall months in which the surface soil (topsoil), due to freeze conditions, prevents burying the seed Yz"through normal seeding operations. At no time shall seed be sown, or otherwise planted when the surface soil or topsoil is in a fro- zen or crusted state. SEEDING AND SODDING 02960-5 Mac Design Avon,CO � s s FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 c. Seeding shall be by a hydraulic type seeding method. Thoroughly mix � grass seed, fertilizer, and small amount of fiber mulch with sufficient � water and apply with hydraulic seeder to obtain following slurry mixture and application rates: 1. Grass Seed Mix—50 Ibs/acre � 2. Fertilizer—800 Ibs/acre. z : 3. Fiber mulch. A small amount of wood fiber mulch shall be mixed in the seed slurry to bind the seed mix to the soil and to allow visible metering of hydraulic seeding application. ' k A broadcast and/or hand method of seeding may be approved by # Owner's representative on small areas not accessible to hydraulic g seeding methods. Seeding rates shall be amended to reflect different ` seeding methods. �� € d. _ Seed shall not be sown during windy weather. and shall not be done in � the presence of free water resulting from rain, melting snow, or other > - z causes. y e. Areas not properly seeded or areas damaged due to contractor's neg- g ligence shall be repaired and re-seeded in an acceptable manner at x the contractor's expense. Seeded areas damaged due to circum- stances beyond the contractor's control shall be repaired and re Y seeded as ordered. Payment for this corrective work,when ordered, �' shall be at the contract prices. � f. Seeding of portions of the areas designated may be permitted before construction is competed in order to take advantage of growing condi- � tions. � � ; : s 3. HYDRO-MULCHING a. Hydraulic Mulching — 100%virgin wood cellulose fiber mulch shall be . added after the appropriate quantities of tackifier and water have been F placed in the slurry tank. All ingredients shall be mixed to form � homogeneous slurry. Using the color of the mulch as a metering agent, the operator shall spray apply the slurry mixture uniformly over the � previously seeded area. Unless otherwise recommended by product manufacturer/distributor, wood cellulose fiber mulch and tackifier shall = be applied at following rates: F: 1. Fiber Mulch —2000 Ibs per acre. � 2. Tackifier. 651bs/acre. � b. Seeded area shall be mulched with wood cellulose fiber mulch within 24 hours after seeding. Areas not mulched within 24 hours after seed- ` ing must be reseeded with specified seed mix at the contractor's ex- pense prior to mulching. c. Hydraulic mulching shall not be done in the presence of free water re- � sulting from rain, melting snow, or other causes. _ � � � ` � SEEDING AND SODDING 02960-6 � Mac Design Avon, CO _ � � F � z . ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 d. Areas not properly mulched or areas damaged due to contractor's negligence shall be repaired and remulched in an acceptable manner at the contractor's expense. Hydraulic mulch removed by circum stances beyond the contractor's control shall be repaired and remulched as ordered. Payment for this corrective work,when or- dered, shall be at contract prices. 3.4 MAINTENANCE A. Sodded Areas 1. The maintenance period shall begin immediately after each area is sodded and continue until final acceptance of project. During this time, the contractor shall be responsible for watering, weeding, mowing, and all related work as necessary to ensure that sodded areas are in a vigorous growing condition. Provide all supervision, labor, material and equipment to maintain sodded areas. 2. Water sodded areas at a regular schedule to be accepted by landscape architect until stand of grass is established. After sod is established, water lawn at a regular schedule to be accepted by owner. 3. Areas in which there is not a satisfactory stand at the expiration of the one-year guarantee period shall be re-sodded as necessary. 4. Mow sodded areas and trim around trees, planting beds, walls and walks (keeping mulch in saucers and beds), maintaining 2" to 2-3/4" in height. Do not remove more than 33% of grass leaf in a single mowing. Remove grass clippings from pavement areas. 5. Fertilize. 6. Weed control, as needed, using selective herbicides approved by owner. 7. Insect and disease control, as needed, using insecticide and fungicide approved by owner. B. Seeded Areas 1. The maintenance period shall begin immediately after each area is seeded and continue until final acceptance of project. During this time, the contractor shall be responsible for watering, weeding, and all related work as necessary to ensure that seeded areas are in a vigorous growing condition. Provide all supervision, labor, material and equipment to maintain seeded areas. 2. Water seeded areas at a regular schedule to be accepted by landscape architect until stand of grass is established. 3. Areas in which there is not a satisfactory stand at the expiration of the one-year guarantee period shall be reseeded as necessary. 4. Weed control, as needed, by hand or using selective herbicides approved by owner. 5. Insect and disease control, as needed, using insecticide and fungicide approved by owner. � SEEDING AND SODDING 02960-7 Mac Design Avon, CO �' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 r 3.5 PROTECTION � A. Keep equipment, vehicles and foot traffic off all sodded and seeded areas. All damaged materials shall be replaced and all damaged areas restored to original condition. � 3.6 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. At the completion of the 60-day maintenance period, the Owner's representative will, upon request, review the landscape work to determine final acceptance. Where reviewed work f does not comply with the requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reviewed again by the Owner's representative and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected materials promptly from the project site. END OF SECTION 02960 � � � � � � � �' I `r t i [ i `s 2 i s k _ } _ 2 � � SEEDING AND SODDING 02960-8 x� Mac Design Avon,CO r c FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 03300 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs-0n-grade. 5. Concrete toppings. 7. Building walls. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork"for drainage fill under slabs-on�rade. 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks. 6. Division 7 Section "Underslab Vapor Retarders". 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-fumace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. E. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 F. Samples: For waterstops . � G. Welding certificates. f H. Qualification Data: For Installerand manufacturer. I. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates. Include senrice record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to afkali aggregate reactivity. J. Materia� Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. �� 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Semirigid joint filler. � F 13. Joint-filler strips. 14. Repair materials. ° F K. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with 4 specified tolerances per Owner. � j � L. Field quality-control test and inspection reports per Division 1 Section "Qualitv �: Requirements". � M. Minutes of preinstallation conference. t 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flafinrork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI- certified Concrete Flafinrork Technician. > B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed E concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for � production facilities and equipment. � 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." � � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 i OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ;: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician -Grade II. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel." F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. �� 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. H. Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade and formed-surface panels to demonstrate rypical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build panel approximately 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m) for slab-on-grade and 100 sq. � ft. (9.3 sq. m) for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Approved panels may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � ; i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field � quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting � procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, vapor- ` retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. : ; 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent � bending and damage. ; B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants. � � PART2-PRODUCTS K�� 2.1 MANUFACTURERS `' ; A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: ` 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may � ; be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. ; ; 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, � manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, � but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS � A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, ; true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Fumish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. � , 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: � a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved s material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. { C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced ; plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt ' ; � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 £' OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � i � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum. H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. I. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Fumish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm)to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Fumish ties that,when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Fumish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 60 percent. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. C. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. • � ' , � , �� H. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, [as drawn], flat sheets{��;a�a�i�ed}. I. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496. K. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 ; E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, � g and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture � E bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual ` of Standard Practice,"of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: � € 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact � forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless- steel bar supports. � � � � 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS ' A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, � brand, and source, throughout Project: � € � 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II , gray . Supplement with the following: f` F a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. ; b. Ground Granulated Blast-Fumace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. � � 2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag � cement. ` .. x B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. ` � C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, � i. - graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data � of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions �: using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. _ � 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. � 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. � E. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. ; � 1 2.6 ADMIXTURES � k A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. : � B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible � with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding � those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures � containing calcium chloride. � 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. ' 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. ` . 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. s 4. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, ; Type G. � � ' �: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � ? � t r � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. � ' , , , • . , .; . . ; . , . . .; . . , .; . . . , � . ; . . , .; . . ; . , . . .; . . , .; . . ; . 2.8 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent • passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate comers, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Greenstreak. b. Progress Unlimited, Inc. c. Williams Products, Inc. 2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb . 3. Dimensions: 4 inches by 3/16 inch thick (100 mm by 4.75 mm thick) ; nontapered. C. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate comers, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Available Manufacturers: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO : � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 a. Bometals, Inc. � b. Greenstreak. c. Meadows,W. R., Inc. d. Murphy, Paul Plastics Co. e. Progress Unlimited, Inc. f. Tamms Industries, Inc. g. Vinylex Corp. 2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb . 3. Dimensions: 4 inches by 3/16 inch thick (100 mm by 4.75 mm thick) ; - nontapered. 2.9 VAPOR RETARDERS �� A. Reference Division 7 Section "Underslab Vapor Retarders". 2.10 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS G. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surFaces. 1. Available Products: e. Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula. $ f. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard. ,� : g. Euclid Chemical Company(The); Euco Diamond Hard. ` i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard. � j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Liqui-Hard. . � 2.11 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for ° application to fresh concrete. _ 1. Available Products: � k t a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm. b. Burke by Edoco; BurkeFilm. ` c. ChemMasters;Spray-Film. d. Conspec Marketing 8� Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior � Company;Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film. f. Euclid Chemical Company(The); Eucobar. ` g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid. ; h. Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con. j. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Confilm. ; k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre. � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 � x OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 i. Metalcrete Industries;Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm. n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm. o. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Finishing Aid. p. Unitex; Pro-Film. q. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Monofilm ER. r. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m)when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap- polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. 1. Available Products: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. Burke by Edoco;Aqua Resin Cure. c. ChemMasters;Safe-Cure Clear. �. d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). f. Euclid Chemical Company(The); Kurez DR VOX. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. h. Lambert Corporation;Aqua Kure-Clear. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. � j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear. k. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E. I. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Resi-Chem Clear Cure. m. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Horncure WB 30. n. Unitex; Hydro Cure 309. o. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Maxcure Resin Clear. p. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100. 2.12 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion-and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self�xpanding cork. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � r FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to � hardened concrete. E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized ` steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of , { concrete or debris. y 2.13 REPAIR MATERIALS � A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can �` � be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)and that can be feathered at edges to �' � match adjacent floor elevations. � » # 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic � � cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, r ` conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse � sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. � 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested � according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. € B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can ; be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)and that can be feathered at edges to �: match adjacent floor elevations. � _ � 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic � cement as defined in ASTM C 219. � 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, � and application. ti� 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse � sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when ; S tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. � ;: 2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL _ � A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the ; basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. ; x 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed � mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. R !' B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other i than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. E 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. � � 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. f � � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-10 k ' OZ Architecture Boulder,CO i E :i i t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. 2.15 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture per Structural Notes: B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture per Structural Notes: C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture per Structural Notes: D. Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal weight concrete mixture per Structural Notes: F. Concrete Toppings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture per Structural Notes: H. Building Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture per Structural Notes: 2.16 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." 2.17 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and fumish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is befinreen 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-11 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART 3-EXECUTION � � 3.1 FORMWORK � A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to AC1301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. := x B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. ti C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as � follows: y: _ € 1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete ` surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete �' surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 �� vertical. ; 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. � ' 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. _ 4 � F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. � G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of K formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and j securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in ' forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. ' � I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing ; such items. R � J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's ' written instructions, before placing reinforcement. � � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 12 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � r � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions fumished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of walls and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C)for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. • C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 13 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � 4' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 1. Weld reinforcin bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated. � 9 ' D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh ' spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.7 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. " 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across ;; construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement r through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. � 5. Space vertical joinfs in walls . Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near ; corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against ' hardened or partiafly hardened concrete surfaces. � � C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-0n-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, � sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth � equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows b B � 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of � contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on `a x concrete surfaces. � 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with � shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise s damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. ` D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at ` slab junctions with vertical surFaces, such as column pedestals,foundation walls, grade t beams, and other locations, as indicated. � 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished � concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. � 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than ¢ 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in � Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants,"are indicated. � t f � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-14 {: OZ Architecture Boulder,CO �. � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.8 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness, If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 15 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET } VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly � worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. � 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. � F 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open- textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb stab surfaces before starting finishing operations. � F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete = work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing ' actions,or low temperatures. 2 ? 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 k deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture � temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place � concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. � 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents � or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture ° designs. � G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. � Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, � � provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. � ; Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. � 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. i 3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES � A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that � exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. ' 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view . � � B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, _ arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified � limits on formed-surface irregularities. t 1. Apply to concrete surFaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete . � D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surFaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture � { CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 16 € OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � :� i: i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surFaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 1 direction. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings . C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid- applied or sheet waterproofing or built-up or membrane roofing. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or � another thin-film-finish coating system . 2 ' � • 3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or other tile is to be installed by thin-set method and another floor slab finish is not otherwise indicated. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 17 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO - _ , � �. 4 { # FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS � � � A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise = indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as i specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete = filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is ; still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with comers, � intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. ; s , C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and � foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at 4 correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing " machines and equipment. D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and � associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, ; tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces. � 3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or �� hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for � hot-weather protection during curing. � ; B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h (1 � kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to � . manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. � # C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, � moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, � continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. � � D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surFaces. E. Cure concrete according to AC1308.1, by one or a combination of the following � methods: � 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days � with the following materials: � � a. Water. � b. Continuous water-fog spray. ; ; g � � ,: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-18 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO ?' F FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture- retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture- retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuiry of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3.14 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. • 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 28 days old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.15 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 19 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � t ; � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints � until construction traffic has permanently ceased. �` k B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave ; contact faces of joint clean and dry. � C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after = � hardening. g 3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS = t > A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. r` Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's �. approval. � f B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement � to finro and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only � enough water for handling and placing. ;` C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, � cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on £ the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. t 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids � more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than ;,,� 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. F: Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. � Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form- t tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement £ and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match = surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture � and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. ; 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and 5 structural performance as determined by Architect. � � � D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for t: finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high ' areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a � sloped template. ' ; 1. Repair finished surFaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, ; popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through � unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. � 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. � F F; �; � � � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-20 } OZ Architecture Boulder, CO x' � � k � k FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surFace. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm)or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surFaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent�has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. C. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-21 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO f: % F1RST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to � ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m)or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m)or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive- strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five t are used. 3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one ' test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of � each concrete mixture. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air ; temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) _ and above, and one test for each composite sample. 6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lighfinreight concrete; � � one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's. pour of each concrete mixture. � ` 7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31 M. s a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for =' each composite sample. " � b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each � . composite sample. � k � 8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory- cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. � a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength ' from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and � tested at age indicated. i K _ k 9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any = three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below ` specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). } 11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and � Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests � � z: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-22 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. 12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with the Contract Documents. E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M)within 48 hours of finishing. END OF SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-23 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 4 € i t 8 � # # # � � t {.. t i i f � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-24 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO t �; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 03541 -GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling underlayment for application below interior floor coverings. � 2. Sound-control mat installed under pvpsum underlavment. 2 B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Sections for patching and leveling compounds applied with floor coverings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certifying that products are compatible. F. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project. B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in writing that products are compatible. D. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment systems identical to those of assemblies tested for STC and IIC ratings per ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 492 by a qualified testing agency. E. Underlayments for Resilient Flooring: Comply with ASTM F 2419 "Standard Practice for Installation of Thick Poured Gypsum Concrete Underlayments and Preparation of the SurFace to Receive Resilient Flooring" unless more restrictive or more stringent requirements are indicated. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT 03541 -1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO x � � f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING � A. Store materiais to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration f from moisture or other detrimental effects. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting � underlayment performance. � 1. Place gypsum-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and x temperature of substrates are befinreen 50 and 80 deg F. ` E # 1.8 COORDINATION � A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and adhesives, specified in Division 09 Sections, to ensure compatibility of products. ` PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS � � ` A. Underlayment: Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling product that can be applied in ` minimum uniform thickness of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match � adjacent floor elevations. � } 2. Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C 219. 3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2500 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as recommended ; by underlayment manufacturer. � � 1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for ` underlayment thickness required. i C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F. D. Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal $ lath or other corrosion-resistant reinforcement where recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. E. Primer. Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, t conditions, and application indicated. ;; F. Sealer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for conditions and application indicated, and acceptable to finish flooring manufacturer. � ?� GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT 03541 -2 _ OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ` 4 � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.2 ACCESSORIES A Sound-Control Mat: 1. Products: Subiect to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to. the followinq: � a. Maxxon Corporation; Acoustimat II . D. Perimeter Isolation Strip: When required, of type acceptable to underlayment manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting perFormance. 1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting)through underlayment. 2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. C. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and remove s�nding dust. 1. Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer. F. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Sound Control Mat: Install sound control materials accordinq to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Do not install mechanical fasteners that penetrate throuqh the sound control materials. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer. GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT 03541 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO , � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate � , and intercoat adhesion. � £ 3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to ; continue through underlayment. � � ' B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. � b f C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. For underlayment incorporating � radiant heat system components, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for ` placement. � 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. � ; , D. Sealer: Apply sealer to underlayment areas as recommended by unde�layment ; manufacturer and finish flooring manufacturer. ; E. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination ( during application and curing processes. � � F. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in ; writing by underlayment manufacturer. � I G. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, € including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped. � � �: 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � # � � A. Slump Test: Test for slump at the beginning of each installation in order to verify required �. mix. Slump tests shall then be taken periodically during installation to verify that the � required slump is maintained. Slump tests shall be conducted using a 2" by 4" (approx. �: 51mm by 102mm) cylinder. The acceptable patty size should be 7-1/2" (approx. 191mm) ` plus or minus 1/2"(approx. 13mm) in diameter or as recommended by manufacturer. � f � B. Field Samples: Testing shall be done in accordance with ASTM modified C472 testing ` procedures, using 2"(approx. 51 mm)split brass molds. At least one set of three (3) molded t � cube samples shall be taken for every 5,000 sq.ft. of underlayment area 4 �,. 3.5 PROTECTION i A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction � period. � € f' 'j END OF SECTION 03541 � k t � F � #' g GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT 03541 -4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � f r � � 3 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units(CMUs). 13. Mortar and grout. 14. Reinforcing steel. 15. Masonry joint reinforcement. 16. Ties and anchors. 17. Embedded flashing. 18. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for large- scale mockups incorporating concrete masonry. ..5. Division 4 Section "Stone Masonry"for anchored stone veneer. 6. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for dampproofing applied to cavity face of backup wythes of cavity walls. 9. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping at openings in masonry walls. 11. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry. C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: � 1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors, installed under Division 3 Section "Cast-in- Place Concrete." 2. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, installed under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 2. Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO N � £ FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 s 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � _ � A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (fm)at 28 days. t B. Determine net-area compressive strength (fm) of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) � according to Table 21-D in the Uniform Building Code. } C. Confirm net-area compressive strength (fm) of masonry by testing masonry prisms k x according to UBC Standard 21-17. 1.5 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � B. Shop Drawings: For the following: ; � 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. ; 3. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing ; bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." 4. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. �� ; D. Samples for Verification: For each rype and color of the following: � 10. Accessories embedded in mason . � � rY � � F. Qualification Data: For testing agency. ' x G. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within � >: standards. Provide for each rype and size of the following: 4 1. Masonry units. ` `s: a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. _ e. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and " � t' calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. � � 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. ; 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of rype and proportions of ingredients. � 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. ; 5. Reinforcing bars. ' 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. H. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and � proportions of ingredients. � � UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ` C' P Y FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO _ MARCH 4, 2010 1. Include test reports, per UBC Standard 21 16, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. 2. Include test reports, per UBC Standard 21-18, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. I. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Table 21-D in the Uniform Building Code. J. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of inethods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner . Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 140. 3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, per UBC Standard 21-16. 4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, per UBC Standard 21-18. 5. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, per UBC Standard 21-17. E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means,as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements"for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for typical interior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches(1200 mm) high by full thickness. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � �, 3 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � $ � f 3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. � 4. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant � membrane. � 5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; � relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. � a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such ` deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. � € H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 'S k � 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 3 A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in � an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely � tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. , � f B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. � � f � C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained � and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting � and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery z containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal z dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. � ; E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and {: accumulation of dirt and oil. s' � ; 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS x A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills � with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. � i 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover ; securely in place. ` 2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other ' wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to � unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. f ° B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for � E at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. � ; UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO E s , 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 C. Stam Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surFace. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surFaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in Section 2104.3 in the Uniform Building Code. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6�TMS 602. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs) A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810-5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO i € 3 Y a FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET { VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ; 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, � t headers, bonding, and other special conditions. x 2. Provide square-edged units for outside comers, unless otherwise indicated. C. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 . ` ; ; _ 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area { compressive strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa) . }; 2. Weight Classification: Medium weight . � � 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal �' dimensions. '' 5. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by � Architect's sample. � 6. Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct £ application of plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates. ; � 2.4 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS ` t A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, at Contractor's option, complying t with requirements below. � � s B. Concrete Lintels: Precast units made from concrete matching concrete masonry units ; in color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or � r required to support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by same method used for concrete masonry units. � C. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with ; requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete.° { D. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam j ;; concrete masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse ':` grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in- � place lintels until cured. 2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS � p � f t' A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold- ; weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce � mortar color indicated. § � B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207 , Type S. � C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with � ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, `' Type S. ' � � H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. � � UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810-6 � _ OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ' z , i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16(1.18-mm) sieve. I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. N. Water: Potable. 2.10 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60(Grade 420). B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951 . 1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm)o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated comer and �. tee units. _ C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Smgle Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 2.11 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Reference Division 4 Section "Stone Masonry"for ties and anchors for anchored stone veneer. B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 5. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153lA 153M. 7. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. F. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; i � E Y � t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ; VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 = : 2. Tie Section for Steel Frame: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 � ; inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.188-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter, hot- 5 dip galvanized steel wire. 3. Connector Section for Concrete: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in fi concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication . 0.064-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, � t galvanized sheet may be used at interior walls, untess otherwise indicated. � 4. Tie Section for Concrete: Corrugated metal ties with dovetail tabs for inserting 4` � into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to within 1 inch (25 mm) of � masonry face. � G. Partition Top anchors: 0.097-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (150 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic ' tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, z` hot-dip galvanized after fabrication . ' � H. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick by 24 inches (600 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (50 mm) or with cross pins, unless otherwise indicated . �; � 1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M . � 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS a A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts. � s B. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, ` = fabricated from 0.034-inch (0.9-mm), galvanized steel sheet. C. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, ; where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, � Class C; of dimensions indicated. � D. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, with ; capabiliry to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when �; installed in solid or grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. ' 1. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with i ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns)for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). } 2.13 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS � f A. Reference Division 4 Section "Stone Masonry'. � € r € � � UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810-8 � t OZ Architecture Boulder, CO € �: ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.14 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Reference Division 4 Section "Stone Masonry". G. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-inch (3.6-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either finro loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated. 1. Available Products: a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-WaI Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann 8�Barnard, Inc.; #RB or#RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or pouble O-Ring Rebar Positioner. 2.18 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. � 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Fumish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 UBC Standard 21-15, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M . 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S . 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. G. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 . 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.19 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL � _ � A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality- # control testing indicated below: ': ; 1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner . x 2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. � w C. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit furnished, per ASTM C 140. � � PART 3-EXECUTION � 3.1 EXAMINATION s � A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for � installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. ' 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. z 3. �� Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to f � verify actual locations of piping connections. � p � f C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. � � 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL ' ' ; A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full ` thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. ; , B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. � C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After ; installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately � adjacent to opening. � " D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a � continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; �, provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting ` of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges � concealed. � i E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors � and textures. ' ¢ r � 3 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810- 10 ; 3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; �: � t i , FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. H. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6lTMS 602 and with the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet(6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch(12 mm) maximum. 3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet(3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed joint and head joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. � B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond ; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches (100-mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810- 11 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � � Ap £. # FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET �' � VAfL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � # � � F. Fill space befinreen steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise � = indicated. � � G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a � layer of inetal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout � into core. � R � H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under � _ bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. � I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story and terminate as � indicated.At fire-rated partitions, treat joint befinreen top of partition and underside of ; structure above to comply with Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." � � � � 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING � f b A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: ` 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed � joints. � 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. � 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course � on footings. �� 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting � course on footings where cells are not grouted. � � � G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than � joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. � ; 4 E. H. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes E (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. . P ; � 3.8 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap ; reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches(150 mm). ; S 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm)o.c. 4 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls t and parapet walls. � 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall � openings and extending 12 inches(305 mm) beyond openings. ; , a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. 4 B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. � C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. �l ; � ; UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810- 12 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO { f �' t ¢ i: # FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO _ MARCH 4, 2010 D. Provide contmuity at corners by using prefabricated L shaped units. 3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structurai members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm)o.c. vertically and 36 inches(915 mm)o.c. horizontally. 3.10 ANCHORING STONE MASONRY VENEERS A. Reference Division 4 Section "Stone Masonry'. 3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in . exposed faces for application of.sealant. 2. Install preformed control joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant. 3.12 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide concrete or masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810- 13 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � . � x FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 =� t 3.14 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION � a � t ! A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to s support reinforced masonry elements during construction. y 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed € masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar � and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during = construction and curing of reinforced masonry. ` 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have > ' hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that � may be placed on them during construction. G B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6lTMS 602 . � C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. ' 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for � grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. � { 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm) . � 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL �� ' i i A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections ; and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as .� , needed to perform inspections. ;: r € 1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and = grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. � B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting = agency to perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports: 1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. � 2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done �: � at Contractor's expense. : � C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) of wall area or ; portion thereof. ; E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140. F. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780 . Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. G. Grout Test(Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019 . � H. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, per ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and at 28 days. �. � � UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810- 14 �: OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � : � i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.17 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including comers, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 3.18 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least finro parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished , grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810-15 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � B S. F t # � S s i � f i 4 S v i # t f � t t' � t � £ UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810-16 ' OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 04860-STONE MASONRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following applications of stone masonry: 2. Anchored to concrete backup. 4. Anchored to wood and cold-formed metal framing and to sheathing. B. Related Sections: 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements° for large- scale mockups incorporating stone masonry. 5. Division 4 Section"Unit Masonry Assemblies"for concrete masonry. 6. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for steel lintels. 8. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing not otherwise specified in this Section. C. Products installed, but not fumished, in this Section include: 1. Steel lintels for stone masonry specified in Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications." 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: • 1. For each stone type indicated. Include at least three samples in each set for each type of stone, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics expected in completed Work. Samples will establish the standard by which stone provided will be judged. � E. Material Certificates: Include statements of material aroperties indicatinct 2 compliance with requirements includinq compliance with standards and tvpe desiqnations within standards. Provide for each tvpe and size of the followinq: 1. Cementitious materials. Include brand,tvpe, and name of manufacturer. F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs experienced stonemasons and stone fitters. STONE MASONRY 04860-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � b � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET f VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain stone, from one quarry with resources to provide � materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, r including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . s 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ; t A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platForms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. . , , 1 ' ' D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. � � �. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS ; A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills 7 with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone ; masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. � B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining the face of stone masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. ;: 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry. u C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. � STONE MASONRY 04860-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6lTMS 602. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of veneer anchors,flashing and similar items to be built into stone masonry. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.5 QUARTZ-BASED STONE A. Quartz-Based Stone: Comply with ASTM C 616. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following : a. Colorado buff strip stone. .. B. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. 2.7 MORTAR MATERIALS . A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. � , . F. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows: 1. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. H. Water: Potable. 2.8 VENEER ANCHORS A. Materials: STONE MASONRY 04860-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO - - � � r + FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 ; . . , , � � � 2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Tvpe 304. 4 3. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled, carbon-steei sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. B. Size: Sufficient to extend at least halfway, but not less than 1-1/2 inches, through stone masonry and with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. ; � C. Wire Veneer Ties: Wire ties formed from W1.7 or 0.148-inch- diameter, �ip .i Qa�e�stainless-steel wire. � 1. Ties are bent in the form of loops with legs not less than 15 inches in length and with � last 2 inches bent at 90 degrees. ;: � F. Anchors at Wood Framing: ; 1. Anchor Section: Galvanized sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long, { with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch wide by � 3-5/8 inches long, stamped into center to provide a slot befinreen strap and plate for inserting wire tie. Provide anchor manufacturer's standard, self-adhering, modified '� bituminous gaskets manufactured to fit behind anchor plate. ; ;' 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Hohmann 8� Bamard; "DW-10HS". ` � � G. Anchors at Cold Formed Metal Framing: � 1. Anchor Section: Gasketed qalvanized sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long, with screw holes top and bottom; top and bottom ends bent to form � pronged legs of length to match thickness of insulation or sheathing; and raised rib- ` stiffened strap, 5/8 inch wide by 6 inches long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie. Provide anchor manufacturer's � standard, self-adhering, modified bituminous gaskets manufactured to fit behind �` f anchor plate and extend beyond pronged legs. ` 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Hohmann 8� Bamard; "X-Seal Anchor". H. Anchors at Concrete Substrate: � 1. Anchor Section: Zinc-alloy barrel section with flanged, gasketed head with eye and � corrosion-resistant, self-drilling screw. Eye designed to receive wire tie and to serve = as head for drilling fastener into framing. Barrel length to suit substrate thickness, � allowing screw to seat directly against face of substrate with flanged head covering hole in substrate. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Hohmann 8� Bamard; "Concrete Seal Tie". K. Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 9�4 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than 3 exposed threads, and with organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117. � �; M. Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Wood Studs: Self-drilling, bugle-head or wafer-head � � wood screws recommended by veneer anchor manufacturer for fastening to wood studs; � � � STONE MASONRY 04860-4 �� OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 not less than No. 10, 1-1/2 inches long, and with organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 500 hours per ASTM B 117. 2.9 STONE TRIM ANCHORS A. Stone Trim Anchors: Units fabricated with tabs or dowels designed to engage kerfs or holes in stone trim units and holes for fasteners or postinstalled anchor bolts for fastening to substrates or framing as indicated. B. Materials: Fabricate anchors from staintess steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. Fabricate dowels from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304. C. Fasteners for Stone Trim Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1. 2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual "and as follows: 1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653, G90 Coating, 0.028 inch thick. 4. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 7. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 8. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop where indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior face of wall and down into joint 3/8 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing tie- ins to metal flashing and for other unexposed flashing, use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following : 2) Carlisle Coatings 8�Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru Wall Flashing. 3) Dur-O-WaI, a Dayton Superior Company; Dur-O-Barrier-44. 4) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm- A-Barrier Wall Flashing. 5) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing. 6) Hohmann &Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash. 5. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. STONE MASONRY 04860-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET �� VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flexible Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's � standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. � ; 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES � B. Weep HoleNent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: ? 1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8 inch in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity behind stone masonry. Use only for weep holes. � 2.13 MORTAR MIXES ` A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. ��3. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to finro hours. Add remaining water in small � portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. � • � - . , C. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. t ` 1. Mortar for Setting Stone: Type N. 2. Mortar for Pointing Stone: Type N . 2.14 FABRICATION A. Fabricate stone to comply with sizes, shapes, and tolerances recommended by applicable stone association or, if none, by stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs. B. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on 3 Drawings. Dress joints (bed and vertical} straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. D. Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for E appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment. � STONE MASONRY 04860-6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles. F. Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following: 1. Thickness: 4—6 inches . G. Shape stone for type of masonry(pattem)as follows: 4. Sawed -bed, random-range ashtar with random course heights and random lengths (interrupted coursed). H. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups. 1. Finish: Split face . PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine concrete substrates to verify that veneer anchors, flashing, and other items installed in substrates and required for or extending into stone masonry are correctly installed. C. Examine wall framing, sheathing, and weather-resistant sheathing paper to verify that stud locations are suitable for spacing of veneer anchors and that installation will result in a weatherproof covering. . D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of weather-resistant sheathing paper before beginning stone installation. B. Coat concrete and unit masonry backup with asphalt dampproofing. C. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. 3.3 SETTING OF STONE MASONRY, GENERAL A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set. STONE MASONRY 04860-7 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with � requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use. E. Arrange stones in three-course, random-range ashlar pattern with random course heights, random lengths(interrupted coursed), and uniform joint widths. � H. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance. I. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Install supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone masonry in place. Set stone s accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. J. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where q minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 3/8 inch at narrowest points or more than 1/2 inch at widest points. r K. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Sealing joints is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." M. Install embedded flashing at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in ; wall, and where indicated. � 3.4 FLASHING AND WEEP HOLES A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in stone masonry at lintels, ledges, ; other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. � 5. Seal top edge of flashing within masonry cavity with continuous rubberized asphalt E flashing (flexible flashing). 6. At lintels , extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. t D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn � � wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 4. Space weep holes formed from wicking material 16 inches o.c. 6. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. ` � STONE MASONRY 04860-8 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.5 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more. E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORED STONE MASONRY A. Anchor stone masonry to concrete with individual wire veneer anchors unless otherwise indicated. Anchor stone masonry to stud framing with adjustable, screw-attached veneer anchors unless otherwise indicated. Fasten anchors through sheathing to framing with two screws. G. Where anchor fasteners penetrate weather- resistive barriers, provide gasketed fasteners, flashing tape, or other devices acceptable to weather- resistive barrier manufacturer that restore and maintain continuity of barrier. L. Embed veneer anchors in mortar joints of stone masonry at least halfway, but not less than 1-1/2 inches, through stone masonry and with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. P. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16�inches o.c. horizontally, with not less•than 1 anchor for each 1.78 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter. Q. Anchor stone trim with stone trim anchors where indicated. Install anchors by fastening to substrate and inserting tabs and dowels into kerfs and holes in stone units. Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with mortar. R. Set stone in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors into mortar joints as stone is set. S. Fill space between back of stone masonry and backup construction with mortar as stone is set. U. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 1/2 inch before setting mortar has hardened. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. STONE MASONRY 04860-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 4 � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.8 POtNTING � A. Prepare stone joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles. ` Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch deep until a uniform depth is formed. B. Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. C. Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to produce the following joint profile: 1. Joint Profile: Concave . ; 3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ` A. Remove and replace stone masonry of the following description: � 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective joints. ° 3. Stone masonry not matching approved samples and mockups. �� 4. Stone masonry not complying with other requirements indicated. ' B. Replace in a manner that results in stone masonry matching approved samples and � � mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. ` D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows: :, ; 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning stone masonry. 5. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution. ; 3.10 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE A. Excess Stone: Stack excess stone where directed by Owner for Owners use. B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. f 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in greatest dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." � STONE MASONRY 04860-10 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04860 STONE MASONRY 04860- 11 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � E � z FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � ;: , % i t a `s d r F # � � £ 1 E b j d I t- � STONE MASONRY 04860- 12 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO s� � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 05120 -STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steei. 4. Grout. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck"for field installation of shear connectors. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications, and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 4. Division 9 painting Sections and Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" for surFace preparation and priming requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,"that support design loads. , 1.3 PERFORMANCE R�QUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD- service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design," Part 4 . 2. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural-steel connections. B. . . C. Construction: Type 2, simple framing . 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � 6 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. � � - � g 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. ? 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field ; � welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. � , 9 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing befinreen shop and field bofts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 5. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include _ structural analysis data prepared by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. f D. Welding certificates. J E. Qualification Data: For Installer,fabricator, professional engineer, and testing agency. � # F. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products � comply with requirements: 1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Direct-tension indicators. _ 4. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. -! 5. Shear stud connectors. ¢ 6. Shop primers. � `` ; 7. Nonshrink grout. � s G. Source quality-control test reports. � � 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. € B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality t Certification Program and is designated an AISGCertified Plant, Category Sbd. `' 'b C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1 or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of ; Shop Painting Applicators." � � D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." � i E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3. AISCs "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings—Allowable Stress Design and k ' Plastic Design ." `,� STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO ' " MARCH 4,2010 4. A I S C s S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r t h e D e s i g n o f S t e e l H o l l o w S t r u c t u r a l S e c t i o n s. 5. AISC's"Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members ." 6. RCSC's"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without :� delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCT.URAL-STEEL MATERIALS C. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M or ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345) . D. Channels, Angles, M , S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345) . E. Pfate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M . G. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade[B] [C], structural tubing. I. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: As indicated in Structural Drawings . 2. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized. J. Medium-Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 65-35 (Grade 450-240), carbon steel. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � K FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 K. High-Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 148/A 148M,Grade 80-50 (Grade 550-345), � � carbon or alloy steel. �� L. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 4 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS,AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy ` hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; ` and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain . 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8,) compressible-washer type. a. Finish: Plain . B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers, plain. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 (ASTM F 959M,) Type 10.9, compressible-washer type, plain. C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, � heavy hex or round head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 � " (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) ? hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain . D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold- finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. � E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable . 1. Configuration: Hooked. � 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M)hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain . F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable , straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. � 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M)hardened carbon steel. � t STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 4. Finish: Plain . G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 193/A 193M . 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M)heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain . H. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A 108, Grade 1035, cold-finished carbon steel. I. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel. J. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel. 2.3 PRIMER D. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer. E. Gatvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20 . ., 2.4 GROUT A. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404, Size No.2. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. . 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design ." 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations. C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO �' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET £ VAIL,�COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 : D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes � perpendicular to metal surfaces. E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPGSP 1, "Solvent Cleaning or SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning ." f G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear � connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to ; AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. H. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel ; wall-opening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. £ I. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk, cross-recessed head machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches (250 mm) o.c., unless ' otherwise indicated. J. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut � bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. � 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS = A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSCs ` "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Pretensioned . B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"for mill material. £ � STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-6 r � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.8 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surFaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches(50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. SurFaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts,we►ds, and sharp edges. � 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. D. Painting: Apply a 1-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 2.9 GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing. 2. Galvanize lintels attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-7 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � � € � s FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET 1 VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according � _ to RCSCs"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 3 ; D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be � tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, � at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. ' 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on � finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. g s 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. ; 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. k � � E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- _ continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. 4 � PART 3-EXECUTION 3.'! EXAMINATION ,� � A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor ° rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance 3 with requirements. ' B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. � 3.2 PREPARATION � ° A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep ` t structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise � indicated. � 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. � g 3.3 ERECTION E A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to ` AISCs "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification t for Structural Steel Buildings—Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design ." ` � STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-8 '� OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � ; k FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond- reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly befinreen bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage- resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surFaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Engineer. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1. • H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. I. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Pretensioned . B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � f J, i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" � and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings—Allowable Stress Design and k Plastic Design " for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. ; 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment # of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Bui�dings and Bridges"for mill material. s 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. � B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. ; 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the fo�lowing inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: ` a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. M�gnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. � c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: � 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if wetd fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. � � E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply f with the Contract Documents. s 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION E A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-10 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surFaces. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. END OF SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-11 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � Rp 4 € { 6 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � � � � � � $ � ; ti � ( i � STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120- 12 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 05310 -STEEL DECK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 5. Composite floor deck. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"for concrete fill. 3. Division 5 Section "Stn.�cturaf Steel"for shop-and field-welded shear connectors. 4. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 5. Division 9 painting Sections for repair painting of primed deck. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each rype of deck, accessory, and product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Show layout and rypes of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. D. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer. E. Welding certificates. . H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel." D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and inspecting agency. STEEL DECK 05310- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; � k FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing '� and inspecting agency. f E. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck � according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." " 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ; A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, � storage, and handling. � B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a � waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. � � 1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS �� ,�. Available ti9anufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers ; offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, ,;� ; the following: 1. Steel Deck: a. ASC Profiles, Inc. b. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group. ` c. Consolidated Systems, Inc. f d. DACS, Inc. e. D-Mac Industries Inc. f. Epic Metals Corporation. g. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. h. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. i. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. j. Roof Deck, Inc. f k. United Steel Deck, Inc. � I. Valley Joist; Division of EBSCO Industries, Inc. # m. Verco Manufacturing Co. n. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation. 2.4 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattem ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and STEEL DECK 05310-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230) minimum, with top surface phosphatized and unpainted and underside surface shop primed with manufacturers' standard gray or white baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. 4. Profile Depth: 2 inches(51 mm) . 5. Design UncoatedSteel Thickness: 0.0358 inch (0.91 mm) . 6. Span Condition: As indicated . 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self�irilling, carbon- steel screws, No. 10(4.8-mm) minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm)design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth. G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated. H. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck. I. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick,with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter. L. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. M. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer. STEEL DECK 05310-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � �: � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 # � PART 3-EXECUTION � �� i � � 3.1 EXAMINATION � � A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for ; installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. � S ; 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL °: A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and a commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. � � � B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations. r C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. _ D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. � E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. � F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around o enin s and other work � € P 9 projecting through or adjacent to deck. ' G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. � H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. " 3.4 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by are spot(puddle)welds of the � surface diameter indicated and as follows: E' 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm) , nominal. 3. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated. B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of ; panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches(910 mm), and as follows: ; i � STEEL DECK 05310-4 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO z FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Mechanically fasten with self�irilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws. 2. Mechanically clinch or button punch. 3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch-(38-mm-) long welds. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches(38 mm) , with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped or butted at Contractor's option. D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. -. C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of prime- painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view. D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK 05310-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; � d � E FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � ; f � < r � ; < � � , � C 5 � C Y $ Y £ t 9 t t [ � t F Y 1 � STEEL DECK 05310-6 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO > I FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 05400-COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 3. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding ., design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: . c. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F(67 deg C). 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 3/4 inch (19 mm) . B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold- Formed Steel Framing -General Provisions." 1. Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." 2. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � i E � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 = 1.3 SUBMITTALS � � � A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. i � � C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and rypes of cold formed � metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical � fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. � 1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include � structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer � � responsible for their preparation. � F D. Welding certificates. � ; F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, � indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of � comprehensive tests for current products: fi # 1. Steel sheet � 2. Expansion anchors. $ 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. j 5. Vertical deflection clips. � � F 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed metal framing. � � - 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE _ � C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated. i D. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with 5 requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total } elongation, chemical requirements,ductility, and metallic-coating thickness. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code—Steel,"and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel." ` > ; F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a � testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. � ; i � j � COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-2 �� OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 G. AISI Specifications and Standards: Compty with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold- Formed Steel Framing -General Provisions." 2. Comply with AISI's"Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Allied Studco. 2. AIISteel Products, Inc. 3. California Expanded Metal Products Company. 4. Clark Steel Framing. 5. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 6. Craco Metals Manufacturing, LLC. 7. Custom Stud, Inc. 8. Dale/Incor. 9. Design Shapes in Steel. 10. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 11. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). 12. Innovative Steel Systems. 13. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries. 14. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 15. SCAFCO Corporation. 16. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc. 17. Steel Construction Systems. 18. Steeler, Inc. 19. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 20. United Metal Products, Inc. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � t Y i. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � F 2.2 MATERIALS t B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of i grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance . 2. Coating: G90(Z275)or equivalent . � -; � 2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,with stiffened flanges, and as indicated in the Structural Drawings. r B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and thicknesses to match studs. � D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; ; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free _ vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and � transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: ; � 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, ' �� manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ' a. Allied Studco. ;� � b. AIISteel Products, Inc. c. California Expanded Metal Products Company. d. Clark Steel Framing. � e. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. f. Craco Metals Manufacturing, LLC. g. Custom Stud, Inc. � 5 h. Dale/Incor. i. Design Shapes in Steel. ` j. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. ' k. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). I. Innovative Steel Systems. m. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries. n. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. o. SCAFCO Corporation. ; p. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc. q. Steel Construction Systems. r. Steeler, Inc. s. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. t. United Metal Products, Inc. G � � COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-4 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.9 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003lA 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates. 2.10 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 , threaded carbon-steel headless, hooked bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C . C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing peF ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capabiliry to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self- tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035 . COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ;� � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, � � ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with € minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time. F ; D. Shims: Load bearing, high-densiry multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. � 2.12 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications ; and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. � a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, � appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. � 5 B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and � erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent ; distortion. � � C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet(1:960)and as follows: ; 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out�f-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm). ! � h COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage. .. C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. D. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL . A. Cold-formed meta� framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop-or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position befinreen fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch � fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. s a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding a work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and F complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. f , E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. � � F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads = comparable in intensiry to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces t and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has � been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. ; G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. F H. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, < that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. ` � � I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's � ; standard punched openings. � J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to � a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet(1:960)and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.� EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: ' 1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. � � C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls � or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. � COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-8 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i , �, FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Install single-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches(1220 mm)apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches (305 mm) of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractors expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.9 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO :fi � {' { FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ;� VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 �: � r t � Y t i t i Y r` : S t ¢ � � z r � COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-10 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � �' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 3. Steel framing and supports for sectional doors. 5. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 6. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 9. Elevator machine beams and hoist beams . 10. Support angles for elevator door sills. 12. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 13. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections. 15. Miscellaneous steel trim including trim at rough timbers, glued- laminated beams, and other conditions indicated . 16. Metalladders. 17. Metal gates and enclosures. 20. Metal bollards. �� 21. Pipe guards. 22. Snow fences, bases, and supports at asphalt shingle roofing. 23. Mechanical equipment roof screens. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. � C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete. 3. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." 4. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs." 5. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings." 8. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings.° 9. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for metal framing anchors. 10. Division 6 Section "Heavy Timber Construction"for timber connectors. 11. Division 6 Section "Structural Glued-Laminated Timber"for timber connectors. 12. Division 10 Section "Wire Mesh Partitions." 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO :� � f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of � connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. r _ �: ; : 1.3 SUBMITTALS ; 3 � A. Product Data: For the following: � � 4. Paint products. 5. Grout. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of inetal fabrications and their ` connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other a Sections. _ 3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. � � E. Welding certificates. F. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. � : � � � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Steel." 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel." ; 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. ¢ 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. t f � METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists,the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. .. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. � 2.3 METALS, GENERAL • A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.4 FERROUS METALS � A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. G. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. � METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO -£ � 7 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET '� VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 £ € 2.6 FASTENERS � A. Generai: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for ' exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, ' Class Fe2n 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. `' Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. i 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ; � � A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" and f Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings." , C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. f D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. � G. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast- � in-Place Concrete"for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28- , day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. � 2.8 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembljr: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or ? otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight $ edges. � E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: ; 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and � corrosion resistance of base metals. ? 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. � 3. Remove welding flux immediately. � E F METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-4 ' OZ Architecture Boulder, CO € � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 2. Fumish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed. D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. 2.10 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 ; 2.12 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES � r A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete � construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates after fabrication. x 2.13 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported � from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.14 STEEL FRAMING AND SUPPORTS FOR SECTIONAL DOORS A. Fabricate structural-steel sectional door frames from steel shapes, plates, and bars, fully welded together. Plug-weld built-up members and continuously weld exposed joints. t Reinforce frames and drill and tap as necessary to accept sectional door frames and accessories. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for securing door frames into � adjoining concrete or masonry. C. Galvanize steel frames after fabrication. � � . 2.15 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM � � f A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter comers and use � concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts,fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim, where indicated. 2.16 SNOW FENCES, BASES AND SUPPORTS i A. Fabricate units from steel shapes and sizes indicated, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. Provide fences, bases, and concealed supports required for project snow loads. � METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-6 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO ` FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. C. Galvanize exterior components after fabrication. D. Powder-Coat Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked-0n finish, suitable for use indicated, consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat. 2.17 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 2. Provide nonslip surFaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum- oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout. 3. Galvanize exterior ladders and interior ladders, where indicated, including brackets and fasteners. � C. Ladder Guards: 1. At ladders for attic and/or roof access, provide ladder guard to prevent unauthorized use of ladder. Fabricate guards from minimum 1/8-inch-thick aluminum plate, mill finish. Provide guards with continuous piano hinge one side attached to ladder siderail. Provide padlock hasp at top and bottom. Guard height: minimum 7'-6" above • finish floor. 2.20 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe, unless otherwise indicated. 2.21 PIPE GUARDS A. Fabricate pipe guards from 3/8-inch- thick by 12-inch- wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch anchor bolts. B. Galvanize pipe guards after fabrication. 2.26 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-7 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � 's � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ; VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � f B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. _ � 2.27 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES ' 1 A. Galvanizing: Hot�iip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. ? 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1 B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors(SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of inetal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel,"for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, creviCes, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. E PART 3 - EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and �elevation; E with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that # are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip � galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and � corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. ; 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded � METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-8 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag boits, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. I�i j 3.3 INSTALLING SNOW FENCES, BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide snow fence assemblies at locations indicated. Coordinate installation with flashings and sealants required for weathertight installation. 3.4 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and mason bearin surfaces of bond-reducin materials, and rou hen to rY 9 9 9 II im rove bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of lates. . P P 6. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.5 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS B. Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core-drilled holes not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard. � G. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � { FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 E 3.6 INSTALLING PIPE GUARDS � � A. Provide pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes in parking garage where not protected by curbs or other barriers. Install by bolting to wall or column with expansion anchors. Provide ; four 3/4-inch bolts at each pipe guard. Mount pipe guards with top edge 26 inches above € driving surface. € 3.10 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING �� B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and ; abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. ` � C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair � galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. � EiVD OF SECTION 05500 � � ., z � � f } f R # § t S � � �: � � i { METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 10 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO ; � �' p FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 05511 - METAL STAIRS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 4. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. 5. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms. 4. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings"for ornamental metal railings. 5. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 Ibf/sq. ft. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 Ibf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platForms, and framing members to U360 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. B. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction . b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. METAL STAIRS 05511 -1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 E 3. Infill of Guards: � a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq.ft.. � c. Infiil load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. ; ;: 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following: � � 1. Metal-pan stair treads. '' 7. Paint products. 8. Grout. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. � � 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other k Sections. 2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for � their preparation. ; E. Welding certificates. � .. � F. Qualification Data: For professional engineer . Y � ; 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � f A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for � Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair � � designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. �: � � 1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class. `' � B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: � 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Steel." i 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel." t � 1.5 COORDINATION E s : A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, _ and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not x encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. � � k � 4y k METAL STAIRS 05511 -2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO z � € ' Y FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.3 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.4 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500(cold formed)or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn). G. Iron Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. H. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M, structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "Interior Painting". D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast- in-Place Concrete"for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28- day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTMA 185, 6 by 6 inches—W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated. METAL STAIRS 05511 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � r � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ' VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C � 2.10 FABRICATION, GENERAL � A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts,[railings,] ; clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. R 1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. � � B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble ` units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. c � C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a ; radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough � areas on exposed surfaces. � � D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or fi' t otherwise impairing work. s E. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surFaces and straight ` edges. ` F. Weld connections to comply with the following: Y t 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and � � corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. ; 3. Remove welding flux immediately. ; ` 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated. ;: 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of r adjacent surface. r { G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints,flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners i` � where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F 2.11 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS � A. Stair Framing: ;, 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels . ; a a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers. ; � , 2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members � ° as indicated. � � METAL STAIRS 05511 -4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO F � . 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. B. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.0677 inch. 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting. 4. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. � 2.12 STEEL TUBE RAILINGS A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detaits, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 5. Configuration: As indicated , slea�. B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. C. Form changes in direction of railings as follows: 1. As detailed. D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of inember throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. F. Provide wall retums at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Fumish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated. 3. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized feROUS-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction. H. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. METAL STAIRS 05511 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO .k � � �..:�. F ! i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ; VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent � E bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. ;: 2.13 FINISHES � A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products: � s 2. Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPGSP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." f E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of inetal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel,"for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place constructiori. Include threaded fasteners for ° concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing ' metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip � galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and { corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. i � # f METAL STAIRS 05511 -6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � E FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL TUBE RAILINGS A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows: 1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members. 2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts. B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 2. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 3. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 7. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting and coating Sections. END OF SECTION 05511 METAL STAIRS 05511 -7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � i: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 " '; � � K 4 3 � ? t ? 1 4 � ; METAL STAIRS 05511 -8 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 05532—ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic gratings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Gratings: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Floors: Uniform load of 125 Ibf/sq. ft. or concentrated load of 2000 Ibf, whichever produces the greater stress. 2. Limit deflection to U240 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic gratings. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating gratings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS 05532-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO a � t � s FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 1.5 COORDINATION � � � A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Fumish F: setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, � concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in � concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. � PART 2- PRODUCTS � � 2.2 MANUFACTURERS a A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering { products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the � following: � 1. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Gratings: a. Fibergrate Composite Structures Inc. b. Fisher 8� Ludlow. c. IKG Industries; a Harsco Company. 2.3 FASTENERS $ A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying � with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Anchors: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as � determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. ' i « 2.4 FABRICATION i A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize � field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed G to support indicated loads. � ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS 05532-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 2.5 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC GRATINGS A. Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Gratings: Bar gratings made by placing glass-fiber strands that have been saturated with thermosetting plastic resin in molds in alternating directions to form interlocking bars without voids and with a high resin content. 1. Configuration: 1-1/2-inch- square mesh, thickness as required to comply with structural performance requirements . 2. Resin: Polyester . 3. Color: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Traffic SurFace: Plain, meniscus . C. Fabricate cutouts, if any, in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings. 2.6 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS A. Frames and Supports for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Gratings: Fabricate from glass- fiber-reinforced plastic shapes of sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, use shapes made from same resin as gratings. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts,through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS 05532-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � s'' [ �: FIRST CHAIR � PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � 3.2 INSTALLING GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC GRATINGS ; ; A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing gratings. Use manufacturer's standard stainless-steel anchor clips and hold-down devices for bolted connections. i �: END OF SECTION 05532 i _ Y' S k _ Y 4 � . i 9 t L i E Y i' € i t � ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS 05532-4 ` OZ Architecture Boulder, CO r ! f i• f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � SECTION 05721 -ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the foilowing: 4. Steel and iron omamental railings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs"for steel tube railings included with metal stairs. 3. Division 6 Section"Exterior Finish Carpentry"for wood caps attached to railings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open- sided floor areas, pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 4. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction . � b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 -1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO f � ; 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting � � from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surFace temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. i 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. k D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. � 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. ' C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. � E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railin member, includin handrails to � 9 9 , P rails, posts, and balusters. 3. Fittings and brackets. 4. Welded connections. G. Welding certificates. H. Qualification Data: For professional engineer . I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single § manufacturer. ` D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 for compliance with specified requirements for performance. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. � 1. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction. � ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 -2 ` OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Fabricate and install test assemblies using personnel who will perform the same tasks for Project. 3. Select sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately demonstrate capability of railings to comply with performance requirements. 4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when assemblies will be constructed. 5. When testing is complete, remove assemblies; do not reuse materials on Project. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.3 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal SurFaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 STEEL AND IRON � A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed)or ASTM A 513, Type 5(mandrel drawn). ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO 3 # k I' � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � i VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � B. Bars: Hot-rolied, carbon steei complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010. � Y t C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. E D. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. � s x 1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 2.9 FASTENERS A. General: Where fasteners are indicated, provide the following: ; 5. Uncoated Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, �: Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating where concealed; Type 304 fr stainless-steel fasteners where exposed. i 6. Galvanized Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, �' Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. # 7. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching � " railings to other work, unless exposed fasteners are the standard fastening method for � railings indicated. ; � D. Anchors: Provide anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to ; sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit ; masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as k determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. � 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS f`` � E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. � H. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings." ` k J. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous r [ grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by ` F manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. � ` ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 -4 i OZ Architecture Boulder, CO s € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.11 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. E. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. F. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. G. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. � 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. � K. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. ' 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. L. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. As detailed. M. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of inember throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. N. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings. O. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance befinreen end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO € � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � t P. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall ` finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. � Q. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. R. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate forming bottom closure. 2.14 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. ` � 2.18 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Raifings: � , 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. E' 3. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 4. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. ` �. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. C. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets,fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. � E. Preparation for Shop Priming (Galvanized Railings): After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process. G. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Stripe paint comers, crevices, bolts,welds, and sharp edges. I. High-Performance Coating Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings." � ; � ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 -6 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. PerForm cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. .. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten intemal sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS B. Installing posts in concrete: Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 -7 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO :; � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written � instructions. C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to post with set screws. � E. Anchor steel posts to steel with flanges, angle or floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to metal supporting members. E F. Anchor posts to metal surFaces with flanges, angle type, or floor rype as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: � 4. For steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces. 3.5 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with flanges connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surFaces and welded to railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections. _ 3.6 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS � A. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. � B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: _ . � 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. $ 3.10 CLEANING € F. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting and coating Sections. G. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. ` 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. � ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 -8 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05721 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 -9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO t � F r FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � ;: � � � � �: � ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 -10 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMAR� A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with timber. 3. Framing with engineered wood products. 5. Wood blocking and nailers. 6. Wood furring. 7. Wood sleepers. 9. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 2. Division 6 Section "Heavy Timber Construction." 3. Division 6 Section "Sheathing." 4. Division 6 Section "Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses." 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. I B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension. . . C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) or greater in least dimension. D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the ' following: 4. SPIB: The Southem Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO - �. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer � and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. � Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT)type, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. " B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. D. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design { values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. ; 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. � 4. Power-driven fasteners. 5. Powder-actuated fasteners. 6. Expansion anchors. 7. Metal framing anchors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. . . , , �� ... �. � �er� 7. . ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules- writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are . minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those � indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � €: C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the F ALSC Board of Review. f 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: ` L' t 1. Wood nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with = roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. € 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in � contact with masonry or concrete. � 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. � 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 6. All exterior framing above roof areas. � 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS s ; A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and t AWPA C27 (plywood). E . , fr • � � ' � 3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. � B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing = and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical `� formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect ' finishes. t D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 2. Concealed blocking. ; 6. Plywood backing panels. 7. Levels 1 and 2 non- combustible construction incorporatina rouqh x carpentrv. � � ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent . B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade of any species. D. Exterior and Load-Bearing Walls : No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 2. Southern pine;SPIB. 3. Douglas fir-larch;WCLIB or WWPA. � 8. Douglas fir-larch(north); NLGA. H. Ceiling Joists (Non-Load-Bearing): Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade and any of the following species: 2. Southern ine; SPIB. P 3. Douglas fir-larch;WCLIB or WWPA. � 4. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. 7. Hem-fir;WCLIB or WWPA. 8. Douglas fir-south;lNWPA. 12. Western woods;WCLIB or WWPA. I. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade and any of the following species: .. 3. Douglas fir-larch;WCLIB or WWPA. 6. Douglas fir-south;VW1/PA. 8. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. 2.5 TIMBER FRAMING A. Provide timber framin compl in with the followin requirements, accordin to rading , 9 Y 9 9 9 9 rules of grading agency indicated: 1. Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (north), or pouglas fir- ' south; Select Structural grade; NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.6 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Finnforest USA. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO .1 � i t t. i i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 c. Georgia-Pacific. � d. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. < e. Pacific Woodtech Corporation. :: � " f. Roseburg Forest Products Ca ` g. Weldwood of Canada Limited; Subsidiary of International Paper � Corporation. � h. Weyerhaeuser Company. � 3. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: As indicated in Structural Notes in the Drawings for 12-inch nominal-(286-mm actual-)depth members. ` 4. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: As indicated in Structural Notes in the Drawings � f �: B. Parallel-Strand Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood strand 4 elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored � according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive ' complying with ASTM D 2559. � � 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: r a. Weyerhaeuser Company. 3. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: As indicated in Structural Notes in `' the Drawings . � 4. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: As indicated in Structural Notes in the Drawings C. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055. k 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, : manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Anthony-Domtar Inc. b. Boise Cascade Corporation. ` c. Georgia-Pacific. � d. Huber, J. M. Corporation. e. International Beams Inc. f. International Paper Corporation. § g. Jager Building Systems Inc. � h. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. i. Nascor Incorporated. j. Pacific Woodtech Corporation. k. Roseburg Forest Products Co. I. Standard Structures Inc. ` m. Stark Truss Company, Inc. � � ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-6 ' OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � f # _ ; L £' � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 n. Superior Wood Systems. o. Weyerhaeuser Company. 4. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 . 5. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those indicated. 6. Provide units complying with APA PRI-400, factory marked with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and ��I compliance with APA standard. D. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I joists. 1. Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I joists. 2. Material: product made from any combination solid lumber, wood strands, and veneers. 3. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm) . 4. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board grade, factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and . compliance with APA standard. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER �� A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or. attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Naiters. 5. Furring. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with • 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species. E. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Westem woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade;WCLIB or WWPA. F. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. G. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � F t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 H. For furring strips for instatling plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no � knots capable of producing bent-0ver nails and damage to paneling. � 4 3 r 2.8 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D � Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than � 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness. � 2.9 FASTENERS ` A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure- preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M . B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. . D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME 6182.3.8M). � F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property r Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. � G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.10 METAL FRAMING�ANCHORS � C. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 3. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. 4. KC Metals Products, Inc. 5. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. s ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-8 � - OZ Architecture Boulder, CO t � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 6. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. 7. USP Structurai Connectors. D. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of basis-of�iesign products . Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60(Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated. F. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304 . 1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. G. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-)wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. 1. Thickness: 0.062 inch (1.6 mm). H. I-Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4- .. inch- (32-mm-) wide nailing flanges full depth of joist. Nailing flanges provide lateral support at joist top chord. 1. Thickness: 0.062 inch (1.6 mm). I. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member. 1. Strap Width: 2 inches(50 mm). 2. Thickness: 0.062 inch (1.6 mm). J. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. � K. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 in h 2 mm b v n wi h 2-inch- -mm- minim m i v r o ket c ( 5 ) a o e base a d t (50 ) u s de co e , s c 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch (2.8 mm) thick. L. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners,for tying joists together over supports. 1. Width: 1-1/4 inches(32 mm). 2. Thickness: 0.062 inch (1.6 mm). 3. Length: As indicated. N. Rafter Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) wide by 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) - ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 9 OZ Architecture B I er CO ou d , } t FiRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 thick. Tie fits over top of rafter or truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face � of top plates, and side of stud below. ; O. Floor-to-Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying upper floor wall studs to band joists and lower floor studs, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm)wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick by 36 inches(914 mm) long. P. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed seven bolt diameters from reinforced base. 1. Bolt Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Width: 3-3/16 inches (81 mm). 3. Body Thickness: 0.138 inch (3.5 mm). 4. Base Reinforcement Thickness: 0.239 inch(6.1 mm). 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm)thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. � C. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation ' complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive ` manufacturer. �: D. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing ,� 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. FART 3- EXECUTION � . �: s 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply ` with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 10 � , OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches(406 mm)o.c. H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interFere with function of inember or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative- treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. K. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19- by-63-mm actual-)size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches(610 mm) o.c. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 11 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � { l s FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board : Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-(19-by-38-mm actual-) � size furring vertically at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. , k 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION ` A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to ,y supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- (38-by-140-mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior partitions and walls, provide wood studs in sizes and at spacings indicated in the Drawings. 3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 - inches (2438 mm) high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs rnay be used for interior non-load-bearing partitions. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs and headers not less � � than 4-inch nominal (89-mm actual)depth for openings 48 inches(1200 mm)and less in width, 6-inch nominal (140-mm actual)depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) in width, 8-inch nominal (184-mm actuat) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000 mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual)depth for openings 10 to 12 feet (3 to 3.6 m)in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches (1500 mm) and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide �` headers of depth indicated. t 3.5 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION i A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches (76 mm) on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. Where supported on wood members, by using metal framing anchors. 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. B. Fire Cuts: At joists built into masonry, bevel cut ends 3 inches (76 mm) and do not embed more than 4 inches(102 mm). ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 12 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches(1200 mm). � • > > . ; E. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band. F. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches (102 mm) or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness by depth of joist over supports. G. Anchor members paralleling masonry with 1/4-by-1-1/4-inch (6.4-by-32-mm) metal strap anchors spaced not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c., extending over and fastening to 3 joists. Embed anchors at least 4 inches (102 mm) into grouted masonry with ends bent at right angles and extending 4 inches (102 mm) beyond bend. H. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings. I. Under non-load-bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking � equal to depth of studs above. � 1. Provide triple joists separated as above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile and similar heavy finishes or fixtures. J. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c., befinreen 'oists. 1 1. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-64- mm actual-)size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists. • 2. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. 1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal- (19-by-184-mm actual-) size or 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-) size stringers spaced 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. crosswise over main ceiling joists. B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 13 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � < ,: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each � other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. 1. Provide valley and hip rafters of sizes indicated in the Drawings. D. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar � conditions, if any. 3.7 TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install timber with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches (102 mm) of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members, unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports as indicated if not continuous. B. Where beams or girders are framed into pockets of exterior concrete or masonry walls, provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) air space at sides and ends of wood members. C. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated. D. Treat ends of timber beams and posts exposed to weather by dipping in water- repellent preservative for 15 minutes. 3.9 PROTECTION � f. A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, x despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered 4 borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to � comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 06100 � � i � {: ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-14 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 06130 - HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION PART 1 -GENERAL � 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes framing using timbers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for dimension lumber items associated with heavy timber construction. 2. Division 6 Section "Wood Decking"for wood floor decking. 3. Division 6 Section "Structural Glued-Laminated Timber" for glued-laminated timber. i I 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Timbers: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual)or greater in least dimension. C. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 5. WCLIB -West Coast Lumber�ns ection Bureau. P � 6. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For preservative-treated wood products and timber connectors. 1. For preservative-treated wood products, include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 2. For timber connectors, include installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: For heavy timber construction. Show layout, dimensions of each member, and details of connections. D. Samples: Not less than 5 inches (127 mm) wide by 24 inches (600 mm) long, showing the range of variation to be expected in appearance, including surface texture, of wood products. Apply a coat of penetrating sealer to Samples. E. Material Certificates: 1. For heavy timber construction specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by ALSC's Board of Review. HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130- 1 OZ Architecture Boutder, CO ___ � k � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 k 2. For presenrative-treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and � ; net amount of preseroative retained. For products receiving a waterborne ` treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was '' reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. F. Certificates of Inspection: Issued by lumber grading agency for exposed timber not marked with grade stamp. ; 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE s A. Timber Standard: Comply with AITC 108, "Standard for Heavy Timber Construction." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery of heavy timber construction to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work. B. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. ; PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 TIMBER � � A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. 1. Factory mark each item of timber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed timber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, apply grade ` stamps to surfaces that will not be exposed to view, or omit grade stamps and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. x D. Timber Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch or pouglas fir-larch (North); Select f: t Structural , NLGA, WCLIB,or WWPA. J. Moisture Content: Provide timber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. K. Dressing: Provide dressed timber(S4S) unless otherwise indicated. L. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is i effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible ` with indicated finish. � M. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO a 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Pressure treat timber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA C15 requirements for"sawn building poles and posts as structural members." 1. Timber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated with inorganic boron (SBX) according to AWPA C31 instead of AWPA C15. C. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium. II D. Use process that includes water-repellent treatment. � �I E. Use process that does not include water repellents or other substances that might interfere with application of indicated finishes. F. After treatment, redry timber to 19 percent maximum moisture content. G. Mark treated timber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark each piece on surface that will not be exposed or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. H. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and the following: 1. Sills and similar members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Timber framing members less than 18 inches(460 mm)above grade. . 2.4 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020. � 3. Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. B. Fabricate beam seats from steel with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) bearing plates, 3/4-inch- (19- mm-) diameter-by-12-inch- (300-mm-) long deformed bar anchors, and 0.239-inch (6- mm)side plates. C. Fabricate beam hangers from steel with 0.179-inch (4.6-mm) stirrups and 0.239-inch (6-mm)top plates. D. Fabricate strap ties from steel , 3 inches (75 mm)wide by 0.239 inch (6 mm)thick. HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � F � � 3 2 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET r VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � ; E. Fabricate tie rods from round steel bars with upset threads connected with forged-steel � turnbuckles complying with ASTM A 668/A 668M. � � F. Provide bolts, 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); provide nuts complying � with ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, provide flat washers. � G. Provide shear plates, 4 inches(102 mm) in diameter, complying with ASTM D 5933. ` t I. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with s ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.5 FABRICATION ; � A. Camber: Fabricate horizontal members and inclined members with a slope of less inan 1:1, with natural convex bow(crown)up, to provide camber. B. Shop fabricate members by cutting and restoring exposed surFaces to match specified � surfacing. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks, and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. C. Predrill for fasteners and assembly of units. �� " D. Where preservative-treated members are indicated, fabricate (cut, drill, surface, and � sand) before treatment to greatest extent possible. Where fabrication must be done after treatment, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. � 1. Use inorganic boron (SBX)treatment for members not in contact with the ground = and continuously protected from liquid water. ' � 2. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. E. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. � F. Seal Coat: After fabricating and surfacing each unit, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit except for treated wood where the � treatment included a water repellent. � PART 3- EXECUTION f � 3.1 I NSTALLATION A. General: Erect heavy timber construction true and plumb. Provide temporary bracing � to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. � 1. Install heavy timber construction to comply with Shop Drawings. � � # HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-4 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO z , � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2. Install horizontal and sloping members with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches (102 mm) of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports if not continuous. 3. Handle and temporarily support heavy timber construction to prevent surface damage, compression, and other effects that might interfere with indicated finish. B. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance at tops, sides, and ends of inembers built into masonry, bevel cut ends 3 inches (76 mm); do not embed more than 4 inches(102 mm) unless otherwise indicated. C. Cutting: Avoid extra cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. 1. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks, and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. 2. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. 3. Where preservative-treated members must be cut during erection, apply a field- treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. a. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. b. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from�liquid water. E. Install timber connectors as indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, install bolts with same orientation within each connection and in similar connections. 2. Install bolts with orientation as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged heavy timber construction if repairs are not approved by Architect. ' END OF SECTION 06130 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 �` � 5 4 & i � � t i � :r � � HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-6 " OZ Architecture ` Boulder, CO x � , € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 06150 -WOOD DECKING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Inciudes: 1. Solid-sawn wood roof and floor decking. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for dimension lumber items associated with wood decking. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. For preservative-treated wood products, include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materiaL C. Samples: 24 inches (600 mm) long, showing the range of variation to be expected in appearance of wood decking. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard for Solid-Sawn Wood Decking: Comply with AITC 112. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery of wood decking to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work. B. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. Stack wood decking with surfaces that are to be exposed in the final Work protected from exposure to sunlight. WOOD DECKING 06150- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 E' PART 2- PRODUCTS � � 2.1 WOOD DECKING, GENERAL A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection : agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. B. Moisture Content: Provide wood decking with 15 percent maximum moisture content ' at time of dressing. � 2.2 SOLID-SAWN WOOD DECKING � c � B. Decking Species: Douglas fir-larch or pouglas fir-larch (North) . C. Decking Nominal Size: 3x6 unless otherwise indicated. D. Decking Grade: Select(ed) Decking. � F. Decking Grade: Select(ed) Decking or Select Dex . G. Grade Stamps: Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency. Apply grade stamp to surfaces that will not be exposed to view. e f H. Face Surface: Smooth. � � � I. Edge Pattem: Channel grooved . �� J. Preservative Treatment: Pressure treat solid-sawn wood decking according to E AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX) and redry wood to 15 percent maximum > moisture content. � 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Solid-Sawn Decking: Provide fastener size and type complying with decking standard for thickness of deck used. _ _ t C. Nails: Common; complying with ASTM F 1667, Type I, Style 10. D. Spikes: Round; complying with ASTM F 1667, Type III, Style 3. t F E. Fastener Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel. F. Bolts for Anchoring Decking to Walls: Carbon steel; complying with ASTM A 307 � (ASTM F 568M) with ASTM A 563/A 563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers, all hot-dip zinc coated. � I. Sealant: Elastomeric joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section # "Joint Sealants"for Use NT(nontraffic)and for Uses M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint ` substrates indicated, O joint substrates. � ;, WOOD DECKING 06150-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO r : FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 J. Penetrating Sealer: Clear sanding sealer complying with Division 9 Section "Wood Stains and Transparent Finishes" and compatible with topcoats specified for use over it. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication: Where preservative-treated decking is indicated, complete cutting, trimming, surfacing, and sanding before treating. B. Predrill decking for lateral spiking to adjacent units to comply with referenced decking standard. C. Seal Coat: After fabricating and surfacing decking, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer in fabrication shop. PART 3-EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and support framing in areas to receive wood decking for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wood decking. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install.solid-sawn wood decking to comply with referenced decking standard. 1. Locate end joints for combination simple and finro-span continuous lay-up . C. Anchor wood roof decking, where supported on walls, with bolts as indicated. D. Where preservative-treated decking must be cut during erection, apply a field- treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. 1. For solid-sawn decking, use inorganic boron (SBX). E. Apply joint sealant to seal roof decking at exterior walls at the following locations: 1. Befinreen decking and supports located at exterior walls. 2. Between decking and exterior walls that butt against underside of decking. 3. Between tongues and grooves of decking over exterior walls and supports at exterior walls. WOOD DECKING 06150-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO .� � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.3 ADJUSTING � A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged decking if repairs are not approved by Architect. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide temporary waterproof covering as the Work progresses to protect roof decking until roofing is applied. END OF SECTION 06150 € � � WOOD DECKING 06150-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; ; i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET II VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � SECTION 06160-SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL li 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I�� 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 4. Subflooring. 5. Underlayment. 6. Building paper. II� 7. Building wrap. 9. Flexibfe flashing at openings in sheathing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry "for plywood backing panels. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Flexible Flashinq: Composite, self-adhesive, flashinq product consistinq of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt or modified bituminous compound, bonded to a hiqh-densitv, �2 cross-laminated polvethvlene film. 1. For the purposes of this Proiect, the terms "flexible flashinq" and "membrane flashinq", when used to refer to pliable self- adhesive flashinq, mav be • assumed to be svnonvmous. 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate rype of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of I�I treatment. 6. For building paper and building wrap, include data on air-/moisture-infiltration protection based on testing according to referenced standards. SHEATHING 06160-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � k t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET " VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � t C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in � � = effect for Project: � ! 1 f 1. Preservative-treated plywood. F 4. Building paper. 5. Building wrap. 4 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide � materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. , 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire E Resistance Directory" or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to ; authorities having jurisdiction. w 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING � A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers befinreen each bundle to provide air � circulation. Provide for air circutation around stacks and under coverings. PART2- PRODUCTS � �': � t � 2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL ; ; A. Plywood: DOC PS 1 . ' � B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. � D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. � � ' 2.3 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD 4 A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9. 1. Presenrative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing ` no arsenic or chromium. B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. k � SHEATHING 06160-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO F FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.5 WALL SHEATHING A. P�ywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. C. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corporation. b. "GlasRoc" by Certainteed. c. "Securock" by USG. 2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation. 2.6 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 40/20 . . 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch. B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 40/20 . 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch. 2.8 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Underlayment single-floor panels. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24 o.c. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch . 4. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. 5. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face. B. Oriented-Strand-Board Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: Exposure 1 single-floor panels. SHEATHING 06160-3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � r � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ` VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 ;; � �1. Span Rating: Not less than 24 o.c. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch . _' = 4. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. 5. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face. � C. Plywood Subflooring: Exposure 1, Structural I single-floor panels or sheathing. � 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24 o.c. or 40/20 . �: 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch . D. Oriented-Strand-Board Subflooring: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. ` 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24 o.c. or 40/20 . � 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch . f { E 2.9 FASTENERS = t � A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements ,' specified in this Article for material and manufacture. r ; � 1. For roof sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with � ASTM A 153/A 153M . � B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. � � D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. ` � t E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: � ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by � screw manufacturer for material being fastened. � 1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other � corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours � according to ASTM B 117. ' _ F. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. ; 1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with - ASTM C 1002. 2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 954. � '' SHEATHING 06160-4 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � ; iFIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET i VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.10 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER I - - A. Buildin Pa er: UBC Standard 14-1 Grade D water va or ermeable kraft buildin I 9 P , � P P . 9 paper), except that water resistance shall be not less than 1 hour and water-vapor transmission shall be not less than 75 g/sq. m x 24 h. 1. Product: "Super Jumbo Tex 60 Minute", Fortifiber Building Systems Group. 2. Locations: a. Exterior walls with plaster finishes. b. Exterior walls with masonry finishes. c. Other locations indicated. B. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. DuPont(E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek CommercialWrap . 3. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 163 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours �. per ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). 4. Air Infiltration: Not more than .001 cfm through 1 sq. ft. of surface at a pressure of 1.57 psf per ASTM E 2178. 5. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months. 6. Locations: a. Exterior walls with siding. b. Other locations indicated. C. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plas�ic tape recommended by building-wrap II manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compourid, bonded to a high�iensity, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch . 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace 8� Co. - Conn.; Vycor Plus Self-Adhered Flashing . SHEATHING 06160-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for � z substrate. PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL � A. Do not use materials with defects that impair qualiry of sheathing or pieces that are too i small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. � B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. �: 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICCs"Intemational Building Code." ` D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not f fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish �_; materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. �� E. Coordinate wall androof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so ' these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from � passing through completed assembly. � � F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of z structural support elements. ` � G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. � 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION ` � A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide,"for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. F � 2. Subflooring: � � a. Glue and nail to wood framing. y b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. � SHEATHING 06160-6 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. � � 3. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws. 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing. .. D. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 3.8 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion-or control joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise indicated. C. Building Paper: Apply two layers as recommended by manufacturer. Apply each layer horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. D. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten building wrap to suitable substrate with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 2. Seal seams, edges,fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 3. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. SHEATHING 06160-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO E i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.10 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION � A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions. �` 1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to �: ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. 3.11 PROTECTION � A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes until date of Substantial Completion. B. Reniove and replace products that become damaged during construction operations. i END OF SECTION 06160 � � � � } f � SHEATHING 06160-8 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 06176 - METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood roof trusses. 4. Wood truss bracing. 5. Metal truss accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 2. Division 6 Section "Sheathing"for roof sheathing and subflooring. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of inetal- plate-connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site. B. TPI: Truss Plate Institute, Inc. C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB: The Southem Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 unless more stringent requirements are specified below. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of span. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal truss accessories, and fasteners. METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � x � € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment � manufacturer and certification by treating piant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to � truss fabricator. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details for trusses. 1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of : truss required. � 2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber. . 3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss members due to design loads. 4. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates. '' 5. Show splice details and bearing details. 6. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. �: D. Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, signed by officer of � , truss fabricating firm. � E. Qualification Data: For metal-plate manufacturer, professional engineer, fabricator, and Installer. . F. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum � allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design = values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the fol�owing, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Wood-preservative-treated lumber. 3. Metal-plate connectors. 4. Metal truss accessories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member _ of TPI and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates. � ;: METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176-2 r OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � E � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibiliry. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized qualiry-assurance program that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third- party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates from a single manufacturer. D. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications: 1. TPI1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." 2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 3. TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." E. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF8�PA's �� "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction"and its "Supplement." � i 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations of TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing 8� Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood � Trusses." 1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. . 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverin s. 9 B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Time delive and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site stora e and to avoid rY 9 dela in ro ress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. I Y 9P 9 � METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO a � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � PART 2 - PRODUCTS � i 2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. � 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade :' stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. _ 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 4. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of ' dressing. ` B. Grade and Species: For truss chord and web members, provide dimension lumber of a+� species indicated in the Structural General Notes, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without exceeding allowable design values according to AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction"and its "Supplement." . . E �� . . . • ; . � . . ; . g • . ; . . ; . . ; . . ; • • � • ; , E. Minimum Chord Size For Roof Trusses: 2 by 6 inches nominal (38 by 140 mm actual) for both top and bottom chords. - ti F. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous►umber in Division 6 SectionRough Carpentry. r � METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176-4 � � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that trusses that are not in contact with the ground and are continuously protected from liquid water may be made from lumber treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. For exposed trusses indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed trusses indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Application: Treat trusses where indicated on Drawings. 2.4 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Cherokee Metal Products, Inc.; Masengill Machinery Company. 3. CompuTrus, Inc. 4. Eagle Metal Products. 5. Jager Building Systems, Inc. 6. MiTek Industries, Inc.; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc. 7: Robbins Engineering, Inc. 8. TEE-LOK Corporation; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc. 9. Truswal Systems Corporation. C. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1. D. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high- strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G60 (Z180)coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)thick. METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176-5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � ;: � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 �; 2.5 FASTENERS � A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. � 1. Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground contact, made from pressure- _ preservative treated wood, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M . � B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. � C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. - E. Lag Bolts: ASME 618.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). � F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property r Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. � G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when P installed��in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a � qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. ` � r 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, fi Class Fe/Zn 5. � 2.6 METAL TRUSS ACCESSORIES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. 3. KC Metals Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 5. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. f 6. USP Structural Connectors. � ' D. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated . Manufacturer's published ; values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. ? � . � METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176-6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; 3 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot�iip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60(Z180)coating designation. G. Truss Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm)thick. Tie fastens to one side of truss, top plates, and side of stud below. H. Truss Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) wide by 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Tie fits over top of truss and fastens to both sides of truss, top plates, and one side of stud below. J. Roof Truss Clips: Angle clips for bracing bottom chord of roof trusses at non-load- bearing walls, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick. Clip is fastened to truss through slotted holes to allow for truss deflection. L. Roof Truss Bracing/Spacers: U-shaped channels, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)wide by 1 inch (25 mm) deep by 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, made to fit befinreen 2 adjacent trusses and accurately space them apart, and with tabs having metal teeth for fastening to trusses. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. B. Protective Coatings: SSPC-Paint 22, epoxy-polyamide primer or SSPC-Paint 16, coal- tar epoxy-polyamide paint. 2.8 FABRICATION . A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for rypes of joint designs indicated. C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformiry and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 " PART 3-EXECUTION � ' F 3.1 INSTALLATION ;� � A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and F secured. ` � �: B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before ; installing. � 4 C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, k exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other ; � causes. � t € D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. � � E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. ' €, F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently ; fastening. � � G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in truss accessories according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instn.�ctions. � ` H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses. � � 1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated. � I. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction � loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or � beams. k 1. Install bracing to comply with Division 6 Section Rough Carpentry. J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. a K. Do not cut or remove truss members. ' � r L. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. : £ 1. Do not alter trusses in field. 3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered ; borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered � IabeL � . - - 1 - � # METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06 76 8 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO f t & � � 9 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. D. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of inetal connector plates. Brush apply primer,when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating. 1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system manufacturer. END OF SECTION 06176 ,t � METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � r FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � Y t a � �; a t � r 4 S t t. B£ 4 F � { �' �5 i { 1. i [ F � � � !- 4 f � 3 1 3 t � METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176- 10 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO { � i � � s FIRST CHAiR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 06185 -STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes framing using structural glued-laminated timber. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for dimension lumber items associated with structural glued-laminated timber. 2. Division 6 Section "Heavy Timber Construction"for framing using timbers . 3. Division 6 Section '1Nood Decking"for wood roof and floor decking. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Glued-Laminated (Glulam) Timber: An engineered, stress-rated timber product assembled from selected and prepared wood laminations bonded together with adhesives and with the grain of the laminations approximately parallel longitudinally. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, and protection. 2. For preservative-treated wood products, include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 3. For connectors, include installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Show layout of structural glued-laminated timber system and full dimensions of each member. 2. Indicate species and laminating combination, adhesive type, and other variables in required work. 3. Include large-scale details of connections. D. Samples: Full width and depth, 24 inches (600 mm) long, showing the range of variation to be expected in appearance of structural glued-laminated timber, including variations due to specified treatment. 1. Apply specified factory finish to three sides of half length of each Sample. STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06185- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � F ° FIRS i CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � S F. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency p. _ indicating that structural glued-laminated timber complies with requirements in s AITC A190.1. s; , � G. Material Certificates: For preservative-treated wood products, from manufacturer. `; Indicate rype of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. ; �: H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For structural glued-laminated timber and timber ' connectors,from IBC. � s 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE �� A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide factory�lued structural units produced by an AITC-or APA-licensed firm. ' 1. Factory mark each piece of structural glued-laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS trademark. Place mark on surfaces that will not be exposed in the completed Work. B. Quality Standard: Comply with AITC A190.1. � � � 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Com I with rovisions in AITC 111. � ' PY P ; s B. Individually wrap members using plastic-coated paper covering with water-resistant � seams. € PART 2-PRODUCTS � � , � 2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER x: A. General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC 117 or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ; `' 1. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from single species. � s 2. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from solid lumber laminations; do � � not use laminated veneer lumber. ` 3. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made with wet-use adhesive complying � with ASTM D 2559. t � B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: Douglas fir-larch in � grades needed to comply with "Performance Requirements"Article. ` � D. Species and Grades for Beams and Purlins: � _ { STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06185-2 €` , OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � , i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Species and Beam Stress Classification: Douglas fir-larch, 24F-1.8E . 2. Lay-up: Balanced . F. Species and Grades for Truss Members: 1. Species and Combination Symbol: Douglas fir-larch, 1 . G. Appearance Grade: Architectural , complying with AITC 110. 1. Use clear wood inserts, of matching grain and color, for filling voids and knot holes more than 1/4 inch (6 mm)wide. H. Preservative Treatment after Fabrication: Where preservative-treated structural glued- laminated timber is indicated, pressure treat after fabrication according to AWPA C28. 1. Use oxine copper(copper-8-quinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent. J. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. K. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. 2.2 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. . B. Fabricate beam seats from steel with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) bearing plates, 3/4-inch- (19- mm-) diameter-by-12-inch- (300-mm-) long deformed bar anchors, and 0.239-inch (6- mm)side plates. D. Fabricate beam hangers from steel with 0.179-inch (4.6-mm) stirrups and 0.239-inch (6-mm)top plates. G. Fabricate tie rods from round steel bars with upset threads connected with forged-steel tumbuckles complying with ASTM A 668/A 668M. H. Provide bolts, 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); nuts complying with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. J. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust-inhibitive primer, 2-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06185-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 9: € r ,; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET x VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 K. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with � ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. ` � 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes. 1. Dress exposed surfaces to remove planing or surFacing marks and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. B. Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span. � f C. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces ` flood coated for not less than 10 minutes. - D. Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit, except for presenrative-treated wood where treatment included a water repellent. x � 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING , � B. Clear Finish: Manufacturers standard, finro-coat, clear conversion varnish finish; oven dried and resistant to mildew and fungus.. . � PART 3 - EXECUTION s 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates in areas to receive structural glued-laminated timber, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of structural glued-laminated timber. � B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb, and with unifo�rn, ; close-fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Lift with padded slings and protect corners with wood blocking. t 2. Install structural glued-laminated timber to comply with Shop Drawings. 3. Install timber connectors as indicated. � ` STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06185-4 ; ' OZ Architecture Boulder,CO E t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance at tops, sides, and ends of inembers built into masonry; bevel cut ends 3 inches (76 mm); and do not embed more than 4 inches(102 mm) unless otherwise indicated. D. Cutting: Avoid cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. 1. Where preservative-treated members must be cut during erection, apply a field- treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. a. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. b. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surFaces after completing erection. Replace damaged structural glued-laminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades. 1. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work specified in Division 9. Retain wrapping where it can serve as a painting shield. END OF SECTION 06185 � STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06185-5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAiL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � x - ; _ y � ; § � i � 1 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06185-6 ; OZ Architecture Boulder,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 06201 -EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior standing and running trim for exterior applications, including the following: a. Typical balcony railing top rails. b. Fascia and trim as part of heavy timber and glued- laminated beam construction, rough carpentry, and as accessories to siding or soffits. c. Horizontal slats at wood deck posts. d. Roof fasciae and trim. e. Trellis trim. f. Opening trim. g. Other conditions indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Division 7 Section"Siding"for fiber-cement siding and trim. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them,,include the following: 1. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 2. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material. 2. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. � B. Samples for Verification: EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 - 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � Y FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products, with 1/2 of exposed surface � ;; finished; 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. � C. Compliance Certificates: � 1. For preservative-treated wood that is not marked with treatment quality mark. � 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ? A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers befinreen each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. ' 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS ; ' A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather f conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be G applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. Y _ f B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. ��Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, s discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. � 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or � splotchy surFace contamination and discoloration. PART 2-PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL � � A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ` ALSCs Board of Review. ; 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating � grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. t t 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: t 1. Lumber: AWPA C2. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 : percent. � 2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing t no arsenic or chromium. EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -2 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 4. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. a. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. 5. Application: All exterior lumber and plywood. 2.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish: 1. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, Grade C and Better Clear ; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 4. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate. 1. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, provide hot-dip galvanized steel fasteners. 2. For applications not otherwise indicated, provide hot-dip galvanized steel fasteners. B. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" . for flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches (125 mm), except members with ends exposed in finished work. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm)or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO t �' , FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ' VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 5 B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, � moisture damaged, and mold damaged. � C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL :t A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. � B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use k concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. ' 2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. _ Install adjoining exterior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. � 3. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. f Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish � � carpentry. � ; s 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. ; B. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long except `: where necessary. � s 1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members. C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight- fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Plane backs of casings to ; provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. ; D. Unless otherwise indicated, countersink fasteners, fill surFace flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. t � ; EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � i , t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory- applied finishes to restore damaged or soifed areas. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or .. splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 06201 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � x: � s t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � t F t �: � � �: t i � K f € l f F F 4 � � f 4 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -6 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � i 4 f s; i f: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Interior frames and jambs. 7. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 9. Plastic-laminate countertops. 10. Solid-surfacing-material countertops. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate; solid-surfacing material; cabinet hardware and accessories . C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, bfocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures; faucets; and other items items installed in architectural woodwork. E. Samples for Verification: 5. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish,with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge. 6. Thermoset decorative-panels, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattem, and surface finish,with edge banding on 1 edge. 7. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � 's FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 F 8. Comer pieces as follows: � _� s b. Miter joints for standing trim. 9. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each rype. H. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. _ X 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE " A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate ' products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of s successful in-service performance.lnstaller Qualifications: Fabricator of products, or Shop a that employs skilled workers who install products similar to those required for this Project f and whose installations have a record of successful in-service performance Qualiry � Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality = Standards"for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, ` installation, and other requirements. G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to � demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of � ; Substantial Completion. � � e H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements : in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." ` 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork _ have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with °�; requirements specified in "Project Conditions"Article. � 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS � x A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet � work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative ` humidiry at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 4 C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify E dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate $ measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction � progress to avoid delaying the Work. � � 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop = Drawings. $ � f INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO # � € f �'. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Systems Coordination: Distribute copies of approved Shop Drawings to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other providers requiring coordination with interior architectural woodwork fabricator and installer. Coordinate fabrication and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.3 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Poplar. D. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 2. Medium-Densiry Fiberboard:ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2., minimum 45 Ib. density. E. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with . thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges. F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork qualiry standard. H. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. 3. Type: Standard type, unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 4. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations . 2.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-thick metal, and as follows: INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO @ FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521. � E E. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal , 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter . � F. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141 . G. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081 . s I. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, 605091. 2. Heavy Duty (Grade 1 HD-100 and Grade 1 HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. K. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.. L. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. O. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 4. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. P. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. � 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to tess than 15 percent moisture content. E. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed- steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom- grade interior ; woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood ` moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: ; 1. Edges of Solid Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. � � INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 E. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.9 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Corridors Base Mould: Poplar, nominal 6 inches wide.Corridors Chair Rail: Poplar, nominal 4 inches wide.Units Base Mould: MDF, nominal 4 inches wide.Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2.11 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH B. Material: MDF, nominal 4 inches wide.Fire-Rated Interior Frames and Jambs: Products fabricated from fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Fire Rating: 20 minutes. 2.18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS B. AW I Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay . G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS . 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 4. Edges: PVC edge banding 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattem, and finish. H. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade CLS. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO a FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 E 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. � 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood . I. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. 2.20 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS . � C. Colors, Pattems, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and � textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: � 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations. i E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces . F. Core Material: Particleboard . G. Core Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood. I. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate. � 2.21 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 3/4 inch. C. Colors, Pattems, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid- surfacing material complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations . D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing- material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 2. Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application. ` F. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop. i. s � f s INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-6 ` OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 I NSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb(including tops)to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full- length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. 2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. K. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. L. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through comer blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 -7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with � �: manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. � Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. " 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation a from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. ° 4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section k "Joint Sealants." ` M. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. N. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not ; indicated to be shop finished. s ,. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING � � € A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. t B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes � to restore damaged or soited areas. � i END OF SECTION 06402 ; � P . � i e # a z F _ � k � � INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-8 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i; `r r �: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 06640 -PLASTIC PANELING PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic(FRP)wall paneling and trim accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For plastic paneling and trim accessories, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 3. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction . 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.2 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Kemlite Company Inc. PLASTIC PANELING 06640-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � b. Marlite. , � c. Nudo Products, Inc. ' � 3. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch . � 4. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture . ; � 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. � ; 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside comers, outside corners, and caps � as needed to conceal edges. Y 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. � D. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves routed in edges of factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate. _ E. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. F. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." € PART 3-EXECUTION � ` � 3.1 EXAMINATION � A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. g t 3.2 PREPARATION tl S C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. D. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. a E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of � walls not less than half the width of full panels . 4 1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at trim accessory locations for accurate installation. E 2. Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to = manufacturer's written instructions. � � '£ PLASTIC PANELING 06640-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � �. ; � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. E. Install trim accessories with adhesive . F. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside comer trim in a bead of sealant. G. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. I. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 06640 PLASTIC PANELING 06640-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � t � � s £' E £ } S f : � E � 7 � 3' k S f � f z` s € 3 z � �: PLASTIC PANELING 06640-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO �